Patent Application
20140275103
Disclosed herein are compositions, formulations, and methods for treating ocular diseases, inter alia, diabetic macular edema, age-related macular degeneration (wet form), choroidal neovascularization, diabetic retinopathy, retinal vein occlusion (central or branch), ocular trauma, surgery induced edema, surgery induced neovascularization, cystoid macular edema, ocular ischemia, uveitis, and the like. These diseases or conditions are characterized by changes in the ocular vasculature whether progressive or non-progressive, whether a result of an acute disease or condition, or a chronic disease or condition.
Each patent, publication, and non-patent literature cited in the application is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety as if each was incorporated by reference individually.
The eye comprises several structurally and functionally distinct vascular beds, which supply ocular components critical to the maintenance of vision. These include the retinal and choroidal vasculatures, which supply the inner and outer portions of the retina, respectively, and the limbal vasculature located at the periphery of the cornea. Injuries and diseases that impair the normal structure or function of these vascular beds are among the leading causes of visual impairment and blindness. For example, diabetic retinopathy is the most common disease affecting the retinal vasculature, and is the leading cause of vision loss among the working age population in the United States. Vascularization of the cornea secondary to injury or disease is yet another category of ocular vascular disease that can lead to severe impairment of vision.
In some embodiments, the invention provides a method of treating a condition in a subject in need thereof, the method comprising administering to the subject a therapeutically-effective amount of a compound that activates Tie-2, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof, and an agent that increases solubility of the compound that activates Tie-2, or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof as compared to solubility in absence of the agent.
In some embodiments, the invention provides a method of treating a condition in a subject in need thereof, the method comprising administering to the subject a therapeutically-effective amount of a compound that activates Tie-2, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof, wherein the administration provides a plasma concentration in the subject of the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof of about 25 ng/mL to about 500 ng/ml.
In some embodiments, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising: a) a compound that activates Tie-2, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof; and b) an agent that improves the aqueous solubility of the compound that activates Tie-2, or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof.
In some embodiments, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising: a) a Tie-2 activator or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof; and b) an antibody.
In some embodiments, the invention provides a kit comprising: a) a Tie-2 activator or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof; b) an antibody; and c) written instructions on use of the kit in treatment of a condition.
In some embodiments, the invention provides a method of treating a condition, the method comprising administering to a subject in need thereof: a) a therapeutically-effective amount of a Tie-2 activator or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof; and b) a therapeutically-effective amount of an antibody.
In some embodiments, the invention provides a complex comprising: a) a Tie-2 activator, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof; and b) a molecule comprising a channel, wherein the compound that activates Tie-2, or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof is held in the channel of the molecule by non-covalent interactions.
In some embodiments, the invention provides a method of treating a condition, the method comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically-effective amount of complex comprising: a) a Tie-2 activator, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof; and b) a molecule comprising a channel, wherein the compound that activates Tie-2, or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof is held in the channel of the molecule by non-covalent interactions.
Provided herein are compounds and methods of treating ocular disorders that are characterized by vascular instability, vascular leakage, and neovascularization. HPTP-β is a member of the receptor-like family of the protein tyrosine phosphatases (PTPases). HPTP-β is a transmembrane protein found primarily in endothelial cells that displays structural and functional similarity to cell adhesion molecules (CAMs). HPTP-β is unique among receptor-like PTPases in that it contains a single catalytic domain. One of the main functions of HPTP-β is to regulate Tie-2 negatively.
Tie-2 is a receptor tyrosine kinase found almost exclusively in endothelial cells. The principle regulators of Tie-2 phosphorylation are Angiopoietin-1 (Ang-1) and Angiopoietin-2 (Ang-2). Upon Angiopoietin-1 binding to Tie-2, the level of Tie-2 receptor phosphorylation increases. The duration of Tie-2 receptor phosphorylation is regulated by HPTP-β, which cleaves off the phosphate. Tie-2 receptor phosphorylation helps maintain endothelial cell proximity; therefore, the duration of Tie-2 receptor phosphorylation is an important determinant of endothelial cell proximity. For example, when severe inflammation occurs, the capillary endothelial cells separate, allowing proteins, to enter the interstitial space. Separation of the capillary endothelial cells, and subsequent leak of proteins in the interstitial space, is known as vascular leak and can lead to dangerous hypotension (low blood pressure), edema, hemoconcentration, and hypoalbuminemia. Inhibition of HPTP-β leads to increased levels and Tie-2 receptor phosphorylation, a process that can maintain or restore capillary endothelial cell proximity.
The present disclosure relates to compositions and methods for treating conditions, such as ocular diseases, for example, those wherein neovascularization and vascular leakage are present. These diseases are sometimes characterized as diseases wherein there is an elevated angiogenic response in the vessels associated with the eye. The present disclosure provides a Human Protein Tyrosine Phosphatase-beta (HPTP-β) inhibitor that provides vascular stabilization.
Compounds disclosed herein can be effective as Tie-2 activators. The compounds can effect that activity, for example, by binding or inhibiting HPTP-β Such compounds can bind, for example, by mimicking the binding mechanism of a native substrate, such as a phosphorylated compound. A compound can be a phosphate mimetic or bioisostere, for example, a sulfamic acid. The compound could also be derived from an amino acid building block or comprise an amino acid backbone for efficiency and economy of synthesis.
In some embodiments, a compound of the invention is a compound of formula:
wherein:
Aryl1 is an aryl group which is substituted or unsubstituted; Aryl2 is an aryl group which is substituted or unsubstituted; X is alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, an ether linkage, an amine linkage, an amide linkage, an ester linkage, a thioether linkage, a carbamate linkage, a carbonate linkage, a urethane linkage, a sulfone linkage, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted, or a chemical bond; and Y is H, aryl, heteroaryl, NH(aryl), NH(heteroaryl), NHSO2Rg, or NHCORg, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted, or
wherein
L2 is alkylene, alkenylene, or alkynylene, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted, or together with the nitrogen atom to which L is bound forms an amide linkage, a carbamate linkage, a urethane linkage, or a sulfonamide linkage, or a chemical bond, or together with any of Ra, Rb, Rc, and Rd forms a ring that is substituted or unsubstituted. Ra is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted, or together with any of L2, Rb, Rc, and Rd forms a ring that is substituted or unsubstituted. Rb is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted, or together with any of L2, Ra, Rc, and Rd forms a ring that is substituted or unsubstituted. Rc is H or alkyl which is substituted or unsubstituted, or together with any of L2, Ra, Rb, and Rd forms a ring that is substituted or unsubstituted. Rd is H or alkyl which is substituted or unsubstituted, or together with any of L2, Ra, Rb, and Rc forms a ring that is substituted or unsubstituted, and Rg is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt, tautomer, or zwitterion thereof.
In some embodiments, aryl1 is substituted or unsubstituted phenyl, aryl2 is substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, and X is alkylene. In some embodiments, aryl1 is substituted phenyl, aryl2 is substituted heteroaryl, and X is methylene.
In some embodiments, a compound is of the formula:
wherein
wherein aryl1 is para-substituted phenyl, aryl2 is substituted heteroaryl, X is methylene. L2 is alkylene, alkenylene, or alkynylene, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted, or together with the nitrogen atom to which L is bound forms an amide linkage, a carbamate linkage, a urethane linkage, or a sulfonamide linkage, or a chemical bond. Ra is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted. Rb is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted. Rc is H or alkyl which is substituted or unsubstituted, and Rd is H or alkyl which is substituted or unsubstituted.
In some embodiments, aryl1 is para-substituted phenyl, aryl2 is a substituted thiazole moiety. X is methylene, L2 together with the nitrogen atom to which L is bound forms a carbamate linkage, Ra is alkyl, which is substituted or unsubstituted, Rb is arylalkyl, which is substituted or unsubstituted, Rc is H, and Rd is H.
In some embodiments, Aryl2 is:
wherein Re is H, OH, F, Cl, Br, I, CN, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, an alkoxy group, an ether group, a carboxylic acid group, a carboxaldehyde group, an ester group, an amine group, an amide group, a carbonate group, a carbamate group, a urethane group, a thioether group, a thioester group, a thioacid group, aryl, arylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted, and Rf is H, OH, F, Cl, Br, I, CN, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, an alkoxy group, an ether group, a carboxylic acid group, a carboxaldehyde group, an ester group, an amine group, an amide group, a carbonate group, a carbamate group, a urethane group, a thioether group, a thioester group, a thioacid group, aryl, arylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted.
In some embodiments, Re is H, OH, F, Cl, Br, I, alkyl, an alkoxy group, aryl, arylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted, and Rf is H, OH, F, Cl, Br, I, alkyl, an alkoxy group, aryl, arylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted. In some embodiments, Re is H, OH, F, Cl, Br, I, alkyl, or an alkoxy group, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted and Rf is alkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted. In some embodiments, aryl1 is 4-phenylsulfamic acid, Ra is alkyl, which is substituted or unsubstituted, Rb is arylalkyl, which is substituted or unsubstituted, Re is H; and Rf is heteroaryl. In some embodiments, aryl1 is 4-phenylsulfamic acid, Ra is alkyl, which is substituted or unsubstituted, Rb is arylalkyl, which is substituted or unsubstituted, Re is H; and Rf is alkyl
In some embodiments, Aryl2 is:
wherein Re is H, OH, F, Cl, Br, I, CN, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, an alkoxy group, an ether group, a carboxylic acid group, a carboxaldehyde group, an ester group, an amine group, an amide group, a carbonate group, a carbamate group, a urethane group, a thioether group, a thioester group, a thioacid group, aryl, arylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted, Rf is H, OH, F, Cl, Br, I, CN, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, an alkoxy group, an ether group, a carboxylic acid group, a carboxaldehyde group, an ester group, an amine group, an amide group, a carbonate group, a carbamate group, a urethane group, a thioether group, a thioester group, a thioacid group, aryl, arylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted. In some embodiments, Re is H, OH, F, Cl, Br, I, alkyl, an alkoxy group, aryl, arylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted and Rf is H, OH, F, Cl, Br, I, alkyl, an alkoxy group, aryl, arylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted. In some embodiments, Re is H, OH, F, Cl, Br, I, alkyl, or an alkoxy group, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted and Rf is alkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted. In some embodiments, aryl1 is 4-phenylsulfamic acid, Ra is alkyl, which is substituted or unsubstituted, Rb is arylalkyl, which is substituted or unsubstituted, Re is H; and Rf is heteroaryl.
In some embodiments, a substituted phenyl group is:
wherein:
each of Rph1, Rph2, Rph3, Rph4, and Rph5 is independently H, OH, F, Cl, Br, I, CN, sulamic acid, tosylate, mesylate, triflate, besylate, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, an alkoxy group, a sulfhydryl group, a nitro group, a nitroso group, an azido group, a sulfoxide group, a sulfone group, a sulfonamide group, an ether group, a carboxylic acid group, a carboxaldehyde group, an ester group, an amine group, an amide group, a carbonate group, a carbamate group, a urethane group, a thioether group, a thioester group, a thioacid group, aryl, arylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl
Non-limiting examples of optional substituents include hydroxyl groups, sulfhydryl groups, halogens, amino groups, nitro groups, nitroso groups, cyano groups, azido groups, sulfoxide groups, sulfone groups, sulfonamide groups, carboxyl groups, carboxaldehyde groups, imine groups, alkyl groups, halo-alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, halo-alkenyl groups, alkynyl groups, halo-alkynyl groups, alkoxy groups, aryl groups, aryloxy groups, aralkyl groups, arylalkoxy groups, heterocyclyl groups, acyl groups, acyloxy groups, carbamate groups, amide groups, urethane groups, and ester groups.
The following are non-limiting examples of units which can substitute for hydrogen atoms:
Non-limiting examples of alkyl and alkylene groups include straight, branched, and cyclic alkyl and alkylene groups. An alkyl group can be, for example, a C1, C2, C3, C4, C5, C6, C7, C8, C9, C10, C11, C12, C13, C14, C15, C16, C17, C18, C19, C20, C21, C22, C23, C24, C25, C26, C27, C28, C29, C30, C31, C32, C33, C34, C35, C36, C37, C38, C39, C40, C41, C42, C43, C44, C45, C46, C47, C48, C49, or C50 group that is substituted or unsubstituted.
Non-limiting examples of straight alkyl groups include methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, and decyl.
Branched alkyl groups include any straight alkyl group substituted with any number of alkyl groups. Non-limiting examples of branched alkyl groups include isopropyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, and t-butyl.
Non-limiting examples of cyclic alkyl groups include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, and cyclooctyl groups. Cyclic alkyl groups also include fused-, bridged-, and spiro-bicycles and higher fused-, bridged-, and spiro-systems. A cyclic alkyl group can be substituted with any number of straight, branched, or cyclic alkyl groups.
Non-limiting examples of alkenyl and alkenylene groups include straight, branched, and cyclic alkenyl groups. The olefin or olefins of an alkenyl group can be, for example, E, Z, cis, trans, terminal, or exo-methylene. An alkenyl or alkenylene group can be, for example, a C2, C3, C4, C5, C6, C7, C8, C9, C10, C11, C12, C13, C14, C15, C16, C17, C18, C19, C20, C21, C22, C23, C24, C25, C26, C27, C28, C29, C30, C31, C32, C33, C34, C35, C36, C37, C38, C39, C40, C41, C42, C43, C44, C45, C46, C47, C48, C49, or C50 group that is substituted or unsubstituted.
Non-limiting examples of alkynyl or alkynylene groups include straight, branched, and cyclic alkynyl groups. The triple bond of an alkylnyl or alkynylene group can be internal or terminal. An alkylnyl or alkynylene group can be, for example, a C2, C3, C4, C5, C6, C7, C8, C9, C10, C11, C12, C13, C14, C15, C16, C17, C18, C19, C20, C21, C22, C23, C24, C25, C26, C27, C28, C29, C30, C31, C32, C33, C34, C35, C36, C37, C38, C39, C40, C41, C42, C43, C44, C45, C46, C47, C48, C49, or C50 group that is substituted or unsubstituted.
Non-limiting examples of substituted and unsubstituted acyclic hydrocarbyl include:
Non-limiting examples of substituted and unsubstituted cyclic hydrocarbyl include: rings comprising from 3 to 20 carbon atoms, wherein the atoms which comprise said rings are limited to carbon atoms, and further each ring can be independently substituted with one or more moieties capable of replacing one or more hydrogen atoms. The following are non-limiting examples of substituted and unsubstituted carbocyclic rings:
i) carbocyclic rings having a single substituted or unsubstituted hydrocarbon ring, non-limiting examples of which include, cyclopropyl (C3), 2-methyl-cyclopropyl (C3), cyclopropenyl (C3), cyclobutyl (C4), 2,3-dihydroxycyclobutyl (C4), cyclobutenyl (C4), cyclopentyl (C5), cyclopentenyl (C5), cyclopentadienyl (C5), cyclohexyl (C6), cyclohexenyl (C6), cycloheptyl (C7), cyclooctanyl (C8), 2,5-dimethylcyclopentyl (C5), 3,5-dichlorocyclohexyl (C6), 4-hydroxycyclohexyl (C6), and 3,3,5-trimethylcyclohex-1-yl (C6).
ii) carbocyclic rings having two or more substituted or unsubstituted fused hydrocarbon rings, non-limiting examples of which include, octahydropentalenyl (C8), octahydro-1H-indenyl (C9), 3a,4,5,6,7,7a-hexahydro-3H-inden-4-yl (C9), decahydroazulenyl (C10).
iii) carbocyclic rings which are substituted or unsubstituted bicyclic hydrocarbon rings, non-limiting examples of which include, bicyclo-[2.1.1]hexanyl, bicyclo[2.2.1]heptanyl, bicyclo[3.1.1]heptanyl, 1,3-dimethyl[2.2.1]heptan-2-yl, bicyclo[2.2.2]octanyl, and bicyclo[3.3.3]undecanyl.
Also included are C1-C6 tethered cyclic hydrocarbyl units (whether carbocyclic units, C6 or C10 aryl units, heterocyclic units, or heteroaryl units) can be connected to another moiety, unit, or core of the molecule by way of a C1-C6 alkylene unit. Non-limiting examples of tethered cyclic hydrocarbyl units include benzyl C1-(C6) having the formula:
wherein Ra is optionally one or more independently chosen substitutions for hydrogen. Further examples include other aryl units, inter alia, (2-hydroxyphenyl)hexyl C6—(C6); naphthalen-2-ylmethyl C1-(C10), 4-fluorobenzyl C1-(C6), 2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)ethyl C2—(C6), as well as substituted and unsubstituted C3-C10 alkylenecarbocyclic units, for example, cyclopropylmethyl C1-(C3), cyclopentylethyl C2—(C5), cyclohexylmethyl C1-(C6); Included within this category are substituted and unsubstituted C1-C10 alkylene-heteroaryl units, for example a 2-picolyl C1-(C6) unit having the formula:
wherein Ra is the same as defined above. In addition, C1-C12 tethered cyclic hydrocarbyl units include C1-C10 alkyleneheterocyclic units and alkylene-heteroaryl units, non-limiting examples of which include, aziridinylmethyl C1-(C2) and oxazol-2-ylmethyl C1-(C3).
A halo group can be any halogen atom, for example, fluorine, chlorine, bromine, or iodine.
A halo-alkyl group can be any alkyl group substituted with any number of halogen atoms, for example, fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine atoms. A halo-alkenyl group can be any alkenyl group substituted with any number of halogen atoms. A halo-alkynyl group can be any alkynyl group substituted with any number of halogen atoms.
An alkoxy group can be, for example, an oxygen atom substituted with any alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl group. An ether or an ether group comprises an alkoxy group. Non-limiting examples of alkoxy groups include methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, isopropoxy, and isobutoxy.
An aryl group can be heterocyclic or non-heterocyclic. An aryl group can be monocyclic or polycyclic. An aryl group can be substituted with any number of substituents described herein, for example, hydrocarbyl groups, alkyl groups, alkoxy groups, and halogen atoms. Non-limiting examples of aryl groups include phenyl, toluoyl, naphthyl, pyrrolyl, pyridyl, imidazolyl, thiophenyl, and furyl.
Non-limiting examples of aryl groups can include: i) C6 or C10 substituted or unsubstituted aryl rings; phenyl and naphthyl rings whether substituted or unsubstituted, non-limiting examples of which include, phenyl (C6), naphthylen-1-yl (C10), naphthylen-2-yl (C10), 4-fluorophenyl (C6), 2-hydroxyphenyl (C6), 3-methylphenyl (C6), 2-amino-4-fluorophenyl (C6), 2-(N,N-diethylamino)phenyl (C6), 2-cyanophenyl (C6), 2,6-di-tert-butylphenyl (C6), 3-methoxyphenyl (C6), 8-hydroxynaphthylen-2-yl (C10), 4,5-dimethoxynaphthylen-1-yl (C10), and 6-cyano-naphthylen-1-yl (C10); and ii) C6 or C10 aryl rings fused with 1 or 2 saturated rings to afford C8-C20 ring systems, non-limiting examples of which include, bicyclo[4.2.0]octa-1,3,5-trienyl (C8), and indanyl (C9).
An aryloxy group can be, for example, an oxygen atom substituted with any aryl group, such as phenoxy.
An aralkyl group can be, for example, any alkyl group substituted with any aryl group, such as benzyl.
An arylalkoxy group can be, for example, an oxygen atom substituted with any aralkyl group, such as benzyloxy.
A heterocycle can be any ring containing a ring atom that is not carbon, for example, N, O, S, P, Si, B, or any other heteroatom. A heterocycle can be substituted with any number of substituents, for example, alkyl groups and halogen atoms. A heterocycle can be aromatic (heteroaryl) or non-aromatic. Non-limiting examples of heterocycles include pyrrole, pyrrolidine, pyridine, piperidine, succinamide, maleimide, morpholine, imidazole, thiophene, furan, tetrahydrofuran, pyran, and tetrahydropyran.
Non-limiting examples of heterocycles include: heterocyclic units having a single ring containing one or more heteroatoms, non-limiting examples of which include, diazirinyl (C1), aziridinyl (C2), urazolyl (C2), azetidinyl (C3), pyrazolidinyl (C3), imidazolidinyl (C3), oxazolidinyl (C3), isoxazolinyl (C3), thiazolidinyl (C3), isothiazolinyl (C3), oxathiazolidinonyl (C3), oxazolidinonyl (C3), hydantoinyl (C3), tetrahydrofuranyl (C4), pyrrolidinyl (C4), morpholinyl (C4), piperazinyl (C4), piperidinyl (C4), dihydropyranyl (C5), tetrahydropyranyl (C5), piperidin-2-onyl (valerolactam) (C5), 2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-1H-azepinyl (C6), 2,3-dihydro-1H-indole (C8), and 1,2,3,4-tetrahydroquinoline (C9); and ii) heterocyclic units having 2 or more rings one of which is a heterocyclic ring, non-limiting examples of which include hexahydro-1H-pyrrolizinyl (C7), 3a,4,5,6,7,7a-hexahydro-1H-benzo[d]imidazolyl (C7), 3a,4,5,6,7,7a-hexahydro-1H-indolyl (C8), 1,2,3,4-tetrahydroquinolinyl (C9), and decahydro-1H-cycloocta[b]pyrrolyl (C10).
Non-limiting examples of heteroaryl include: i) heteroaryl rings containing a single ring, non-limiting examples of which include, 1,2,3,4-tetrazolyl (C1), [1,2,3]triazolyl (C2), [1,2,4]triazolyl (C2), triazinyl (C3), thiazolyl (C3), 1H-imidazolyl (C3), oxazolyl (C3), isoxazolyl (C3), isothiazolyl (C3), furanyl (C4), thiophenyl (C4), pyrimidinyl (C4), 2-phenylpyrimidinyl (C4), pyridinyl (C5), 3-methylpyridinyl (C5), and 4-dimethylaminopyridinyl (C5); and ii) heteroaryl rings containing 2 or more fused rings one of which is a heteroaryl ring, non-limiting examples of which include: 7H-purinyl (C5), 9H-purinyl (C5), 6-amino-9H-purinyl (C5), 5H-pyrrolo[3,2-d]pyrimidinyl (C6), 7H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyrimidinyl (C6), pyrido[2,3-d]pyrimidinyl (C7), 2-phenylbenzo[d]thiazolyl (C7), 1H-indolyl (C8), 4,5,6,7-tetrahydro-1-H-indolyl (C8), quinoxalinyl (C8), 5-methylquinoxalinyl (C8), quinazolinyl (C8), quinolinyl (C9), 8-hydroxy-quinolinyl (C9), and isoquinolinyl (C9).
Non-limiting examples of heteroaryl include 1,2,3,4-tetrahydroquinoline having the formula:
6,7-Dihydro-5H-cyclopentapyrimidine having the formula:
and
1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-[1,8]naphthpyridine having the formula:
An acyl group can be, for example, a carbonyl group substituted with hydrocarbyl, alkyl, hydrocarbyloxy, alkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, aralkyl, arylalkoxy, or a heterocycle. Non-limiting examples of acyl include acetyl, benzoyl, benzyloxycarbonyl, phenoxycarbonyl, methoxycarbonyl, and ethoxycarbonyl.
An acyloxy group can be an oxygen atom substituted with an acyl group. An ester or an ester group comprises an acyloxy group. A non-limiting example of an acyloxy group, or an ester group, is acetate.
A carbamate group can be an oxygen atom substituted with a carbamoyl group, wherein the nitrogen atom of the carbamoyl group is unsubstituted, monosubstituted, or disubstituted with one or more of hydrocarbyl, alkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, or aralkyl. When the nitrogen atom is disubstituted, the two substituents together with the nitrogen atom can form a heterocycle.
In some embodiments, a compound of the disclosure has Formula (I):
wherein the carbon atom having the amino unit has the stereochemistry indicated in the following formula:
The units which comprise R and Z can comprise units having any configuration, and, as such, a compound of the disclosure can be a single enantiomer, a diastereomer, or pairs or combinations thereof. In addition, the compounds can be isolated as salts or hydrates. In the case of salts, the compounds can comprise more than one cation or anion. In the case of hydrates, any number of water molecules, or fractional part thereof (for example, less than 1 water molecule present for each molecule of analogue) can be present.
R is a substituted or unsubstituted thiazolyl unit having the formula:
R2, R3, and R4 are substituent groups that can be independently chosen from a wide variety of non-carbon atom containing units (for example, hydrogen, hydroxyl, amino, halogen, and nitro) or organic substituent units, such as substituted and unsubstituted acyclic hydrocarbyl and cyclic hydrocarbyl units as described herein. The carbon comprising units can comprise, for example, from 1 to 12 carbon atoms, or 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
An example of compounds of Formula (I) include compounds wherein R units are thiazol-2-yl units having the formula:
wherein R2 and R3 are each independently chosen from:
The following are non-limiting examples of units that can substitute for one or more hydrogen atoms on the R2 and R3 units. The following substituents, as well as others not herein described, are each independently chosen from:
An example of compounds of Formula (I) includes R units having the formula:
wherein R3 is hydrogen and R2 is a unit chosen from methyl (C1), ethyl (C2), n-propyl (C3), iso-propyl (C3), n-butyl (C4), sec-butyl (C4), iso-butyl (C4), tert-butyl (C4), n-pentyl (C5), 1-methylbutyl (C5), 2-methylbutyl (C5), 3-methylbutyl (C5), cyclopropyl (C3), n-hexyl (C6), 4-methylpentyl (C6), and cyclohexyl (C6).
An example of compounds of Formula (I) include R units having the formula:
wherein R2 is a unit chosen from methyl (C1), ethyl (C2), n-propyl (C3), iso-propyl (C3), n-butyl (C4), sec-butyl (C4), iso-butyl (C4), and tert-butyl (C4); and R3 is a unit chosen from methyl (C1) or ethyl (C2). Non-limiting examples of this aspect of R includes 4,5-dimethylthiazol-2-yl, 4-ethyl-5-methylthiazol-2-yl, 4-methyl-5-ethylthiazol-2-yl, and 4,5-diethylthiazol-2-yl.
An example of compounds of Formula (I) includes R units wherein R3 is hydrogen and R2 is a substituted alkyl unit, said substitutions chosen from:
Further non-limiting examples of units that can be a substitute for a R2 or R3 hydrogen atom on R units include 2,2-difluorocyclopropyl, 2-methoxycyclohexyl, and 4-chlorocyclohexyl.
An example of compounds of Formula (I), R units include units wherein R3 is hydrogen and R2 is phenyl or substituted phenyl, wherein non-limiting examples of R2 units include phenyl, 3,4-dimethylphenyl, 4-tert-butylphenyl, 4-cyclopropylphenyl, 4-diethylaminophenyl, 4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl, 4-methoxyphenyl, 4-(difluoromethoxy)-phenyl, 4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl, 3-chloropheny, 4-chlorophenyl, and 3,4-dichlorophenyl, which when incorporated into the definition of R affords the following R units 4-phenylthiazol-2-yl, 3,4-dimethylphenylthiazol-2-yl, 4-tert-butylphenylthiazol-2-yl, 4-cyclopropylphenylthiazol-2-yl, 4-diethylaminophenylthiazol-2-yl, 4-(trifluoromethyl)-phenylthiazol-2-yl, 4-methoxyphenylthiazol-2-yl, 4-(difluoromethoxy)phenylthiazol-2-yl, 4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenylthiazol-2-yl, 3-chlorophenylthiazol-2-yl, 4-chlorophenylthiazol-2-yl, and 3,4-dichlorophenylthiazol-2-yl.
An example of compounds of Formula (I) includes R units wherein R2 is chosen from hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, and iso-propyl and R3 is phenyl or substituted phenyl. A non-limiting example of a R unit according to the fifth aspect of the first category of R units includes 4-methyl-5-phenylthiazol-2-yl and 4-ethyl-5-phenylthiazol-2-yl.
An example of compounds of Formula (I) includes R units wherein R3 is hydrogen and R2 is a substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl unit chosen from 1,2,3,4-tetrazol-1-yl,1,2,3,4-tetrazol-5-yl, [1,2,3]triazol-4-yl, [1,2,3]triazol-5-yl, [1,2,4]triazol-4-yl, [1,2,4]triazol-5-yl, imidazol-2-yl, imidazol-4-yl, pyrrol-2-yl, pyrrol-3-yl, oxazol-2-yl, oxazol-4-yl, oxazol-5-yl, isoxazol-3-yl, isoxazol-4-yl, isoxazol-5-yl, [1,2,4]oxadiazol-3-yl, [1,2,4]oxadiazol-5-yl, [1,3,4]oxadiazol-2-yl, furan-2-yl, furan-3-yl, thiophen-2-yl, thiophen-3-yl, isothiazol-3-yl, isothiazol-4-yl, isothiazol-5-yl, thiazol-2-yl, thiazol-4-yl, thiazol-5-yl, [1,2,4]thiadiazol-3-yl, [1,2,4]thiadiazol-5-yl, and [1,3,4]thiadiazol-2-yl.
Further non-limiting example of compounds of Formula (I) includes R units wherein R2 is substituted or unsubstituted thiophen-2-yl, for example thiophen-2-yl, 5-chlorothiophen-2-yl, and 5-methylthiophen-2-yl.
An example of compounds of Formula (I) includes R units wherein R2 is substituted or unsubstituted thiophen-3-yl, for example thiophen-3-yl, 5-chlorothiophen-3-yl, and 5-methylthiophen-3-yl.
An example of compounds of Formula (I) includes R units wherein R2 and R3 are taken together to form a saturated or unsaturated ring having from 5 to 7 atoms. Non-limiting examples of the sixth aspect of the first category of R units include 5,6-dihydro-4H-cyclopenta[d]thiazol-2-yl and 4,5,6,7-tetrahydrobenzo[d]thiazol-2-yl.
Further examples of compounds of Formula (I) include R units that are thiazol-4-yl or thiazol-5-yl units having the formula:
The following are non-limiting examples of units that can substitute for one or more hydrogen atoms on the R4 units. The following substituents, as well as others not herein, described, are each independently chosen:
An example of compounds of Formula (I) includes R units wherein R4 is hydrogen.
An example of compounds of Formula (I) includes R units wherein R4 is a unit chosen from methyl (C1), ethyl (C2), n-propyl (C3), iso-propyl (C3), n-butyl (C4), sec-butyl (C4), iso-butyl (C4), and tert-butyl (C4). Non-limiting examples of this aspect of R includes 2-methylthiazol-4-yl, 2-(n-propyl)thiazol-4-yl, and 2-(iso-propyl)thiazol-4-yl.
An example of compounds of Formula (I) includes R units wherein R4 is substituted or unsubstituted phenyl, non-limiting examples of which include phenyl, 2-fluorophenyl, 2-chlorophenyl, 2-methylphenyl, 2-methoxyphenyl, 3-fluorophenyl, 3-chlorophenyl, 3-methylphenyl, 3-methoxyphenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, 4-chlorophenyl, 4-methylphenyl, and 4-methoxyphenyl.
An example of compounds of Formula (I) includes R units wherein R4 is substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, non-limiting examples of which include thiophen-2-yl, thiophen-3-yl, thiazol-2-yl, thiazol-4-yl, thiazol-5-yl, 2,5-dimethylthiazol-4-yl, 2,4-dimethylthiazol-5-yl, 4-ethylthiazol-2-yl, oxazol-2-yl, oxazol-4-yl, oxazol-5-yl, and 3-methyl-1,2,4-oxadiazol-5-yl.
Another example of 5-member ring R units includes substituted or unsubstituted imidazolyl units having the formula:
One example of imidazolyl R units includes imidazol-2-yl units having the formula:
wherein R2 and R3 are each independently chosen from:
The following are non-limiting examples of units that can substitute for one or more hydrogen atoms on the R2 and R3 units. The following substituents, as well as others not herein described, are each independently chosen:
One example of R units includes compounds wherein R units have the formula:
wherein R3 is hydrogen and R2 is a unit chosen from methyl (C1), ethyl (C2), n-propyl (C3), iso-propyl (C3), n-butyl (C4), sec-butyl (C4), iso-butyl (C4), and tert-butyl (C4).
Another example of R units includes compounds wherein R2 is a unit chosen from methyl (C1), ethyl (C2), n-propyl (C3), iso-propyl (C3), n-butyl (C4), sec-butyl (C4), iso-butyl (C4), and tert-butyl (C4); and R3 is a unit chosen from methyl (C1) or ethyl (C2). Non-limiting examples of this aspect of R includes 4,5-dimethylimidazol-2-yl, 4-ethyl-5-methylimidazol-2-yl, 4-methyl-5-ethylimidazol-2-yl, and 4,5-diethylimidazol-2-yl.
An example of R units includes compounds wherein R3 is hydrogen and R2 is a substituted alkyl unit chosen, said substitutions chosen from:
Non-limiting examples of units comprising this embodiment of R includes: —CH2F, —CHF2, —CF3, —CH2CF3, —CH2Cl, —CH2OH, —CH2OCH3, —CH2CH2OH, —CH2CH2OCH3, —CH2NH2, —CH2NHCH3, —CH2N(CH3)2, and —CH2NH(CH2CH3).
An example of R units includes units wherein R3 is hydrogen and R2 is phenyl.
An example of R units includes units wherein R3 is hydrogen and R2 is a heteroaryl unit chosen from 1,2,3,4-tetrazol-1-yl, 1,2,3,4-tetrazol-5-yl, [1,2,3]triazol-4-yl, [1,2,3]triazol-5-yl, [1,2,4]triazol-4-yl, [1,2,4]triazol-5-yl, imidazol-2-yl, imidazol-4-yl, pyrrol-2-yl, pyrrol-3-yl, oxazol-2-yl, oxazol-4-yl, oxazol-5-yl, isoxazol-3-yl, isoxazol-4-yl, isoxazol-5-yl, [1,2,4]oxadiazol-3-yl, [1,2,4]oxadiazol-5-yl, [1,3,4]oxadiazol-2-yl, furan-2-yl, furan-3-yl, thiophen-2-yl, thiophen-3-yl, isothiazol-3-yl, isothiazol-4-yl, isothiazol-5-yl, thiazol-2-yl, thiazol-4-yl, thiazol-5-yl, [1,2,4]thiadiazol-3-yl, [1,2,4]thiadiazol-5-yl, and [1,3,4]thiadiazol-2-yl.
Z is a unit having the formula:
-(L)nR1
R1 is chosen from:
The following are non-limiting examples of units that can substitute for one or more hydrogen atoms on the R1 units. The following substituents, as well as others not herein described, are each independently chosen:
One example of R1 units includes substituted or unsubstituted phenyl (C6 aryl) units, wherein each substitution is independently chosen from: halogen, C1-C4 linear, branched alkyl, or cyclic alkyl, —OR11, —CN, —N(R11)2, —CO2R11, —C(O)N(R11)2, —NR11C(O)R11, —NO2, and —SO2R11; each R11 is independently hydrogen; substituted or unsubstituted C1-C4 linear, C3-C4 branched, C3-C4 cyclic alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted phenyl or benzyl; or two R11 units can be taken together to form a ring comprising from 3-7 atoms.
An example of R1 units includes substituted C6 aryl units chosen from phenyl, 2-fluorophenyl, 3-fluorophenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, 2,3-difluorophenyl, 3,4-difluorophenyl, 3,5-difluorophenyl, 2-chlorophenyl, 3-chlorophenyl, 4-chlorophenyl, 2,3-dichlorophenyl, 3,4-dichlorophenyl, 3,5-dichlorophenyl, 2-hydroxyphenyl, 3-hydroxyphenyl, 4-hydroxyphenyl, 2-methoxyphenyl, 3-methoxyphenyl, 4-methoxyphenyl, 2,3-dimethoxyphenyl, 3,4-dimethoxyphenyl, and 3,5-dimethoxyphenyl.
An example of R1 units includes substituted or unsubstituted C6 aryl units chosen from 2,4-difluorophenyl, 2,5-difluorophenyl, 2,6-difluorophenyl, 2,3,4-trifluorophenyl, 2,3,5-trifluorophenyl, 2,3,6-trifluorophenyl, 2,4,5-trifluorophenyl, 2,4,6-trifluorophenyl, 2,4-dichlorophenyl, 2,5-dichlorophenyl, 2,6-dichlorophenyl, 3,4-dichlorophenyl, 2,3,4-trichlorophenyl, 2,3,5-trichlorophenyl, 2,3,6-trichlorophenyl, 2,4,5-trichlorophenyl, 3,4,5-trichlorophenyl, and 2,4,6-trichlorophenyl.
An example of R1 units includes substituted C6 aryl units chosen from 2-methylphenyl, 3-methylphenyl, 4-methylphenyl, 2,3-dimethylphenyl, 2,4-dimethylphenyl, 2,5-dimethylphenyl, 2,6-dimethylphenyl, 3,4-dimethylphenyl, 2,3,4-trimethylphenyl, 2,3,5-trimethylphenyl, 2,3,6-trimethylphenyl, 2,4,5-trimethylphenyl, 2,4,6-trimethylphenyl, 2-ethylphenyl, 3-ethylphenyl, 4-ethylphenyl, 2,3-diethylphenyl, 2,4-diethylphenyl, 2,5-diethylphenyl, 2,6-diethylphenyl, 3,4-diethylphenyl, 2,3,4-triethylphenyl, 2,3,5-triethylphenyl, 2,3,6-triethylphenyl, 2,4,5-triethylphenyl, 2,4,6-triethylphenyl, 2-isopropylphenyl, 3-isopropylphenyl, and 4-isopropylphenyl.
An example of R1 units includes substituted C6 aryl units chosen from 2-aminophenyl, 2-(N-methylamino)phenyl, 2-(N,N-dimethylamino)phenyl, 2-(N-ethylamino)phenyl, 2-(N,N-diethylamino)phenyl, 3-aminophenyl, 3-(N-methylamino)phenyl, 3-(N,N-dimethylamino)phenyl, 3-(N-ethylamino)phenyl, 3-(N,N-diethylamino)phenyl, 4-aminophenyl, 4-(N-methylamino)phenyl, 4-(N,N-dimethylamino)phenyl, 4-(N-ethylamino)phenyl, and 4-(N,N-diethylamino)phenyl.
R1 can comprise heteroaryl units. Non-limiting examples of C1-C9 heteroaryl units include:
R1 heteroaryl units can be substituted or unsubstituted. Non-limiting examples of units that can substitute for hydrogen include units chosen from:
An example of R1 relates to units substituted by an alkyl unit chosen from methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, iso-butyl, sec-butyl, and tert-butyl.
An example of R1 includes units that are substituted by substituted or unsubstituted phenyl and benzyl, wherein the phenyl and benzyl substitutions are chosen from one or more:
An example of R1 relates to phenyl and benzyl units substituted by a carboxy unit having the formula —C(O)R9; R9 is chosen from methyl, methoxy, ethyl, and ethoxy.
An example of R1 includes phenyl and benzyl units substituted by an amide unit having the formula —NHC(O)R9; R9 is chosen from methyl, methoxy, ethyl, ethoxy, tert-butyl, and tert-butoxy.
An example of R1 includes phenyl and benzyl units substituted by one or more fluoro or chloro units.
L is a linking unit which is present when the index n is equal to 1, but is absent when the index n is equal to 0. L units have the formula:
-[Q]y[C(R5aR5b)]x[Q1]z[C(R6aR6b)]w—
wherein Q and Q1 are each independently:
[C(R7aR7b)]tR8
wherein R7a and R7b are each independently:
The following are non-limiting examples of units that can substitute for one or more hydrogen atoms on R5a, R5b, R7a, R7b, and R8 units. The following substituents, as well as others not herein described, are each independently chosen:
One aspect of L units relates to units having the formula:
—C(O)[C(R5aR5b)]xNHC(O)—
wherein R5a is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted C1-C1 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted phenyl, and substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl; and the index x is 1 or 2. Some embodiments relate to linking units having the formula:
When the index x is equal to 2, this embodiment provides the following non-limiting examples of L units:
Another embodiment of L units includes units wherein Q is —C(O)—, the indices x and z are equal to 0, w is equal to 1 or 2, a first R6a unit chosen from phenyl, 2-fluorophenyl, 3-fluorophenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, 2,3-difluorophenyl, 3,4-difluorophenyl, 3,5-difluorophenyl, 2-chlorophenyl, 3-chlorophenyl, 4-chlorophenyl, 2,3-dichlorophenyl, 3,4-dichlorophenyl, 3,5-dichlorophenyl, 2-hydroxyphenyl, 3-hydroxyphenyl, 4-hydroxyphenyl, 2-methoxyphenyl, 3-methoxyphenyl, 4-methoxyphenyl, 2,3-dimethoxyphenyl, 3,4-dimethoxyphenyl, and 3,5-dimethoxyphenyl; a second R6a unit is hydrogen and R6b units are hydrogen. For example a linking unit having the formula:
An example of this embodiment of L includes a first R6a unit as depicted herein above that is a substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl unit as described herein above.
An example of this embodiment of L includes units having the formula:
—C(O)[C(R6aR6b)]w—;
wherein R6a and R6b are hydrogen and the index w is equal to 1 or 2; said units chosen from:
Another embodiment of L units includes units having the formula:
—C(O)[C(R5aR5b)]xC(O)—;
wherein R5a and R5b are hydrogen and the index x is equal to 1 or 2; said units chosen from:
Another embodiment of L units includes units having the formula:
—C(O)NH[C(R5aR5b)]x—;
wherein R5a and R5b are hydrogen and the index w is equal to 0, 1 or 2; said units chosen from:
An example of L units includes units having the formula:
—SO2[C(R6aR6b)]w—;
wherein R8 and R8b are hydrogen or methyl and the index w is equal to 0, 1 or 2; said units chosen from:
Disclosed herein are categories of compounds useful for the methods described herein, and pharmaceutically acceptable salt forms thereof. For example, a compound having the formula:
can form salts, for example, a salt of the sulfamic acid:
The compounds can also exist in a zwitterionic form, for example:
as a salt of a strong acid, for example:
An aspect of Category I of the present disclosure relates to compounds wherein R is a substituted or unsubstituted thiazol-2-yl unit having the formula:
one embodiment of which relates to inhibitors having the formula:
wherein R units are thiazol-2-yl units, that when substituted, are substituted with R2 and R3 units. R and R5a units are further described in Table I.
The compounds encompassed within the first aspect of Category I of the present disclosure can be prepared by the procedure outlined in Scheme I and described in Example 1 below.
Preparation of [1-(S)-carbamoyl-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester (1): To a 0° C. solution of 2-(S)-tert-butoxycarbonylamino-3-(4-nitrophenyl)-propionic acid and N-methylmorpholine (1.1 mL, 9.65 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) is added dropwise iso-butyl chloroformate (1.25 mL, 9.65 mmol). The mixture is stirred at 0° C. for 20 minutes after which NH3 (g) is passed through the reaction mixture for 30 minutes at 0° C. The reaction mixture is concentrated and the residue dissolved in EtOAc, washed successively with 5% citric acid, water, 5% NaHCO3, water and brine, dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo to a residue that is triturated with a mixture of EtOAc/petroleum ether to provide 2.2 g (74%) of the desired product as a white solid.
Preparation of [2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-(S)-thiocarbamoylethyl]carbamic acid tert-butyl ester (2): To a solution of [1-(S)-carbamoyl-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester, 1, (0.400 g, 1.29 mmol) in THF (10 mL) is added Lawesson's reagent (0.262 g. 0.65 mmol). The reaction mixture is stirred for 3 hours and concentrated to a residue which is purified over silica to provide 0.350 g (83%) of the desired product. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.29 (s, 1H), 8.10 (d. J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 8.01 (s, 1H), 7.42 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 5.70 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 1H), 4.85 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 1H), 3.11-3.30 (m, 1H), 1.21 (s, 9H).
Preparation of 1-(S)-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl amine (3): A mixture of [2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-(S)-thiocarbamoylethyl]-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester, 2, (0.245 g, 0.753 mmol), 1-bromo-2-butanone (0.125 g, 0.828 mmol) in CH3CN (5 mL) is refluxed 3 hours. The reaction mixture is cooled to room temperature and diethyl ether is added to the solution and the precipitate which forms is removed by filtration. The solid is dried under vacuum to afford 0.242 g (90% yield) of the desired product. ESI+ MS 278 (M+1).
Preparation of {1-[1-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethylcarbamoyl]-2-phenylethyl}carbamic acid tert-butyl ester (4): To a solution of 1-(S)-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl amine hydrobromide, 3, (0.393 g, 1.1 mmol), (S)-(2-tert-butoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropionic acid (0.220 g, 0.828 mmol) and 1-hydroxybenzotriazole (HOBt) (0.127 g, 0.828 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) at 0° C., is added 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide (EDCI) (0.159 g, 0.828 mmol) followed by diisopropylamine (0.204 g, 1.58 mmol). The mixture is stirred at 0° C. for 30 minutes then at room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture is diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic phase is washed with 1 N aqueous HCl, 5% aqueous NaHCO3, water and brine, and dried over Na2SO4. The solvent is removed in vacuo to afford 0.345 g of the desired product which is used without further purification. LC/MS ESI+ 525 (M+1).
Preparation of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid ammonium salt (5): {1-[1-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethylcarbamoyl]-2-phenylethyl}carbamic acid tert-butyl ester, 4, (0.345 g) is dissolved in MeOH (4 mL). A catalytic amount of Pd/C (10% w/w) is added and the mixture is stirred under a hydrogen atmosphere 2 hours. The reaction mixture is filtered through a bed of CELITE™ and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The crude product is dissolved in pyridine (12 mL) and treated with SO3-pyridine (0.314 g). The reaction is stirred at room temperature for 5 minutes after which a 7% solution of NH4OH (50 mL) is added. The mixture is then concentrated and the resulting residue is purified by reverse phase chromatography to afford 0.222 g of the desired product as the ammonium salt. 1H NMR (CD3OD δ 7.50-6.72 (m, 10H), 5.44-5.42 (d, 1H, J=6.0 Hz), 4.34 (s, 1H), 3.34-2.79 (m, 4H), 2.83-2.76 (q, 2H, J=7.2 Hz), 1.40 (s, 9H), 1.31 (t, 3H, J=7.5 Hz).
The disclosed inhibitors can also be isolated as the free acid. A non-limiting example of this procedure is described herein below in Example 4.
The following is a non-limiting example of compounds encompassed within this embodiment of the first aspect of Category I of the present disclosure.
4-{(S)-2-[(R)-2-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD δ 7.22-7.02 (m, 10H), 5.39 (s, 1H), 4.34 (s, 1H), 3.24-2.68 (m, 6H), 1.37 (s, 9H), 1.30 (t, 3H, J=7.5 Hz).
Another embodiment of this aspect of Category I relates to inhibitors having the formula:
wherein R units and R5a units further described in Table II.
The compounds of this embodiment can be prepared according to the procedure outlined above in Scheme I and described in Example 1 by substituting the appropriate Boc-β-amino acid for (S)-(2-tert-butoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropionic acid in step (d).
The following are non-limiting examples of compounds according to this embodiment.
{1-[1-(4-Ethylthiazol-2-yl)-(S)-2-(4-sulfoaminophenyl)ethylcarbamoyl]-(S)-2-phenylethyl}methyl carbamic acid tert-butyl ester: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 8.36 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 1H), 7.04-7.22 (m, 9H), 5.45 (s, 1H), 3.01-3.26 (m, 2H), 2.60-2.88 (m, 4H), 2.33 (s, 3H), 1.30 (s, 9H).
{1-[1-(4-Phenylthiazol-2-yl)-(S)-2-(4-sulfoaminophenyl)ethylcarbamoyl]-(S)-2-phenylethyl}methyl carbamic acid tert-butyl ester: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 8.20 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 1H), 7.96-7.99 (m, 2H), 7.48-7.52 (m, 3H), 7.00-7.23 (m, 7H), 6.89 (s, 1H), 5.28 (q, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 4.33 (t, J=6.6 Hz, 1H), 3.09-3.26 (m, 2H), 3.34 (dd, J=13.2 and 8.4 Hz, 1H), 2.82 (dd, J=13.2 and 8.4 Hz, 1H), 1.38 (s, 9H).
The second aspect of Category I of the present disclosure relates to compounds wherein R is a substituted or unsubstituted thiazol-4-yl having the formula:
one embodiment of which relates to inhibitors having the formula:
wherein R units and R5a units further described in Table III.
The compounds encompassed within the second aspect of Category I of the present disclosure can be prepared by the procedure outlined in Scheme II and described in Example 2 herein below.
Preparation of (S)[3-diazo-1-(4-nitrobenzyl)-2-oxo-propyl]-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester (6): To a 0° C. solution of 2-(S)-tert-butoxycarbonylamino-3-(4-nitrophenyl)-propionic acid (1.20 g, 4.0 mmol) in THF (20 mL) is added dropwise triethylamine (0.61 mL, 4.4 mmol) followed by iso-butyl chloroformate (0.57 mL, 4.4 mmol). The reaction mixture is stirred at 0° C. for 20 minutes and filtered. The filtrate is treated with an ether solution of diazomethane (˜16 mmol) at 0° C. The reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for 3 hours then concentrated in vacuo. The resulting residue is dissolved in EtOAc and washed successively with water and brine, dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated. The residue is purified over silica (hexane/EtOAc 2:1) to afford 1.1 g (82% yield) of the desired product as a slightly yellow solid. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.16 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 2H), 7.39 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 2H), 5.39 (s, 1H), 5.16 (d, J=6.3 Hz, 1H), 4.49 (s, 1H), 3.25 (dd, J=13.8 and 6.6, 1H), 3.06 (dd, J=13.5 and 6.9 Hz, 1H), 1.41 (s, 9H).
Preparation of (S)-tert-butyl 4-bromo-1-(4-nitrophenyl)-3-oxobutan-2-ylcarbamate (7): To a 0° C. solution of (S)-[3-diazo-1-(4-nitrobenzyl)-2-oxo-propyl]-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester, 6, (0.350 g, 1.04 mmol) in THF (5 mL) is added dropwise 48% aq. HBr (0.14 mL, 1.25 mmol). The reaction mixture is stirred at 0° C. for 1.5 hours then the reaction is quenched at 0° C. with sat. Na2CO3. The mixture is extracted with EtOAc (3×25 mL) and the combined organic extracts are washed with brine, dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated to obtain 0.400 g of the product which is used in the next step without further purification. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.20 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 7.39 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 5.06 (d, J=7.8 Hz, 1H), 4.80 (q, J=6.3 Hz, 1H), 4.04 (s, 2H), 1.42 (s, 9H).
Preparation of tert-butyl (S)-1-(S)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-(2-phenylthiazole-4-yl)ethylamino-1-oxo-3-phenylpropan-2-ylcarbamate (8): A mixture of thiobenzamide (0.117 g, 0.85 mmol) and (S)-tert-butyl 4-bromo-1-(4-nitrophenyl)-3-oxobutan-2-ylcarbamate, 7, (0.300 g, 0.77 mmol) in CH3CN (4 mL) is refluxed 2 hours. The reaction mixture is cooled to room temperature and diethyl ether is added to precipitate the intermediate 2-(nitrophenyl)-(S)-1-(4-phenylthiazol-2-yl)ethylamine which is isolated by filtration as the hydrobromide salt. The hydrobromide salt is dissolved in DMF (3 mL) together with diisoproylethylamine (0.42 mL, 2.31 mmol), 1-hydroxybenzotriazole (0.118 g, 0.79 mmol) and (S)-(2-tert-butoxycarbonyl-amino)-3-phenylpropionic acid (0.212 g, 0.80 mmol). The mixture is stirred at 0° C. for 30 minutes then at room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture is diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic phase is washed with 1 N aqueous HCl, 5% aqueous NaHCO3, water and brine, and dried over Na2SO4. The solvent is removed in vacuo to afford 0.395 g (90% yield) of the desired product which is used without further purification. LC/MS ESI+ 573 (M+1).
Preparation of 4-{(S)-2-(S)-2-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)-3-phenylpropaneamido-2-(2-phenylthiazole-4-yl)}phenylsulfamic acid (9): tert-butyl (S)-1-(S)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-(2-phenylthiazole-4-yl)ethylamino-1-oxo-3-phenylpropan-2-ylcarbamate, 8, (0.360 g) is dissolved in MeOH (4 mL). A catalytic amount of Pd/C (10% w/w) is added and the mixture is stirred under a hydrogen atmosphere 12 hours. The reaction mixture is filtered through a bed of CELITE™ and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The crude product is dissolved in pyridine (12 mL) and treated with SO3-pyridine (0.296 g). The reaction is stirred at room temperature for 5 minutes after which a 7% solution of NH4OH (10 mL) is added. The mixture is then concentrated and the resulting residue is purified by reverse phase chromatography to afford 0.050 g of the desired product as the ammonium salt. 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 8.20 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 1H), 7.96-7.99 (m, 2H), 7.48-7.52 (m, 3H), 7.00-7.23 (m, 7H), 6.89 (s, 1H), 5.28 (q, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 4.33 (t, J=6.6 Hz, 1H), 3.09-3.26 (m, 2H), 3.34 (dd, J=13.2 and 8.4 Hz, 1H), 2.82 (dd, J=13.2 and 8.4 Hz, 1H), 1.38 (s, 9H).
An aspect of Category II of the present disclosure relates to compounds wherein R is a substituted or unsubstituted thiazol-4-yl unit having the formula:
one embodiment of which relates to inhibitors having the formula:
wherein R units are thiazol-4-yl units, that when substituted, are substituted with R4 units. R and R5a units are further described in Table IV.
The compounds encompassed within the second aspect of Category II of the present disclosure can be prepared by the procedure outlined in Scheme III and described in Example 3 herein below.
Preparation of methyl (S)-1-[(S)-1-(2-ethylthiazole-4-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)-ethyl]amino-1-oxo-3-phenylpropane-2-ylcarbamate (12): A mixture of propanethioamide (69 mg, 0.78 mmol) and (S)-tert-butyl 4-bromo-1-(4-nitrophenyl)-3-oxobutan-2-ylcarbamate, 7, (0.300 g, 0.77 mmol) in CH3CN (4 mL) is refluxed for 2 hours. The reaction mixture is cooled to room temperature and diethyl ether is added to precipitate the intermediate 2-(nitrophenyl)-(S)-1-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethylamine which is isolated by filtration as the hydrobromide salt. The hydrobromide salt is dissolved in DMF (8 mL) together with diisoproylethylamine (0.38 mL, 2.13 mmol), 1-hydroxybenzotriazole (107 mg, 0.71 mmol) and (S)-(2-methoxycarbonyl-amino)-3-phenylpropionic acid (175 mg, 0.78 mmol). The mixture is stirred at 0° C. for 30 minutes then at room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture is diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic phase is washed with 1 N aqueous HCl, 5% aqueous NaHCO3, water and brine, and dried over Na2SO4. The solvent is removed in vacuo to afford 0.300 g (81% yield) of the desired product which is used without further purification. LC/MS ESI+MS 483 (M+1).
Preparation of 4-((S)-2-((S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido)-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl)phenylsulfamic acid ammonium salt (13): tert-Butyl (S)-1-(S)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-(2-ethylthiazole-4-yl)ethylamino-1-oxo-3-phenylpropan-2-ylcarbamate, 12, (0.300 g) is dissolved in MeOH (4 mL). A catalytic amount of Pd/C (10% w/w) is added and the mixture is stirred under a hydrogen atmosphere 18 hours. The reaction mixture is filtered through a bed of CELITE™ and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The crude product is dissolved in pyridine (12 mL) and treated with SO3-pyridine (223 mg, 1.40 mmol). The reaction is stirred at room temperature for 5 minutes after which a 7% solution of NH4OH (12 mL) is added. The mixture is then concentrated and the resulting residue is purified by reverse phase chromatography to afford 25 mg of the desired product as the ammonium salt. 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 7.14-7.24 (m, 6H), 6.97-7.0 (m, 4H), 6.62 (s, 1H), 5.10-5.30 (μ, 1H), 4.36 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 1H), 3.63 (s, 3H), 3.14 (dd, J=13.5 and 6.3 Hz, 1H), 2.93-3.07 (m, 5H), 2.81 (dd, J=13.5 and 6.3 HZ, 1H), 1.39 (t, J=7.8 Hz, 3H).
In another iteration of the process of the present disclosure, compound 13, as well as the other analogues which comprise the present disclosure, can be isolated as the free acid by adapting the procedure described herein below.
Preparation of {1-[2-(S)-(4-(S)-aminophenyl)-1-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl-carbamoyl]-2-phenylethyl}-carbamic acid methyl ester (12a): A Parr hydrogenation vessel is charged with tert-butyl (S)-1-(S)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-(2-ethylthiazole-4-yl)ethylamino-1-oxo-3-phenylpropan-2-ylcarbamate, 12, (18.05 g, 37.4 mmol, 1.0 eq) and Pd/C (10% Pd on C, 50% wet, Degussa-type E101 NE/W, 2.68 g, 15 wt %) as solids. MeOH (270 mL, 15 mL/g) is added to provide a suspension. The vessel is put on a Parr hydrogenation apparatus. The vessel is submitted to a fill/vacuum evacuate process with N2 (3×20 psi) to inert, followed by the same procedure with H2 (3×40 psi). The vessel is filled with H2 and the vessel is shaken under 40 psi H2 for ˜40 hr. The vessel is evacuated and the atmosphere is purged with N2 (5×20 psi). An aliquot is filtered and analyzed by HPLC to insure complete conversion. The suspension is filtered through a pad of celite to remove the catalyst, and the homogeneous yellow filtrate is concentrated by rotary evaporation to afford 16.06 g (95% yield) of the desired product as a tan solid, which is used without further purification.
Preparation of 4-((S)-2-((S)-2-(methoxycarbonyl)-3-phenylpropanamido)-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl)phenylsulfamic acid (13): A 100 mL RBF is charged with {1-[2-(S)-(4-(S)-aminophenyl)-1-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl-carbamoyl]-2-phenylethyl}-carbamic acid methyl ester, 12a, (10.36 g, 22.9 mmol, 1.0 eq.) prepared in the step described herein above. Acetonitrile (50 mL, 5 mL/g) is added and the yellow suspension is stirred at room temperature. A second 3-necked 500 mL RBF is charged with SO3.pyr (5.13 g, 32.2 mmol, 1.4 eq.) and acetonitrile (50 mL 5 mL/g) and the white suspension is stirred at room temperature. Both suspensions are gently heated until the reaction solution containing {1-[2-(S)-(4-(S)-aminophenyl)-1-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl-carbamoyl]-2-phenylethyl}-carbamic acid methyl ester becomes red-orange in color (typically for this example about 44° C.). This substrate containing solution is poured in one portion into the stirring suspension of SO3.pyr at 35° C. The resulting opaque mixture (39° C.) is stirred vigorously while allowed to slowly cool to room temperature. After stirring for 45 min, the reaction is determined to be complete by HPLC. H2O (200 mL, 20 mL/g) is added to the orange suspension to provide a yellow-orange homogeneous solution having a pH of approximately 2.4. Concentrated H3PO4 is added slowly over 12 minutes to lower the pH to approximately 1.4. During this pH adjustment, an off-white precipitate is formed and the solution is stirred at room temperature for 1 hr. The suspension is filtered and the filter cake is washed with the filtrate. The filter cake is air-dried on the filter overnight to afford 10.89 g (89% yield) of the desired product as a tan solid.
The following are further non-limiting examples of the second aspect of Category II of the present disclosure.
4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(Methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-methylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 8.15 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.16-7.25 (m, 5H), 6.97-7.10 (m, 4H), 6.61 (s, 1H), 5.00-5.24 (m, 1H), 4.36 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 1H), 3.64 (s, 3H), 3.11-3.19 (s, 1H), 2.92-3.04 (s, 2H), 2.81 (dd, J=13.5 and 8.1 Hz, 1H), 2.75 (s, 3H).
4-{(S)-2-(2-Ethylthiazole-4-yl)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropan-amido]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 7.16-7.29 (m, 5H), 7.02-7.12 (m, 4H), 6.83 (s, 1H), 5.10-5.35 (m, 1H), 3.52-3.67 (m, 3H), 3.18-3.25 (m, 2H), 3.05 (q, J=7.5 Hz, 2H), 2.82-2.95 (m, 2H), 2.65 (s, 3H), 1.39 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 3H).
4-{(S)-2-(2-Isopropylthiazol-4-yl)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropan-amido]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 8.16 (d, 1H, J=8.7 Hz), 7.22-7.13 (m, 3H), 7.07 (d, 1H, J=8.4 Hz), 6.96 (d, 1H, J=8.1 Hz), 6.62 (s, 1H), 5.19 (t, 1H, J=7.2 Hz), 4.36 (t, 1H, J=7.8 Hz), 3.63 (s, 3H), 3.08 (1H, A of ABX, J=3.6, 14.5 Hz), 2.99 (1H, B of ABX, J=7.2, 13.8 Hz), 2.85-2.78 (m, 1H), 1.41 (d, 6H, J=6.9 Hz).
4-{(S)-2-(2-Cyclopropylthiazol-4-yl)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 7.15-7.02 (m, 5H), 6.96-6.93 (d, 2H, J=8.4 Hz), 6.86-6.83 (d, 2H, J=8.3 Hz), 6.39 (s, 1H), 5.01 (t, 1H, J=5.0 Hz), 4.22 (t, 1H, J=7.4 Hz), 3.51 (s, 3H), 2.98-2.69 (m, 2H), 2.22-2.21 (m, 1H), 1.06-1.02 (m, 2H), 0.92-0.88 (m, 2H).
4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(Methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropionamido]-2-(2-phenylthiazole-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMP (300 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 7.96-7.99 (m, 2H), 7.51-7.56 (m, 3H), 7.13-7.38 (m, 6H), 6.92-6.95 (m, 4H), 5.11-5.16 (m, 1H), 4.32-4.35 (m, 1H), 3.51 (s, 3H), 3.39-3.40 (m, 2H), 3.09-3.19 (m, 1H), 2.92-3.02 (m, 2H), 2.75 (dd, J=10.5 Hz and 9.9 Hz, 1H).
4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(Methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 7.61-7.56 (m, 2H), 7.25-7.01 (m, 10H), 6.75 (s, 1H), 5.24-5.21 (q, 1H, J=7.2 Hz), 4.38 (t, 1H, J=7.2 Hz), 3.60 (s, 3H), 3.23-3.14 (m, 1H), 3.08-3.00 (m, 2H), 2.87-2.80 (m, 1H).
4-{(S)-2-[2-(3-Chlorothiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 7.78-7.76 (d, 1H, J=5.4 Hz), 7.36-7.14 (m, 10H), 7.03 (s, 1H), 5.39 (t, 1H, J=6.9 Hz), 4.54 (t, 1H, J=7.3 Hz), 3.80 (s, 3H), 3.39-2.98 (m, 4H).
4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(Methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(3-methylthiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 7.38 (d, 1H, J=5.1 Hz), 7.15-6.93 (m, 10H), 6.73 (s, 1H), 5.17 (t, 1H, J=6.9 Hz), 4.31 (t, 1H, J=7.3 Hz), 3.57 (s, 3H), 3.18-3.11 (m, 1H), 3.02-2.94 (m, 2H), 2.80-2.73 (m, 1H), 2.46 (s, 3H).
4-{[(S)-2-(2-(Furan-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 7.54-7.46 (m, 1H), 7.02-6.79 (m, 10H), 6.55-6.51 (m, 1H), 6.44-6.41 (m, 1H), 5.02-5.00 (q, 1H, J=6.4 Hz), 4.16-4.14 (q, 1H, J=7.1 Hz), 3.43 (s, 3H), 2.96-2.58 (m, 4H).
4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(Methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(2-methylthiazole-4-yl)thiazole-4yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 8.27 (d, J=5.4 Hz, 1H), 7.97 (s, 1H), 6.99-7.21 (m, 8H), 5.18-5.30 (m, 1H), 4.30-4.39 (m, 1H), 3.64 (s, 3H), 3.20 (dd, J=14.1 and 6.6 Hz, 1H), 2.98-3.08 (m, 2H), 2.84 (dd, J=14.1 and 6.6 Hz, 1H), 2.78 (s, 3H).
4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(Methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[(2-pyrazin-2-yl)thiazole-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 9.34 (s, 1H), 8.65 (s, 2H), 8.34 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 1H), 7.00-5.16 (m. 9H), 5.30 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 1H), 4.41 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 1H), 3.65 (s, 3H), 3.23 (dd, J=13.8 and 6.9 Hz, 1H), 2.98-3.13 (m, 2H), 2.85 (dd, J=13.8 and 6.9 Hz, 1H).
4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(Methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(6-methylpyridin-3-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 8.90 (s, 1H), 8.19-8.13 (m, 1H), 7.39-7.36 (d, 1H, J=8.2 Hz), 7.07-6.88 (m, 9H), 6.79 (s, 1H), 5.17 (t, 1H, J=7.0 Hz), 4.29 (t, 1H, J=7.4 Hz), 3.54 (s, 3H), 3.10-2.73 (m, 4H), 2.53 (s, 3H).
4-{(S)-2-{2-[(4-Chlorophenylsulfonyl)methyl]thiazol-4-yl}-2-[(S)-2-(methoxy-carbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 7.96-7.93 (d, 2H, J=8.6 Hz), 7.83-7.80 (d, 2H, J=8.6 Hz), 7.44-7.34 (m, 5H), 7.29-7.27 (d, 2H, J=8.4 Hz), 7.14-7.11 (d, 2H, J=8.4 Hz), 6.97 (s, 1H), 5.31 (t, 1H, J=6.8 Hz), 5.22-5.15 (m, 2H), 4.55 (t, 1H, J=7.3 Hz), 3.84 (s, 3H), 3.20-2.96 (m, 4H).
4-{(S)-2-[2-(tert-Butylsulfonylmethyl)thiazol-4-yl]-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonyl-amino)-3-phenylpropanamido]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 7.40-7.30 (m, 5H), 7.21-7.10 (m, 4H), 7.02 (s, 1H), 5.37 (t, 1H, J=6.9 Hz), 5.01-4.98 (m, 2H), 4.51 (t, 1H, J=7.1 Hz), 3.77 (s, 3H), 3.34-2.91 (m, 4H), 1.58 (s, 9H).
Category III of the present disclosure relates to compounds wherein R is a substituted or unsubstituted thiazol-2-yl unit having the formula:
one embodiment of which relates to inhibitors having the formula:
wherein R units are thiazol-2-yl units, that when substituted, are substituted with R2 and R3 units. R and R5a units are further described in Table V.
The compounds encompassed within Category III of the present disclosure can be prepared by the procedure outlined in Scheme IV and described in Example 5 herein below.
Preparation of (S)-2-acetamido-N—[(S)-1-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)-ethyl]-3-phenylpropanamide (14): To a solution of 1-(S)-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl amine hydrobromide, 3, (0.343 g, 0.957 mmol), N-acetyl-L-phenylalanine (0.218 g), 1-hydroxybenzotriazole (HOBt) (0.161 g), diisopropyl-ethylamine (0.26 g), in DMF (10 mL) at 0°, is added 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide (EDCI) (0.201 g). The mixture is stirred at 0° C. for 30 minutes then at room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture is diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic phase is washed with 1 N aqueous HCl, 5% aqueous NaHCO3, water and brine, and dried over Na2SO4. The solvent is removed in vacuo to afford 0.313 g (70% yield) of the desired product which is used without further purification. LC/MS ESI+ 467 (M+1).
Preparation of 4-((S)-2-((S)-2-acetamido-3-phenylpropanamido)-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl)phenylsulfamic acid (15): (S)-2-Acetamido-N—[(S)-1-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl]-3-phenylpropanamide, 14, (0.313 g) is dissolved in MeOH (4 mL). A catalytic amount of Pd/C (10% w/w) is added and the mixture is stirred under a hydrogen atmosphere 2 hours. The reaction mixture is filtered through a bed of CELITE™ and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The crude product is dissolved in pyridine (12 mL) and treated with SO3-pyridine (0.320 g). The reaction is stirred at room temperature for 5 minutes after which a 7% solution of NH4OH (30 mL) is added. The mixture is then concentrated and the resulting residue is purified by reverse phase chromatography to afford 0.215 g of the desired product as the ammonium salt. 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.23-6.98 (m, 10H), 5.37 (t, 1H), 4.64 (t, 1H, J=6.3 Hz), 3.26-2.74 (m, 6H), 1.91 (s, 3H), 1.29 (t, 3H, J=7.5 Hz).
The following are further non-limiting examples of compounds encompassed within Category III of the present disclosure.
4-[(S)-2-(S)-2-Acetamido-3-phenylpropanamido)-2-(4-tert-butylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl]phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, CD3OD): δ 7.22-7.17 (m, 5H), 7.06 (dd, J=14.1, 8.4 Hz, 4H), 6.97 (d, J=0.9 Hz, 1H), 5.39 (dd, J=8.4, 6.0 Hz, 1H), 4.65 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 1H), 3.33-3.26 (m, 1H), 3.13-3.00 (m, 2H), 2.80 (dd, J=13.5, 8.7 Hz, 1H), 1.91 (s, 3H), 1.36 (s, 9H).
4-{(S)-2-(S)-2-Acetamido-3-phenylpropanamido)-2-[4-(thiophen-3-yl)thiazol-2-yl]ethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, CD3OD): δ 8.58 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 1H), 7.83-7.82 (m, 1H), 7.57-7.46 (m, 3H), 7.28-6.93 (m, 11H), 5.54-5.43 (m, 1H), 4.69-4.55 (m, 2H), 3.41-3.33 (m, 1H), 3.14-3.06 (3H), 2.86-2.79 (m, 1H), 1.93 (s, 3H).
The first aspect of Category IV of the present disclosure relates to compounds wherein R is a substituted or unsubstituted thiazol-2-yl unit having the formula:
one embodiment of which relates to inhibitors having the formula:
wherein R units and R5a units further described in Table VI.
The compounds encompassed within Category IV of the present disclosure can be prepared by the procedure outlined in Scheme V and described in Example 6 herein below.
Preparation of tert-butyl (S)-1-[(S)-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethylamino]-3-methyl-1-oxobutan-2-ylcarbamate (16): To a solution of 1-(S)-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl amine hydrobromide, 3, (0.200 g, 0.558 mmol), (S)-(2-tert-butoxycarbonylamino)-3-methylbutyric acid (0.133 g) and 1-hydroxybenzotriazole (HOBt) (0.094 g) in DMF (5 mL) at 0°, is added 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide (EDCI) (0.118 g) followed by diisopropylamine (0.151 g). The mixture is stirred at 0° C. for 30 minutes then at room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture is diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic phase is washed with 1 N aqueous HCl, 5% aqueous NaHCO3, water and brine, and dried over Na2SO4. The solvent is removed in vacuo to afford 0.219 g (82% yield) of the desired product which is used without further purification. LC/MS ESI+ 477 (M+1).
Preparation of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)-3-methylbutanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid (17): tert-Butyl (S)-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethylamino]-3-methyl-1-oxobutan-2-ylcarbamate, 16, (0.219 g) is dissolved in MeOH (4 mL). A catalytic amount of Pd/C (10% w/w) is added and the mixture is stirred under a hydrogen atmosphere 2 hours. The reaction mixture is filtered through a bed of CELITE™ and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The crude product is dissolved in pyridine (5 mL) and treated with SO3-pyridine (0.146 g). The reaction is stirred at room temperature for 5 minutes after which a 7% solution of NH4OH (30 mL) is added. The mixture is then concentrated and the resulting residue is purified by reverse phase chromatography to afford 0.148 g of the desired product as the ammonium salt. 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.08 (s, 4H), 7.02 (s, 1H), 5.43 (s, 1H), 3.85 (s, 1H), 3.28-2.77 (m, 4H), 1.94 (hep, 1H), 1.46 (s, 9H), 1.29 (s, 3H, J=7.3 Hz), 0.83 (d, 6H).
The following are further non-limiting examples of the second aspect of Category IV of the present disclosure.
(S)-4-{2-[2-(tert-Butoxycarbonyl)acetamide]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenyl-sulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.09-6.91 (m, 5H), 5.30 (t, 1H, J=8.4 Hz), 3.60-2.64 (m, 6H), 1.34 (s, 9H), 1.16 (t, 3H, J=7.5 Hz).
4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(tert-Butoxycarbonylamino)-4-methylpentanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.19-7.00 (m, 5H), 5.50-5.40 (m, 1H), 4.13-4.06 (m, 1H), 3.32 (1H, A of ABX, J=7.5, 18 Hz), 3.12 (1H, B of ABX, J=8.1, 13.8 Hz), 2.79 (q, 2H, J=7.8, 14.7 Hz), 1.70-1.55 (m, 1H), 1.46 (s, 9H), 1.33 (t, 3H, J=2.7 Hz), 0.92 (q, 6H, J=6, 10.8 Hz).
4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(tert-Butoxycarbonylamino)-4-methylpentanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 8.06 (d, 1H, J=8.4 Hz), 7.61-7.58 (m, 1H), 7.57 (s, 1H), 7.15 (t, 1H, J=0.6 Hz), 7.09-6.98 (m, 6H), 5.30-5.20 (m, 1H), 4.10-4.00 (m, 1H), 3.19-3.13 (m, 2H), 1.63-1.55 (m, 2H), 1.48-1.33 (m, 10H), 0.95-0.89 (m, 6H).
(S)-4-{2-[2-(tert-Butoxycarbonyl)acetamide]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}-phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.09-6.91 (m, 5H), 5.30 (t, 1H, J=8.4 Hz), 3.60-2.64 (m, 6H), 1.34 (s, 9H), 1.16 (t, 3H, J=7.5 Hz).
A further embodiment of Category IV relates to inhibitors having the formula:
wherein R units and R5a units further described in Table VII.
The compounds encompassed within this embodiment of Category IV can be made according to the procedure outlined in Scheme V and described in Example 6 by substituting the corresponding methylcarbamate for the Boc-protected reagent. The following are non-limiting examples of this embodiment.
4-{(S)-2-(4-Ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonyl)-4-methylpentanamido]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.12-7.03 (m, 5H), 6.84 (d, 1H, J=8.4 Hz), 5.40 (t, 1H, J=5.7 Hz), 4.16 (t, 1H, J=6.3 Hz), 3.69 (s, 3H), 3.61-3.55 (m, 1H), 3.29-3.27 (m, 1H), 3.14-3.07 (m, 1H), 2.81 (q, 2H, J=3.9, 11.2 Hz), 1.66-1.59 (m, 1H), 1.48-1.43 (m, 2H), 1.31 (t, 3H, J=4.5 Hz), 0.96-0.90 (m, 6H).
(S)-4-{2-(4-Ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-[2-(methoxycarbonyl)acetamido]ethyl}-phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.12-7.07 (m, 4H), 7.03 (s, 1H), 5.42 (t, 1H, J=5.7 Hz), 3.83-3.68 (q, 2H, J=11.4 Hz), 3.68 (s, 3H), 3.34-3.04 (m, 2H), 2.83-2.76 (q, 2H, J=7.8 Hz), 1.31 (t, 3H, J=7.5 Hz).
4-{(S)-2-(4-Ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonyl)-3-methylbutanamido]-ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 8.56 (d, 1H, J=7.8 Hz), 7.09 (s, 4H), 7.03 (s, 1H), 5.26-5.20 (m, 1H), 3.90 (d, 1H, J=7.8 Hz), 3.70 (s, 3H), 3.30 (1H, A of ABX, obscured by solvent), 3.08 (1H, B of ABX, J=9.9, 9 Hz), 2.79 (q, 2H, J=11.1, 7.2 Hz), 2.05-1.97 (m, 1H), 1.31 (t, 3H, J=7.5 Hz), 0.88 (s, 3H), 0.85 (s, 3H), 0.79-0.75 (m, 1H).
4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(Methoxycarbonyl)-4-methylpentanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 8.22 (d, 1H, J=9 Hz), 7.62-7.57 (m, H), 7.15 (t, 1H, J=0.6 Hz), 7.10-6.97 (m, 4H), 5.30-5.20 (m, 1H), 4.16-4.11 (m, 1H), 3.67 (s, 2H), 3.22 (1H, A of ABX, J=6.9, 13.5 Hz), 3.11 (1H, B of ABX, J=7.8, 13.6 Hz), 1.65-1.58 (m, 1H), 1.50-1.45 (m, 2H), 0.95-0.88 (m, 6H).
Category IV of the present disclosure relates to compounds having the formula:
wherein R is a substituted or unsubstituted thiophen-2-yl or thiophen-4-yl unit and non-limiting examples of R0 are further described in Table VIII.
The compounds encompassed within Category IV of the present disclosure can be prepared by the procedure outlined in Scheme VI and described in Example 7 herein below.
Preparation of [2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-(S)-(4-phenylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl]-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester (18): A mixture of [2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-(S)-thiocarbamoylethyl]-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester, 2, (0.343 g, 1.05 mmol), 2-bromoacetophenone (0.231 g, 1.15 mmol), in CH3CN (5 mL) is refluxed 1.5 hour. The solvent is removed under reduced pressure and the residue re-dissolved in CH2Cl2 then pyridine (0.24 mL, 3.0 mmol) and Boc2O (0.24 mL, 1.1 mmol) are added. The reaction is stirred for 2 hours and diethyl ether is added to the solution and the precipitate which forms is removed by filtration. The organic layer is dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and concentrated to a residue which is purified over silica to afford 0.176 g (39%) of the desired product ESI+ MS 426 (M+1).
Preparation of [1-(S)-(phenylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(4-sulfoaminophenyl)ethyl]-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester (19): [2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-(S)-(4-phenylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl]-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester, 18, (0.176 g, 0.41 mmol) is dissolved in MeOH (4 mL). A catalytic amount of Pd/C (10% w/w) is added and the mixture is stirred under a hydrogen atmosphere 12 hours. The reaction mixture is filtered through a bed of CELITE™ and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The crude product is dissolved in pyridine (12 mL) and treated with SO3-pyridine (0.195 g, 1.23 mmol). The reaction is stirred at room temperature for 5 minutes after which a 7% solution of NH4OH (10 mL) is added. The mixture is then concentrated and the resulting residue is purified by reverse phase chromatography to afford 0.080 g of the desired product as the ammonium salt. 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 7.93 (d, J=6.0 Hz, 2H), 7.68 (s, 1H), 7.46-7.42 (m, 3H), 7.37-7.32 (m, 1H), 7.14-7.18 (m, 3H), 5.13-5.18 (m, 1H), 3.40 (dd, J=4.5 and 15.0 Hz, 1H), 3.04 (dd, J=9.6 and 14.1 Hz, 1H), 1.43 (s, 9H).
The following are further non-limiting examples of Category IV of the present disclosure.
(S)-4-(2-(4-Methylthiazol-2-yl)-2-pivalamidoethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.31 (s, 4H), 7.20 (s, 1H), 5.61-5.56 (m, 1H), 3.57-3.22 (m, 2H), 2.62 (s, 3H), 1.31 (s, 3H).
(S)-4-(2-(4-Ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-pivalamidoethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 7.92 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 1H), 7.12-7.14 (m, 4H), 7.03 (s, 1H), 5.38-5.46 (m, 1H), 3.3-3.4 (m, 1H), 3.08 (dd, J=10.2 and 13.8 Hz, 1H), 2.79 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 1.30 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H), 1.13 (s, 9H).
(S)-4-(2-(4-(Hydroxymethyl)thiazol-2-yl)-2-pivalamidoethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 7.92 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 1H), 7.24 (s, 1H), 7.08 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 2H), 7.00 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 2H), 5.29-5.37 (m, 1H), 4.55 (s, 2H), 3.30 (dd, J=4.8 and 13.5 Hz, 1H), 2.99 (dd, J=10.5 and 13.5 Hz, 1H), 0.93 (s, 9H).
(S)-4-(2-(4-(Ethoxycarbonyl)thiazol-2-yl)-2-pivalamidoethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 8.30 (s, 1H), 8.04 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 1H), 7.13 (s, 4H), 5.41-5.49 (m, 1H), 4.41 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 3.43 (dd, J=5.1 and 13.8 Hz, 1H), 3.14 (dd, J=5.7 and 9.9 Hz, 1H), 1.42 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H), 1.14 (s, 9H).
(S)-4-(2-(4-Phenylthiazol-2-yl)-2-pivalamidoethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 7.94-8.01 (m, 3H), 7.70 (s, 1H), 7.42-7.47 (m, 2H), 7.32-7.47 (m, 1H), 7.13-7.20 (m, 3H), 5.48-5.55 (m, 1H), 3.50 (dd, J=5.1 and 14.1 Hz, 1H), 3.18 (dd, J=10.2 and 14.1 Hz, 1H), 1.17 (s, 9H).
4-((S)-2-(4-(3-Methoxyphenyl)thiazol-2-yl)-2-pivalamidoethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.96-7.93 (d, 1H, J=8.1 Hz), 7.69 (s, 1H), 7.51-7.49 (d, 2H, J=7.9 Hz), 7.33 (t, 1H, J=8.0 Hz), 7.14 (s, 4H), 6.92-6.90 (d, 1H, J=7.8 Hz), 5.50 (t, 1H, J=5.1 Hz), 3.87 (s, 3H), 3.50-3.13 (m, 2H), 1.15 (s, 9H).
4-((S)-2-(4-(2,4-Dimethoxyphenyl)thiazol-2-yl)-2-pivalamidoethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 8.11-8.09 (d, 1H, J=7.8 Hz), 7.96-7.93 (d, 1H, J=8.4 Hz), 7.74 (s, 1H), 7.18-7.16 (m, 4H), 6.67-6.64 (d, 2H, J=9.0 Hz), 5.55-5.47 (m, 1H), 3.95 (s, 3H), 3.87 (s, 3H), 3.52-3.13 (m, 2H), 1.17 (s, 9H).
(S)-4-(2-(4-Benzylthiazol-2-yl)-2-pivalamidoethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.85 (d, 1H, J=8.4 Hz), 7.38-7.20 (m, 4H), 7.11-7.02 (m, 1H), 7.00 (s, 1H), 5.42-5.37 (m, 1H), 4.13 (s, 2H), 3.13-3.08 (m, 2H), 1.13 (s, 9H).
(S)-4-(2-Pivalamido-2-(4-(thiophen-2-ylmethyl)thiazol-2-yl)ethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.88-7.85 (d, 1H), 7.38-7.35 (m, 1H), 7.10-7.01 (m, 4H), 7.02 (s, 1H), 5.45-5.38 (m, 1H), 4.13 (s, 2H), 3.13-3.05 (m, 2H), 1.13 (2, 9H).
(S)-4-(2-(4-(3-Methoxybenzyl)thiazol-2-yl)-2-pivalamidoethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.85 (d, 1H, J=8.4 Hz), 7.25-7.20 (m, 1H), 7.11-7.02 (m, 4H), 7.01 (s, 1H), 6.90-6.79 (m, 2H), 5.45-5.40 (m, 1H), 4.09 (s, 2H), 3.79 (s, 3H), 3.12-3.08 (m, 2H), 1.10 (s, 9H).
4-((S)-2-(4-(2,3-Dihydrobenzo[b][1,4]dioxin-6-yl)thiazol-2-yl)-2-pivalamidoethyl)-phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.53 (s, 1H), 7.45 (s, 1H), 7.42-7.40 (d, 1H, J=8.4 Hz), 7.19-7.15 (m, 4H), 6.91-6.88 (d, 2H, J=8.4 Hz), 5.51-5.46 (m, 1H), 4.30 (s, 4H), 3.51-3.12 (m, 2H), 1.16 (s, 9H).
(S)-4-(2-(5-Methyl-4-phenylthiazol-2-yl)-2-pivalamidoethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.63-7.60 (d, 2H, J=7.1 Hz), 7.49-7.35 (m, 3H), 7.14 (s, 4H), 5.43-5.38 (m, 1H), 3.42-3.09 (m, 2H), 2.49 (s, 3H), 1.14 (s, 9H).
(S)-4-(2-(4-(Biphen-4-yl)thiazol-2-yl)-2-pivalamidoethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 8.04-8.01 (m, 2H), 7.72-7.66 (m, 5H), 7.48-7.35 (m, 3H), 7.15 (s, 4H), 5.50 (t, 1H, J=5.0 Hz), 3.57-3.15 (d, 2H), 1.16 (s, 9H).
(S)-4-(2-tert-Butoxycarbonyl-2-(2-methylthiazol-4-yl)-phenylsulfamic acid 1H NMR (300 MHz, D2O) δ 6.99-7.002 (m, 4H), 6.82 (s, 1H), 2.26 (dd, J=13.8 and 7.2 Hz, 1H), 2.76 (dd, J=13.8 and 7.2 Hz, 1H), 2.48 (s, 3H), 1.17 (s, 9H).
(S)-4-(2-(tert-Butoxycarbonyl)-2-(4-propylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl)-phenyl sulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, CD3OD): δ 7.18-7.02 (m, 5H), 5.06-5.03 (m, 1H), 3.26 (dd, J=13.8, 4.8 Hz, 1H), 2.95 (dd, J=13.8, 9.3 Hz, 1H), 2.74 (dd, J=15.0, 7.2 Hz, 2H), 1.81-1.71 (m, 2H), 1.40 (s, 7H), 1.33 (bs, 2H), 0.988 (t, J=7.5 Hz 3H).
(S)-4-(2-(tert-Butoxycarbonyl)-2-(4-tert-butylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl)-phenyl sulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, CD3OD): δ 7.12 (s, 4H), 7.01 (s, 1H), 5.11-5.06 (m, 1H), 3.32-3.25 (m, 1H), 2.96 (m, 1H), 1.42 (s, 8H), 1.38 (s, 9H), 1.32 (s, 1H).
(S)-4-(2-(tert-Butoxycarbonylamino)-2-(4-(methoxymethyl)thiazol-2-yl)ethyl)-phenyl sulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, CD3OD): δ 7.36 (s, 1H), 7.14-7.05 (m, 4H), 5.06 (dd, J=9.0, 5.1 Hz, 1H), 4.55 (s, 2H), 3.42 (s, 3H), 3.31-3.24 (m, 1H), 2.97 (dd, J=13.8, 9.9 Hz, 1H), 1.47-1.31 (m, 9H).
(S)-4-(2-tert-Butoxycarbonylamino)-2-(4-(2-hydroxymethyl)thiazol-2-yl)ethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 7.22-7.25 (m, 1H), 7.09-7.15 (m, 4H), 5.00-5.09 (m, 1H), 4.32-4.35 (m, 1H), 3.87 (t, J=6.6 Hz, 2H), 3.23-3.29 (m, 1H), 3.09-3.18 (m, 1H), 2.98 (t, J=6.6 Hz, 2H), 1.41 (s, 9H).
(S)-4-(2-tert-Butoxycarbonylamino)-2-(4-(2-ethoxy-2-oxoethyl)-thiazole-2-yl)-ethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 7.29 (s, 1H), 7.09-7.16 (m, 4H), 5.04-5.09 (m, 1H), 4.20 (q, J=6.9 Hz, 2H), 3.84 (s, 2H), 3.30 (dd, J=4.8 and 14.1 HZ, 1H), 2.97 (dd, J=9.6 Hz and 13.8 Hz, 1H), 1.41 (s, 9H), 1.29 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H).
(S)-4-(2-(tert-Butoxycarbonylamino)-2-(4-(2-methoxy-2-oxoethyl)thiazol-2-yl)ethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 7.31 (s, 1H), 7.01-7.16 (m, 4H), 5.04-5.09 (m, 1H), 4.01 (s, 2H), 3.78 (s, 2H), 3.74 (s, 3H), 3.29 (dd, J=5.1 and 13.8 Hz, 1H), 2.99 (dd, J=9.3 and 13.8 Hz, 1H), 1.41 (s, 9H).
(S)-4-(2-(tert-Butoxycarbonylamino)-2-(5-phenylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl)-phenyl sulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, CD3OD): δ 7.98 (s, 1H), 7.62 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 7.46-7.35 (m, 4H), 7.14 (s, 4H), 5.09 (bs, 1H), 3.07-2.99 (m, 2H), 1.43 (s, 9H).
4-((S)-2-(tert-Butoxycarbonylamino)-2-(4-(3-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)thiazol-2-yl)ethyl)phenyl sulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, CD3OD): δ 8.28 (s, 1H), 8.22-8.19 (m, 1H), 7.89 (s, 1H), 7.65 (d, J=5.1 Hz, 2H), 7.45 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 1H), 7.15 (s, 4H), 5.17-5.14 (m, 1H), 3.43-3.32 (m, 1H), 3.05 (dd, J=14.1, 9.6 Hz, 1H), 1.42 (s, 9H).
(S)-4-(2-(tert-Butoxycarbonylamino)-2-(4-phenylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl)-phenyl sulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, CD3OD): δ 7.98 (s, 1H), 7.94 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 7.46-7.35 (m, 4H), 7.14 (s, 4H), 5.09 (bs, 1H), 3.07-2.99 (m, 2H), 1.43 (s, 9H).
(S,S)-2-(2-{2-[2-tert-Butoxycarbonylamino-2-(4-sulfoaminophenyl)ethyl]thiazol-4-yl}acetylamido)-3-phenylpropionic acid methyl ester: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 6.85-6.94 (m, 9H), 6.64 (s, 1H), 4.83 (s, 1H), 4.54-4.58 (m, 1H), 3.49 (s, 3H), 3.39 (s, 2H), 2.80-2.97 (m, 1H), 2.64-2.78 (m, 1H), 1.12 (s, 9H).
(S)-[1-{1-Oxo-4-[2-(1-phenyl-1H-tetrazol-5-sulfonyl)ethyl]-1H-1λ4-thiazol-2-yl}-2-(4-sulfamino-phenyl)-ethyl]-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 7.22-7.75 (m, 2H), 7.62-7.69 (m, 2H), 7.55 (s, 1H), 7.10-7.20 (m, 5H), 5.25 (m, 1H), 4.27-4.36 (m, 1H), 4.11-4.21 (m, 1H), 3.33-3.44 (m, 4H), 2.84-2.90 (m, 1H), 1.33 (s, 9H).
4-((S)-2-(tert-Butoxycarbonylamino)-2-(4-(thiophen-3-yl)thiazol-2-yl)ethyl)phenyl sulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, CD3OD): δ 7.84 (dd, J=3.0, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 7.57-7.55 (m, 2H), 7.47 (dd, J=4.8, 3.0 Hz, 1H), 7.15 (s, 4H), 5.15-5.10 (m, 1H), 3.39-3.34 (m, 1H), 3.01 (dd, J=14.1, 9.6 Hz, 1H), 1.42 (s, 8H), 1.32 (s, 1H).
(S)-4-(2-(Benzo[d]thiazol-2-ylamino)-2-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)ethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.86-7.82 (m, 2H), 7.42 (t, 2H, J=7.1 Hz), 7.33 (t, 1H, J=8.2 Hz), 7.02 (s, 4H), 5.10-5.05 (m, 1H), 2.99-2.91 (m, 2H), 1.29 (s, 9H).
(S)-4-(2-tert-Butoxycarbonylamino)-2-(2-methylthiazol-4-yl)-phenylsulfamic acid 1H NMR (300 MHz, D2O) δ 6.99-7.002 (m, 4H), 6.82 (s, 1H), 2.26 (dd, J=13.8 and 7.2 Hz, 1H), 2.76 (dd, J=13.8 and 7.2 Hz, 1H), 2.48 (s, 3H), 1.17 (s, 9H).
(S)-4-(2-(tert-Butoxycarbonylamino)-2-(2-(pivaloyloxy)thiazol-4-yl)ethyl)-phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, D2O) δ 6.95 (s, 4H), 6.63 (s, 1H), 2.94 (dd, J=13.5 and 4.8 Hz, 1H), 2.75 (dd, J=13.5 and 4.8 Hz, 1H), 1.16 (s, 9H), 1.13 (s, 9H).
The first aspect of Category V of the present disclosure relates to 2-(thiazol-2-yl) compounds having the formula:
wherein R1, R2, R3, and L are further defined herein in Table IX below.
The compounds encompassed within the first aspect of Category V of the present disclosure can be prepared by the procedure outlined in Scheme VII and described in Example 8 herein below.
Preparation of N-[1-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl]-2-phenyl-acetamide (20): To a solution of 1-(S)-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl amine hydrobromide, 3, (0.393 g, 1.1 mmol), phenylacetic acid (0.190 g, 1.4 mmol) and 1-hydroxybenzotriazole (HOBt) (0.094 g, 0.70 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) at 0°, is added 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide (EDCI) (0.268 g, 1.4 mmol) followed by triethylamine (0.60 mL, 4.2 mmol). The mixture is stirred at 0° C. for 30 minutes then at room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture is diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic phase is washed with 1 N aqueous HCl, 5% aqueous NaHCO3, water and brine, and dried over Na2SO4. The solvent is removed in vacuo to afford 0.260 g (60% yield) of the desired product which is used without further purification. ESI+ MS 396 (M+1).
Preparation of {4-[2-(S)-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(2-phenylacetylamido)ethyl]-phenyl}sulfamic acid (21): N-[1-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl]-2-phenyl-acetamide, 20, (0.260 g) is dissolved in MeOH (4 mL). A catalytic amount of Pd/C (10% w/w) is added and the mixture is stirred under a hydrogen atmosphere 18 hours. The reaction mixture is filtered through a bed of CELITE™ and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The crude product is dissolved in pyridine (12 mL) and treated with SO3-pyridine (0.177 g, 1.23). The reaction is stirred at room temperature for 5 minutes after which a 7% solution of NH4OH (10 mL) is added. The mixture is then concentrated and the resulting residue is purified by reverse phase chromatography to afford 0.136 g of the desired product as the ammonium salt. 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 8.60 (d, 1H, J=8.1 Hz), 7.33-7.23 (m, 3H), 7.16-7.00 (m, 6H), 5.44-5.41 (m, 1H), 3.28 (1H, A of ABX, obscured by solvent), 3.03 (1H, B of ABX, J=14.1, 9.6 Hz), 2.80 (q, 2H, J=10.5, 7.8 Hz) 1.31 (t, 3H, J=4.6 Hz).
The following are non-limiting examples of the first aspect of Category V of the present disclosure.
(S)-4-(2-(4-Ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(2-(2-fluorophenyl)acetamido)ethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 8.65 (d, 1H, J=8.4 Hz), 7.29-7.15 (m, 1H), 7.13-7.03 (m, 7H), 5.46-5.42 (m, 1H), 3.64-3.51 (m, 2H), 3.29 (1H), 3.04 (1H, B of ABX, J=13.8, 9.6 Hz), 2.81 (q, 2H, J=15.6, 3.9 Hz), 1.31 (t, 3H, J=7.8 Hz). 19F NMR (CD3OD) δ 43.64.
(S)-4-(2-(4-Ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(2-(3-fluorophenyl)acetamido)ethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 8.74 (d, 1H, J=8.4 Hz), 7.32 (q, 1H, J=6.6, 14.2 Hz), 7.10-6.91 (m, 8H), 5.47-5.40 (m, 1H), 3.53 (s, 2H), 3.30 (1H), 3.11 (1H, B of ABX, J=9.6, 14.1 Hz), 2.80 (q, 2H, J=6.6, 15.1 Hz), 1.31 (t, 3H, J=7.8 Hz). 19F NMR δ 47.42.
(S)-4-(2-(2-(2,3-Difluorophenyl)acetamido)-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl)-phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.16-7.05 (m, 5H), 6.85-6.80 (m, 1H), 5.48-5.43 (m, 1H), 3.63 (s, 2H), 3.38 (1H, A of ABX, obscured by solvent), 3.03 (1H), 2.80 (q, H, J=15.1, 7.8 Hz), 1.31 (t, 3H, J=7.5 Hz).
(S)-4-(2-(2-(3,4-Difluorophenyl)acetamido)-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl)-phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 8.75 (d, 1H, J=7.8 Hz), 7.23-7.04 (m, 6H), 6.88-6.84 (m, 1H), 5.44-5.40 (m, 1H), 3.49 (s, 2H), 3.34 (1H), 3.02 (1H, B of ABX, J=14.1, 9.9 Hz), 2.80 (q, 2H, J=15.1, 7.8 Hz), 1.31 (t, 1H, J=7.5 Hz). 19F NMR (CD3OD) δ 22.18, 19.45.
(S)-4-(2-(2-(2-Chlorophenyl)acetamido)-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.39-7.36 (m, 1H), 7.27-7.21 (m, 2H), 7.15-6.98 (m, 5H), 5.49-5.44 (m, 1H), 3.69 (d, 2H, J=11.7 Hz), 3.32 (1H), 3.04 (1H, B of ABX, J=9.3, 13.9 Hz), 2.80 (q, 2H, J=7.8, 15.3 Hz), 1.31 (t, 3H, J=7.5 Hz).
(S)-4-(2-(2-(3-Chlorophenyl)acetamido)-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.33-7.23 (m, 3H), 7.13-7.03 (m, 5H), 5.43 (q, 1H, J=5.1, 9.6 Hz), 3.51 (s, 2H), 3.29 (1H), 3.03 (1H, B of ABX, J=9.9, 14.1 Hz), 2.80 (q, 2H, J=7.5, 15 Hz), 1.31 (t, 3H, J=7.8 Hz).
(S)-4-(2-(4-Ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)acetamido)ethyl)-phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.16-7.08 (m, 3H), 7.03-7.00 (m, 3H), 6.70-6.63 (m, 2H), 5.42-5.40 (m, 1H), 3.44 (s, 2H), 3.28 (1H, A of ABX, obscured by solvent), 3.04 (B of ABX, J=14.1, 9.6 Hz), 2.89 (q, 2H, J=15, 7.5 Hz), 1.31 (t, 3H, J=7.5 Hz).
(S)-4-(2-(4-Ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(2-(2-methoxyphenyl)acetamido)ethyl)-phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 8.00 (d, 1H, J=7.8 Hz), 7.26 (t, 1H, J=13.2 Hz), 7.09-7.05 (m, 4H), 7.01 (s, 1H), 6.91-6.89 (m, 4H), 5.44-5.39 (m, 1H), 3.71 (s, 3H), 3.52 (s, 2H), 3.26 (1H, A of ABX, J=14.1, 5.1 Hz), 3.06 (1H B of ABX, J=13.8, 8.4 Hz), 2.80 (q, 2H, J=8.1, 15.6 Hz), 1.31 (t, 3H, J=1.2 Hz).
(S)-4-{2-(4-Ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-[2-(3-methoxyphenyl)acetamido]ethyl}-phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 8.58 (d, 1H, J=8.1 Hz), 7.21 (t, 1H, J=7.8 Hz), 7.12-7.02 (m, 4H), 6.81 (s, 2H), 6.72 (d, 1H, J=7.5 Hz), 5.45-5.40 (m, 1H), 3.79 (s, 3H), 3.50 (s, 2H), 3.29 (1H, A of ABX, obscured by solvent), 3.08 (1H, B of ABX, J=11.8, 5.1 Hz), 2.80 (q, 2H, J=15, 7.5 Hz), 1.31 (t, 3H, J=6.6 Hz).
(S)-4-(2-(4-Ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(3-phenylpropanamido)ethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 8.56 (d, 1H, J=8.4 Hz), 7.25-6.98 (m, 9H), 5.43-5.38 (m, 1H), 3.26, (1H, A of ABX, J=14.1, 9.6 Hz), 2.97 (1H, B of ABX, J=10.9, 3 Hz), 2.58-2.76 (m, 3H), 2.98 (q, 2H, J=13.8, 7.2 Hz), 1.29 (t, 3H, J=8.7 Hz).
(S)-4-(2-(2-(3,4-Dimethoxyphenyl)acetamido)-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl)-phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.12-7.03 (m, 3H), 6.91 (d, 1H, J=8.4 Hz), 6.82 (s, 1H), 6.66 (d, 1H, J=2.1 Hz), 6.63 (d, 1H, J=2.1 Hz), 5.43 (m, 1H), 3.84 (s, 3H), 3.80 (s, 3H), 3.45 (s, 2H), 3.30 (1H), 3.03 (1H, B of ABX, J=14.1, 9.6 Hz), 2.79 (q, 2H, J=15.1, 7.2 Hz), 1.30 (t, 3H, J=7.2 Hz).
(S)-4-(2-(2-(2,3-Dimethoxyphenyl)acetamido)-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl)-phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 8.31 (d, 1H, J=7.8 Hz), 7.11-6.93 (m, 6H), 6.68 (d, 1H, J=7.5 Hz), 5.49-5.40 (m, 1H), 3.87 (s, 3H), 3.70 (s, 3H), 3.55 (s, 2H), 3.26 (1H, A of ABX, obscured by solvent), 3.06 (1H, B of ABX, J=13.9, 9 Hz), 2.80 (q, 2H, J=14.8, 7.5 Hz), 1.31 (t, 3H, J=7.5 Hz).
(S)-4-(2-(3-(3-Chlorophenyl)propanamido)-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl)phenyl-sulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.27-7.18 (m, 3H), 7.13-7.08 (m, 5H), 7.01 (s, 1H), 5.39 (q, 1H, J=5.1, 9.4 Hz), 3.28 (1H, A of ABX, J=5.1, 14.1 Hz), 2.97 (1H, B of ABX, J=9.3, 13.9 Hz), 2.88-2.76 (m, 4H), 2.50 (t, 2H, J=8.1 Hz), 1.31 (t, 3H, J=7.8 Hz).
(S)-4-(2-(4-Ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(3-(2-methoxyphenyl)propanamido)ethyl)-phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.18-7.08 (m, 6H), 6.92 (d, 1H, J=8.1 Hz), 6.82 (t, 1H, J=7.5 Hz), 5.40-5.35 (m, 1H), 3.25 (1H, A of ABX, J=15, 5.4 Hz), 3.00 (1H, B of ABX, J=10.5, 7.5 Hz), 2.88-2.76 (m, 4H), 2.47 (q, 2H, J=9.1, 6 Hz), 1.31 (t, 3H, J=7.8 Hz).
(S)-4-(2-(4-Ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(3-(3-methoxyphenyl)propanamido)ethyl)-phenyl sulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.19-7.00 (m, 5H), 6.75 (s, 1H), 6.73 (s, 1H), 5.42-5.37 (m, 1H), 3.76 (s, 3H), 3.25 (1H, A of ABX, J=13.9, 5.4 Hz), 2.98 (1H, B of ABX, J=14.1, 9.6 Hz), 2.86-2.75 (m, 4H), 2.48 (q, 2H, J=11.7, 1.2 Hz), 1.31 (t, 3H, J=7.5 Hz).
(S)-4-(2-(4-Ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(3-(4-methoxyphenyl)propanamido)ethyl)-phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.13-6.99 (m, 7H), 6.82-6.78 (m, 2H), 5.42-5.37 (m, 1H), 3.33 (s, 3H), 3.23 (1H), 2.97 (1H, B of ABX, J=13.3, 11.4 Hz), 2.83-2.75 (m, 4H), 2.49 (q, 2H, J=6.4, 3.3 Hz), 1.31 (t, 3H, J=7.5 Hz).
(S)-4-{2-[2-(4-Ethyl-2,3-dioxopiperazin-1-yl)acetamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.14 (s, 4H), 7.08 (s, 1H), 5.56-5.51 (m, 1H), 4.34 (d, 2H, J=16.2 Hz), 3.88 (d, 2H, J=17.6 Hz), 3.59-3.40 (m, 3H), 3.26-3.14 (m, 3H), 2.98 (1H, B of ABX, J=10.8, 13.9 Hz), 2.82 (q, 2H, J=6.9, 15 Hz), 1.32 (t, 3H, J=7.5 Hz), 1.21 (t, 3H, J=7.2 Hz).
(S)-4-{2-(4-Ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-[2-(5-methyl-2,4-dioxo-3,4-dihydropyrimidin-1(2H)-yl)acetamido]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.13 (s, 1H), 7.06-7.02 (m, 4H), 6.95 (s, 1H), 5.42-5.31 (m, 1H), 4.43-4.18 (dd, 2H, J=16.5 Hz), 3.24-2.93 (m, 2H), 2.74-2.69 (q, 2H, J=7.3 Hz), 1.79 (s, 3H), 1.22 (t, 3H, J=7.5 Hz).
(S)-4-[2-(benzo[d][1,3]dioxole-5-carboxamido)-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl]-phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.25 (d, 1H, J=6.5 Hz), 7.13 (s, 1H), 7.06 (d, 2H, J=8.5 Hz), 7.00 (d, 2H, J=8.5 Hz), 6.91 (s, 1H), 6.76 (d, 1H, J=8.1 Hz), 5.90 (s, 2H), 5.48 (q, 1H, J=5.0 Hz), 3.32=3.24 (m, 2H), 3.07-2.99 (m, 2H), 2.72 (q, 2H, J=7.5 Hz), 1.21 (t, 3H, J=7.5 Hz).
(S)-4-{2-[2-(2,5-Dimethylthiazol-4-yl)acetamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}-phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.10-7.01 (m, 5H), 5.41 (t, 1H, J=6.9 Hz), 3.58 (s, 2H), 3.33-3.01 (m, 2H), 2.82-2.75 (q, 2H, J=7.5 Hz), 2.59 (s, 3H), 2.23 (s, 3H), 1.30 (t, 3H, J=7.5 Hz).
(S)-4-{2-[2-(2,4-Dimethylthiazol-5-yl)acetamido]-2-(4-methylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}-phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 8.71-8.68 (d, 1H, J=8.4 Hz), 7.10-7.03 (m, 4H), 7.01 (s, 1H), 5.41 (m, 1H), 3.59 (s, 1H), 3.34-2.96 (m, 2H), 2.59 (s, 3H), 2.40 (s, 3H), 2.23 (s, 3H).
(S)-4-{2-(4-Ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-[3-(thiazol-2-yl)propanamido]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD): (S)-4-{2-[2-(2,5-Dimethylthiazol-4-yl)acetamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}-phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.10-7.01 (m, 5H), 5.41 (t, 1H, J=6.9 Hz), 3.58 (s, 2H), 3.33-3.01 (m, 2H), 2.82-2.75 (q, 2H, J=7.5 Hz), 2.59 (s, 3H), 2.23 (s, 3H), 1.30 (t, 3H, J=7.5 Hz).
7.67-7.65 (m, 1H), 7.49-7.47 (m, 1H), 7.14-7.08 (m, 4H), 7.04 (s, 1H), 5.46-5.41 (q, 1H, J=5.1 Hz), 3.58 (s, 2H), 3.30-3.25 (m, 3H), 3.02-2.67 (m, 5H), 1.31 (t, 3H, J=7.5 Hz).
(S)-4-{2-(4-Ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-[2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)acetamido]ethyl}-phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.04-6.91 (m, 6H), 5.32 (t, 1H, J=5.4 Hz), 3.25-2.90 (m, 2H), 2.71-2.61 (m, 4H) 1.93 (s, 2H) 1.22-1.14 (m, 6H).
The second aspect of Category V of the present disclosure relates to 2-(thiazol-4-yl) compounds having the formula:
wherein R1, R4, and L are further defined herein in Table X below.
The compounds encompassed within the second aspect of Category I of the present disclosure can be prepared by the procedure outlined in Scheme VIII and described in Example 9 below.
Preparation of (S)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-[(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethanamine hydrobromide salt (22): A mixture of (S)-tert-butyl 4-bromo-1-(4-nitrophenyl)-3-oxobutan-2-ylcarbamate, 7, (7.74 g, 20 mmol), and thiophen-2-carbothioic acid amide (3.14 g, 22 mmol) in CH3CN (200 mL) is refluxed for 5 hours. The reaction mixture is cooled to room temperature and diethyl ether (50 mL) is added to the solution. The precipitate which forms is collected by filtration. The solid is dried under vacuum to afford 7.14 g (87% yield) of the desired product. ESI+ MS 332 (M+1).
Preparation of 2-(3-chlorophenyl)-N-{(S)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}acetamide (23): To a solution of 2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-(2-thiophene2-ylthiazol-4-yl)ethylamine, 22, (0.41 g, 1 mmol) 3-chlorophenylacetic acid (0.170 g, 1 mmol) and 1-hydroxybenzotriazole (HOBt) (0.070 g, 0.50 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) at 0° C., is added 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide (EDCI) (0.190 g, 1 mmol) followed by triethylamine (0.42 mL, 3 mmol). The mixture is stirred at 0° C. for 30 minutes then at room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture is diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic phase is washed with 1 N aqueous HCl, 5% aqueous NaHCO3, water and brine, and dried over Na2SO4. The solvent is removed in vacuo to afford 0.290 g (60% yield) of the desired product which is used without further purification. ESI− MS 482 (M−1).
Preparation of {4-[2-(3-chlorophenyl)acetylamino]-2-(2-thiophen-2-ylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl]phenyl}sulfamic acid (24): 2-(3-chlorophenyl)-N-{(S)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-[2-(thiophene2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}acetamide, 23, (0.290 g) is dissolved in MeOH (4 mL). A catalytic amount of Pd/C (10% w/w) is added and the mixture is stirred under a hydrogen atmosphere 18 hours. The reaction mixture is filtered through a bed of CELITE™ and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The crude product is dissolved in pyridine (12 mL) and treated with SO3-pyridine (0.157 g). The reaction is stirred at room temperature for 5 minutes after which a 7% solution of NH4OH is added. The mixture is then concentrated and the resulting residue is purified by reverse phase chromatography to afford 0.078 g of the desired product as the ammonium salt. 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.61 (d, 1H, J=3.6 Hz), 7.58 (d, 1H, J=5.1 Hz), 7.41-7.35 (m, 1H), 7.28-7.22 (m, 2H), 7.18-6.98 (m, 6H), 5.33 (t, 1H, J=6.6 Hz), 3.70 (d, 2H, J=3.9 Hz), 3.23 (1H, A of ABX, J=6.6, 13.8 Hz), 3.07 (1H, B of ABX, J=8.1, 13.5 Hz).
The following are non-limiting examples of compounds encompassed within the second aspect of Category V of the present disclosure.
4-((S)-2-(2-(3-Methoxyphenyl)acetamido)-2-(2-(thiophene2-yl)thiazol-4-yl)ethyl)-phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 8.35 (d, 1H, J=8.7 Hz), 7.61-7.57 (m, 2H), 7.25-7.20 (m, 2H), 7.25-7.20 (m, 2H), 7.09 (s, 1H), 7.05 (d, 2H, J=4.2 Hz), 6.99 (d, 1H, J=8.7 Hz), 6.81 (d, 1H, J=7.8 Hz), 6.77 (s, 1H), 5.30-5.28 (m, 1H), 3.76 (s, 3H), 3.51 (s, 2H), 3.20 (1H, A of ABX, J=6.3, 13.6 Hz), 3.06 (1H, B of ABX, J=8.1, 13.8 Hz).
4-{(S)-2-(3-Phenylpropanamido)-2-[2-(thiophene2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}-phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 8.30 (d, 1H, J=9 Hz), 7.61-7.56 (m, 2H), 7.26-7.14 (m, 7H), 7.12 (d, 1H, J=1.5 Hz), 7.09 (d, 1H, J=2.1 Hz), 6.89 (s, 1H), 5.28-5.26 (m, 1H), 3.18 (1H, A of ABX, J=6.2, 13.8 Hz), 2.96 (1H, B of ABX, J=8.4, 13.6 Hz).
4-{(S)-2-(3-(3-Chlorophenyl)propanamido)-2-[2-(thiophene2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.61-7.56 (m, 3H), 7.22-7.14 (m, 6H), 7.08 (d, 1H), 7.00 (d, 1H, J=77.5 Hz), 6.870 (s, 1H), 5.25 (t, 1H, J=7.8 Hz), 3.18 (1H, A of ABX, J=6.6, 13.8 Hz), 2.97 (1H, B of ABX, J=7.8, 13.8 Hz), 2.87 (t, 2H, J=7.5 Hz), 2.51 (t, 2H, J=7.2 Hz).
4-{(S)-2-[2-(3-Fluorophenyl)acetamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.61-7.57 (m, 2H), 7.32-7.28 (m, 1H), 7.19-7.16 (m, 2H), 7.08 (t, 1H, J=4.5 Hz), 7.02-6.95 (m, 6H), 5.29 (t, 1H, J=8.1 Hz), 3.53 (s, 2H), 3.22 (1H, A of ABX, J=6.6, 13.9 Hz), 3.06 (1H, B of ABX, J=8.4, 13.6 Hz).
(S)-4-{2-[2-(3-Methyl-1,2,4-oxadiazol-5-yl)acetamido]-2-(2-phenylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 7.98-7.95 (m, 2H), 7.48-7.46 (m, 3H), 7.23 (s, 1H), 7.09-7.05 (m, 4H), 5.33 (t, 1H, J=7.2 Hz), 3.33-3.06 (m, 2H), 2.35 (s, 3H).
4-{(S)-2-[2-(4-ethyl-2,3-dioxopiperazin-1-yl)acetamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.62 (d, 1H, J=3 Hz), 7.58 (d, 1H, J=15.6 Hz), 7.27 (s, 1H), 7.16 (t, 1H, J=1.5 Hz), 5.42-5.32 (m, 1H), 4.31 (d, 1H, J=15.6 Hz), 3.91 (d, 1H, J=15.9 Hz), 3.60-3.50 (m, 4H), 3.30-3.23 (m, 2H), 2.98 (1H, B of ABX, J=9.9, 13.8 Hz), 1.21 (t, 3H, J=6.9 Hz).
The third aspect of Category V of the present disclosure relates to compounds having the formula:
wherein the linking unit L comprises a phenyl unit, said linking group having the formula:
—C(O)[(CR5aH)][(CR6aH)]—
R1 is hydrogen, R6a is phenyl, R5a is phenyl or substituted phenyl and non-limiting examples of the units R2, R3, and R5a are further exemplified below in Table XI.
The compounds encompassed within the third aspect of Category V of the present disclosure can be prepared by the procedure outlined in Scheme IX and described in Example 10 herein below.
Preparation of (S)—N-[1-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl]-2,3-diphenyl-propanamide (25): To a solution of 1-(S)-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl amine hydrobromide, 3, (0.95 g, 2.65 mmol), diphenylpropionic acid (0.60 g, 2.65 mmol) and 1-hydroxybenzotriazole (HOBt) (0.180 g, 1.33 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) at 0°, is added 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide (EDCI) (0.502 g, 2.62 mmol) followed by triethylamine (1.1 mL, 7.95 mmol). The mixture is stirred at 0° C. for 30 minutes then at room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture is diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic phase is washed with 1 N aqueous HCl, 5% aqueous NaHCO3, water and brine, and dried over Na2SO4. The solvent is removed in vacuo to afford 0.903 g (70% yield) of the desired product which is used without further purification.
Preparation of (S)-4-(2-(2,3-diphenylpropanamido)-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl)phenylsulfamic acid (26) (S)—N-[1-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl]-2,3-diphenyl-propanamide, 25, (0.903 g) is dissolved in MeOH (10 mL). A catalytic amount of Pd/C (10% w/w) is added and the mixture is stirred under a hydrogen atmosphere 18 hours. The reaction mixture is filtered through a bed of CELITE™ and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The crude product is dissolved in pyridine (30 mL) and treated with SO3-pyridine (0.621 g). The reaction is stirred at room temperature for 5 minutes after which a 7% solution of NH4OH is added. The mixture is then concentrated and the resulting residue is purified by reverse phase chromatography to afford 0.415 g of the desired product as the ammonium salt. 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 8.59-8.52 (m, 1H), 7.37-7.04 (m, 9H), 6.97-6.93 (m, 1H), 6.89-6.85 (m, 2H), 5.36-5.32 (m, 1H), 3.91-3.83 (m, 1H), 3.29 (1H, A of ABX, obscured by solvent), 3.15 (1H, B of ABX, J=5.4, 33.8 Hz), 2.99-2.88 (m, 2H), 2.81-2.69 (m, 2H), 1.32-1.25 (m, 3H).
The following procedure illustrates an example of the procedure which can be used to provide different R5a units according to the present disclosure. Using the procedure outlined in Scheme X and described in Example 11, one can achieve the R5a units encompassed by the present disclosure.
Preparation of methyl 2-(2-methoxyphenyl)-3-phenylpropanoate (27): A 500 mL round-bottom flask is charged with methyl 2-(2-methoxyphenyl)acetate (8.496 g, 47 mmol, 1 eq) and THF (200 mL). The homogeneous mixture is cooled to 0° C. in an ice bath. Lithium diisopropyl amide (23.5 mL of a 2.0M solution in heptane/THF) is added, maintaining a temperature less than 3° C. The reaction is stirred 45 minutes at this reduced temperature. Benzyl bromide (5.6 mL, 47 mmol, 1 eq) is added dropwise. The reaction is allowed to gradually warm to room temperature and is stirred for 18 hours. The reaction is quenched with 1N HCl and extracted 3 times with equal portions of EtOAc. The combined extracts are washed with H2O and brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated. The residue is purified over silica to afford 4.433 g (35%) of the desired compound. ESI+ MS 293 (M+Na).
Preparation of 2-(2-methoxyphenyl)-3-phenylpropanoic acid (28): Methyl 2-(2-methoxyphenyl)-3-phenylpropanoate (4.433 g, 16 mmol, 1 eq) is dissolved in 100 mL of a 1:1 (v:v) mixture of THF and methanol. Sodium hydroxide (3.28 g, 82 mmol, 5 eq) is added and the reaction mixture is stirred 18 hours at room temperature. The reaction is then poured into H2O and the pH is adjusted to 2 via addition of 1N HCl. A white precipitate forms which is removed by filtration. The resulting solution is extracted with 3 portion of diethyl ether. The extracts are pooled, washed with H2O and brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The resulting residue is purified over silica to afford 2.107 g (51%) of the desired compound. ESI− MS 255 (M−1), 211 (M-CO2H).
Intermediate 28 can be carried forward according to the procedure outlined in Scheme IX and described in Example 10 to produce the following compound according to the third aspect of Category V.
(S)-4-{2-(4-Ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-[2-(2-methoxyphenyl)-3-phenylpropanamido]-ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.32-7.12 (m, 7H), 7.05-7.02 (m, 1H), 6.99-6.83 (m, 4H), 6.80-6.75 (m, 2H), 5.35-5.31 (m, 1H), 4.31-4.26 (m, 1H), 3.75 (s, 3H), 3.20-2.90 (m, 4H), 2.79-2.74 (m, 2H), 1.32-1.25 (m, 3H).
The following are further non-limiting examples of compounds according to the third aspect of Category I of the present disclosure.
(S)-4-{2-(4-Ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-[2-(3-fluorophenyl)-3-phenylpropanamido]-ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.33-6.87 (m, 14H), 5.39-5.25 (m, 1H), 3.95-3.83 (m, 1H), 3.31-3.10 (m, 1H), 3.05-2.88 (m, 2H), 2.80-2.70 (m, 2H), 1.32-1.23 (m, 3H). 19F NMR □ 47.59.
(S)-4-{2-(4-Ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-[2-(3-methoxyphenyl)-3-phenylpropanamido]-ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.85 (d, 1H, J=8.4 Hz), 7.25-7.20 (m, 1H), 7.11-7.02 (m, 4H), 7.01 (s, 1H), 6.90-6.79 (m, 2H), 5.45-5.40 (m, 1H), 4.09 (s, 2H), 3.79 (s, 3H), 3.12-3.08 (m, 2H), 1.10 (s, 9H).
The fourth aspect of Category V of the present disclosure relates to compounds having the formula:
wherein the linking unit L comprises a phenyl unit, said linking group having the formula:
—C(O)[(CR5aH)][(CR6aH]—
R1 is hydrogen, R6a is phenyl, R5a is substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl and the units R2, R3, and R5a are further exemplified herein below in Table XII.
The compounds encompassed within the fourth aspect of Category V of the present disclosure can be prepared by the procedure outlined in Scheme XI and described in Example 5 herein below.
Preparation of ethyl-2-benzyl-3-[(S)-1-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)-ethylamino]-3-oxopropanoate (29): To a solution of 1-(S)-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl amine hydrobromide, 3, (0.406 g, 1.13 mmol), 2-benzyl-3-ethoxy-3-oxopropanoic acid (0.277 g) and 1-hydroxybenzotriazole (HOBt) (0.191 g, 1.41 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) at 0°, is added 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide (EDCI) (0.240 g, 1.25 mmol) followed by diisopropylethylamine (DIPEA) (0.306 g). The mixture is stirred at 0° C. for 30 minutes then at room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture is diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic phase is washed with 1 N aqueous HCl, 5% aqueous NaHCO3, water and brine, and dried over Na2SO4. The solvent is removed in vacuo to afford 0.169 g (31% yield) of the desired product which is used without further purification.
Preparation of N—[(S)-1-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl]-2-(3-methyl-1,2,4-oxadiazol-5-yl)-3-phenylpropanamide (30): Ethyl 2-benzyl-3-((S)-1-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethylamino)-3-oxopropanoate is dissolved in toluene (5 mL) and heated to reflux. Potassium carbonate (80 mg) and acetamide oxime (43 mg) are added. and treated with 80 mg potassium carbonate and 43 mg acetamide oxime at reflux. The reaction mixture is cooled to room temperature, filtered and concentrated. The residue is chromatographed over silica to afford 0.221 g (94%) of the desired product as a yellow oil.
Preparation of 4-{(S)-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-[(2-(3-methyl-1,2,4-oxadiazol-5-yl)-3-phenylpropanamido]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid (31): N—[(S)-1-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(4 nitrophenyl)ethyl]-2-(3-methyl-1,2,4-oxadiazol-5-yl)-3-phenylpropanamide, 30, (0.221 g) and tin (II) chloride (507 mg, 2.2 mmol) are dissolved in EtOH (25 mL) and the solution is brought to reflux 4 hours. The solvent is removed in vacuo and the resulting residue is dissolved in EtOAc. A saturated solution of NaHCO3 (50 mL) is added and the solution is stirred 1 hour. The organic layer is separated and the aqueous layer extracted twice with EtOAc. The combined organic layers are dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated to a residue which is dissolved in pyridine (0.143 g) and treated with SO3-pyridine (0.143 g). The reaction is stirred at room temperature for 5 minutes after which a 7% solution of NH4OH is added. The mixture is then concentrated and the resulting residue is purified by reverse phase chromatography to afford 0.071 g of the desired product as the ammonium salt. 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 7.29-6.87 (m, 10H), 5.38-5.30 (m, 1H), 4.37-4.30 (m, 1H), 3.42-2.74 (m, 6H), 2.38-2.33 (m, 3H), 1.34-1.28 (m, 3H).
Category VI of the present disclosure relates to 2-(thiazol-2-yl) compounds having the formula:
wherein R1, R2, and R3 are further defined herein in Table XIII herein.
The compounds encompassed within Category VI of the present disclosure can be prepared by the procedure outlined in Scheme XII and described in Example 13 below.
Preparation of (S)—N-[1-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl]-4-oxo-4-phenylbutanamide (32): 3-Benzoylpropionic acid (0.250 g) is dissolved in CH2Cl2 (5 mL), N-methyl imidazole (0.333 mL) is added and the resulting solution is cooled to 0° C. after which a solution of thionyl chloride (0.320 g) in CH2Cl2 (2 mL) is added dropwise. After 0.5 hours (S)-1-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethanamine, 3, (0.388 g) is added. The reaction is stirred for 18 hours at room temperature and then concentrated in vacuo. The resulting residue is dissolved in EtOAc and washed with 1N HCl and brine. The solution is dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated and the crude material purified over silica to afford 0.415 g of the desired product.
Preparation of (S)-4-[2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(4-oxo-4-phenylbutanamido)-ethyl]phenylsulfamic acid (33): (S)—N-[1-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl]-2,3-diphenyl-propanamide, 32, (0.2 g) is dissolved in MeOH (15 mL). A catalytic amount of Pd/C (10% w/w) is added and the mixture is stirred under a hydrogen atmosphere 18 hours. The reaction mixture is filtered through a bed of CELITE™ and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The crude product is dissolved in pyridine (5 mL) and treated with SO3-pyridine (0.153 g). The reaction is stirred at room temperature for 5 minutes after which a 7% solution of NH4OH is added. The mixture is then concentrated and the resulting residue is purified by reverse phase chromatography to afford 0.090 g of the desired product as the ammonium salt. 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 8.68 (d, 1H, J=8.2 Hz), 8.00 (d, 2H, J=7.2 Hz), 7.80-7.50 (m, 3H), 7.12 (s, 4H), 7.03 (s, 1H), 5.46-5.38 (m, 1H), 3.29-3.14 (m, 2H), 3.06-2.99 (m, 2H), 2.83 (q, 2H, J=7.5 Hz), 2.69-2.54 (m, 2H), 1.33 (t, 3H, J=7.5 Hz).
The following are non-limiting examples of compounds encompassed within Category II of the present disclosure. The intermediate nitro compounds of the following can be prepared by coupling the appropriate 4-oxo-carboxcylic acid with intermediate 3 under the conditions described herein above for the formation of intermediate 4 of scheme I.
(S)-4-(2-(4-Ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(5-methyl-4-oxohexanamido)ethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 8.59 (d, 1H, J=8.1 Hz), 7.14 (s, 4H), 7.08 (t, 1H, J=13.0 Hz), 5.40-5.35 (m, 1H), 3.37-3.27 (m, 2H), 3.04-2.97 (m, 1H), 2.83-2.61 (m, 4H), 2.54-2.36 (m, 3H), 1.33 (t, 2H, J=7.3 Hz), 1.09 (dd, 6H, J=7.0, 2.2 Hz).
(S)-4-{2-[4-(3,4-Dihydro-2H-benzo[b][1,4]dioxepin-7-yl)-4-oxobutanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 8.64 (d, 1H, J=8.4 Hz), □7.60□□d, 2H, J=10.6 Hz), 7.11 (s, 3H), 7.04 (d, 2H, J=5.5 Hz), 5.42-5.40 (m, 1H), 4.30-4.22 (m, 4H), 3.20-2.98 (m, 4H), 2.82 (q, 2H, J=7.3 Hz), 2.67-2.48 (m, 2H), 2.23 (t, 2H, J=5.5 Hz), 1.32 (t, 3H, J=7.3 Hz).
(S)-4-{2-[4-(2,3-Dimethoxyphenyl)-4-oxobutanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD), δ 8.64 (d, 1H, J=8.1 Hz), 7.21-7.11 (m, 7H), 7.02 (s, 1H), 5.42 (q, 1H, J=5.9 Hz), 3.90 (d, 3H, J=3.3 Hz), 3.88 (d, 3H, J=2.9 Hz), 3.22-3.18 (m, 2H), 3.07-2.99 (m, 2H), 2.83 (q, 2H, J=7.3 Hz), 2.63-2.54 (m, 2H), 1.34 (t, 3H, J=7.69 Hz).
(S)-4-{2-(4-Ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-[4-oxo-4-(pyridin-2-yl)butanamido]ethyl}-phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 8.60 (d, 1H, J=12.8 Hz), 7.91-7.81 (m, 2H), 7.48-7.44 (m, 1H), 7.22-7.21 (m, 1H), 6.99 (s, 3H), 6.91 (s, 1H), 5.30 (q, 1H, J=5.4 Hz), 3.36 (q, 2H, J=7.0 Hz), 3.21-3.15 (m, 1H), 2.91-2.85 (m, 1H), 2.74 (q, 2H, J=10.4 Hz), 2.57-2.50 (m, 2H), 1.20 (t, 3H, J=7.5 Hz).
(S)-4-{2-[4-(2,3-dihydrobenzo[b][1,4]dioxin-6-yl)-4-oxobutanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.52-7.47 (m, 2H), 7.11 (s, 4H), 7.03 (s, 1H), 6.95 (d, 1H, J=8.4 Hz), 5.41 (q, 1H, J=3.7 Hz), 4.31 (d, 4H, J=5.5 Hz), 3.24-3.12 (m, 2H), 3.06-2.98 (m, 2H), 2.83 (q, 2H, J=7.3 Hz), 2.62-2.53 (m, 2H), 1.33 (t, 3H, J=7.3 Hz).
(S)-4-[2-(4-tert-butoxy-4-oxobutanamido)-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl]phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD), δ 7.10 (s 4H), 7.02 (s, 1H), 5.41 (q, 1H, J=3.7 Hz), 3.30-3.25 (m, 1H), 3.06-2.99 (m, 1H), 2.83 (q, 2H, J=7.3 Hz), 2.52-2.40 (m, 4H), 1.42 (s, 9H), 1.33 (t, 3H, J=7.3 Hz).
(S)-4-[2-(4-ethoxy-4-oxobutanamido)-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl]phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 8.62 (d, 1H, J=8.4 Hz), 7.10 (s, 4H), 7.02 (s, 1H), 5.40 (q, 1H, 3.7 Hz), 4.15 (q, 2H, J=7.3 Hz), 3.28-3.25 (m, 1H), 3.05-3.02 (m, 1H), 2.82 (q, 2H, J=4.4 Hz), 2.54-2.48 (m, 2H), 1.33 (t, 3H, J=7.3 Hz), 1.24 (t, 3H, J=7.0 Hz).
The first aspect of Category VII of the present disclosure relates to 2-(thiazol-2-yl) compounds having the formula:
wherein non-limiting examples of R1, R2, and R3 are further described below in Table XIV.
The compounds encompassed within Category VII of the present disclosure can be prepared by the procedure outlined in Scheme XIII and described in Example 14 herein below.
Preparation of (S)-1-benzyl-3-[1-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl]urea (34): To a solution of 1-(S)-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl amine hydrobromide, 3, (0.360 g, 1 mmol) and Et3N (0.42 mL, 3 mmol) in 10 mL CH2Cl2 is added benzyl isocyanate (0.12 mL, 1 mmol). The mixture is stirred at room temperature for 18 hours. The product is isolated by filtration to afford 0.425 g (96% yield) of the desired product which is used without further purification.
Preparation of (S)-4-(2-(3-benzylureido)-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl)phenylsulfamic acid (35): (S)-1-benzyl-3-[1-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl]urea, 34, (0.425 g) is dissolved in MeOH (4 mL). A catalytic amount of Pd/C (10% w/w) is added and the mixture is stirred under a hydrogen atmosphere 18 hours. The reaction mixture is filtered through a bed of CELITE™ and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The crude product is dissolved in pyridine (12 mL) and treated with SO3-pyridine (0.220 g). The reaction is stirred at room temperature for 5 minutes after which a 7% solution of NH4OH is added. The mixture is then concentrated and the resulting residue is purified by reverse phase chromatography to afford 0.143 g of the desired product as the ammonium salt. 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.32-7.30 (m, 2H), 7.29-7.22 (m, 3H), 7.12-7.00 (m, 4H), 6.84 (d, 1H, J=8.1 Hz), 5.35-5.30 (m, 1H), 4.29 (s, 2H), 3.27-3.22 (m, 3H), 3.11-3.04 (m, 3H), 2.81 (q, 2H, J=10.2, 13.0 Hz), 1.31 (t, 3H, J=4.5 Hz).
The following is a non-limiting examples of compounds encompassed within the first aspect of Category VII of the present disclosure.
4-{[(S)-2-(2-Ethylthiazol-4-yl)-2-(3-(R)-methoxy-1-oxo-3-phenylpropan-2-yl)ureido]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.36-7.26 (m, 3H), 7.19-7.17 (m, 2H), 7.10-7.06 (m, 2H), 6.90-6.86 (m, 3H), 5.12-5.06 (m, 1H), 4.60-4.55 (m, 1H), 3.69 (s, 3H) 3.12-2.98 (m, 6H), 1.44-1.38 (m, 3H).
The second aspect of Category VII of the present disclosure relates to 2-(thiazol-4-yl) compounds having the formula:
wherein non-limiting examples of R1 and R4 are further described below in Table XV.
The compounds encompassed within the second aspect of Category VII of the present disclosure can be prepared by the procedure outlined in Scheme XIV and described in Example 14 below.
Preparation of 1-benzyl-3-{(S)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}urea (36): To a solution of (S)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-[(2-thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl)ethan-amine hydrobromide salt, 8, and Et3N (0.42 mL, 3 mmol) in 10 mL DCM is added benzyl isocyanate (0.12 mL, 1 mmol). The mixture is stirred at room temperature for 18 hours. The product is isolated by filtration to afford 0.445 g (96% yield) of the desired product which is used without further purification.
Preparation of 4-{(S)-2-(3-benzylureido)-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid (37): 1-Benzyl-3-{(S)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}urea, 36, (0.445 g) is dissolved in MeOH (10 mL) and CH2Cl2 (5 mL). A catalytic amount of Pd/C (10% w/w) is added and the mixture is stirred under a hydrogen atmosphere 18 hours. The reaction mixture is filtered through a bed of CELITE™ and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The crude product is dissolved in pyridine (12 mL) and treated with SO3-pyridine (0.110 g). The reaction is stirred at room temperature for 5 minutes after which a 7% solution of NH4OH is added. The mixture is then concentrated and the resulting residue is purified by reverse phase chromatography to afford 0.080 g of the desired product as the ammonium salt. 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 7.61 (d, 1H, J=2.1 Hz), 7.58 (d, 1H, J=6 Hz), 7.33-7.22 (m, 4H), 7.17-7.14 (m, 1H), 7.09-6.94 (m, 6H), 5.16 (t, 1H, J=6.6 Hz), 4.13 (s, 2H), 3.14-3.11 (m, 2H).
Category VIII of the present disclosure relates to 2-(thiazol-4-yl) compounds having the formula:
wherein R1, R4, and L are further defined herein in Table XVI herein below.
The compounds encompassed within Category VIII of the present disclosure can be prepared by the procedure outlined in Scheme XV and described in Example 16 herein below.
Preparation of (S)—N-{2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}-1-phenylmethanesulfonamide (38): To a suspension of 2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-(2-thiophene2-ylthiazol-4-yl)ethylamine, 8, (330 mg, 0.80 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (6 mL) at 0° C. is added diisopropylethylamine (0.30 mL, 1.6 mmol) followed by phenylmethanesulfonyl chloride (167 mg, 0.88 mmol). The reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for 14 hours. The mixture is diluted with CH2Cl2 and washed with sat. NaHCO3 followed by brine, dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The resulting residue is purified over silica to afford 210 mg of the desired product as a white solid.
Preparation of {4-(S)-[2-phenylmethanesulfonylamino-2-(2-thiophen-2-ylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl]phenyl}sulfamic acid (39): (S)—N-{2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}-1-phenylmethanesulfonamide, 38, (210 mg, 0.41 mmol) is dissolved in MeOH (4 mL). A catalytic amount of Pd/C (10% w/w) is added and the mixture is stirred under a hydrogen atmosphere 18 hours. The reaction mixture is filtered through a bed of CELITE™ and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The crude product is dissolved in pyridine (12 mL) and treated with SO3-pyridine (197 mg, 1.23 mmol). The reaction is stirred at room temperature for 5 minutes after which a 7% solution of NH4OH is added. The mixture is then concentrated and the resulting residue is purified by reverse phase chromatography to afford 0.060 g of the desired product as the ammonium salt. 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 7.52-7.63 (m, 6.70-7.28 (m, 11H), 4.75 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 1H), 3.95-4.09 (m, 2H), 3.20 (dd, J=13.5 and 7.8 Hz, 1H), 3.05 (dd, J=13.5 and 7.8 Hz, 1H). 1013770
Intermediates for use in Step (a) of Scheme XV can be conveniently prepared by the procedure outlined herein below in Scheme XVI and described in Example 17.
Preparation of sodium (2-methylthiazol-4-yl)methanesulfonate (40): 4-Chloromethyl-2-methylthiazole (250 mg, 1.69 mmol) is dissolved in H2O (2 mL) and treated with sodium sulfite (224 mg, 1.78 mmol). The reaction mixture is subjected to microwave irradiation for 20 minutes at 200° C. The reaction mixture is diluted with H2O (30 mL) and washed with EtOAc (2×25 mL). The aqueous layer is concentrated to afford 0.368 g of the desired product as a yellow solid. LC/MS ESI+ 194 (M+1, free acid).
Preparation of (2-methylthiazol-4-yl)methanesulfonyl chloride (41): Sodium (2-methylthiazol-4-yl)methanesulfonate, 40, (357 mg, 1.66 mmol) is dissolved in phosphorous oxychloride (6 mL) and is treated with phosphorous pentachloride (345 mg, 1.66 mmol). The reaction mixture is stirred at 50° C. for 3 hours, then allowed to cool to room temperature. The solvent is removed under reduced pressure and the residue is re-dissolved in CH2Cl2 (40 mL) and is washed with sat. NaHCO3 and brine. The organic layer is dried over MgSO4, filtered, and the solvent removed in vacuo to afford 0.095 g of the desired product as a brown oil. LC/MS ESI+ 211 (M+1). Intermediates are obtained in sufficient purity to be carried forward according to Scheme IX without the need for further purification.
4-{(S)-2-[(2-methylthiazol-4-yl)methylsulfonamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 7.71-7.66 (m, 2H), 7.27-7.10 (m, 7H), 4.87 (t, 1H, J=7.3 Hz), 4.30-4.16 (q, 2H, J=13.2 Hz), 3.34-3.13 (m, 2H), 2.70 (s, 3H).
The following are non-limiting examples of compounds encompassed within Category VIII of the present disclosure.
{4-(S)-[2-Phenylmethanesulfonylamino-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl]phenyl}-sulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 7.27-7.32 (m, 3H), 7.16-7.20 (m, 3H), 7.05-7.6 (m, 2H), 6.96 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 4.70 (t, J=9.0 Hz, 1H), 3.91-4.02 (m, 2H), 2.95-3.18 (m, 4H), 1.41 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 3H).
{4-(S)-[2-(3-Methoxyphenyl)methanesulfonylamino-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl]phenyl}sulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 7.20 t, J=8.1 Hz. 1H), 6.94-7.08 (m, 4H), 6.88-6.94 (m, 3H), 6.75-6.80 (m, 1H), 4.67 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 1H), 3.90-4.0 (m, 2H), 3.76 (s, 3H), 2.95-3.16 (m, 4H), 1.40 (t, J=7.5 HZ, 3H).
(S)-4-{[1-(2-Ethylthiazol-4-yl)-2-(4-sulfoaminophenyl)ethylsulfamoyl]methyl}-benzoic acid methyl ester: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 7.90-7.94-(m, 2H), 7.27-7.30 (m, 2H), 7.06-7.11 (m, 3H), 6.97-7.00 (m, 2H), 4.71 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 1H), 3.95-4.08 (4; 2H), 3.92 (s, 3H), 2.80-3.50 (m, 4H), 1.38-1.44 (m, 3H).
(S)-4-[2-(2-Ethylthiazol-4-yl)-2-(1-methyl-1H-imidazol-4-sulfonamido)ethyl]-phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 7.54 (s, 1H, 7.20 (s, 1H), 7.09 (s, 1H), 6.92-7.00 (m, 4H), 4.62 (t, J=5.4 Hz, 1H), 3.70 (s, 3H), 2.98-3.14 (m, 3H), 2.79 (dd, J=9.3 and 15.0 Hz, 1H), 1.39 (q, J=7.5 Hz, 3H).
4-{(S)-2-[2-(Thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]-2-(2,2,2-trifluoroethylsulfonamido)-ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 7.62-7.56 (m, 2H), 7.22 (s, 1H), 7.16-7.06 (m, 5H), 4.84 (t, 1H, J=7.6 Hz), 3.71-3.62 (m, 2H), 3.32-3.03 (m, 2H).
{4-(S)-[2-(Phenylethanesulfonylamino)-2-(2thiophen-2-ylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl]-phenyl}sulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) 7.56-7.62 (m, 2H), 7.04-7.19 (m, 9H), 6.94-6.97 (m, 2H), 4.78 (t, J=7.8 Hz, 1H), 3.22-3.30 (m, 2H)), 3.11 (dd, J=13.5 and 7.8 Hz, 1H), 2.78-2.87 (m, 4H).
{4-(S)-[3-(Phenylpropanesulfonylamino)-2-(2thiophen-2-ylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl]-phenyl}sulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 7.56-7.62 (m, 2H), 6.99-7.17 (m, 10H), 4.72 (t, J=7.8 Hz, 1H), 3.21 (dd, J=13.5 and 7.2 Hz, 1H), 3.02 (dd, J=13.5 and 7.2 Hz, 1H), 2.39-2.64 (m, 4H), 1.65-1.86 (m, 2H).
(S)-{4-[2-(4-Methyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-benzo[1,4]oxazine-7-sulfonylamino)-2-(2-thiophen-2-ylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl]phenyl}sulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) S 7.53 (d, J=5.1 Hz, 1H) 7.48 (d, J=5.1 Hz, 1H), 7.13-7.10 (m, 1H), 7.04 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 6.93-6.88 (m, 3H), 6.75 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 1H), 6.54 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 1H), 4.61 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 4.20-4.08 (m, 2H), 3.14-3.00 (m, 4H), 2.69 (s, 3H).
4-{(S)-2-(4-acetamidophenylsulfonamido)-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 7.67-7.52 (m, 6H), 7.24-7.23 (m, 1H), 7.12-7.09 (m, 3H), 7.02-6.99 (m, 2H), 4.70 (t, 1H, J=7.3 Hz), 3.25-3.00 (m, 2H), 2.24 (s, 3H).
The first aspect of Category IX of the present disclosure relates to compounds having the formula:
wherein R1 is a substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl and R4 is C1-C6 linear, branched, or cyclic alkyl as further described herein below in Table XVII.
Compounds according to the first aspect of Category IX which comprise a substituted or unsubstituted thiazol-4-yl unit for R1 can be prepared by the procedure outlined in Scheme XVII and described below in Example 18.
Preparation of (S)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-(2-phenylthiazol-4-yl)ethanamine hydrobromide salt (42): A mixture of (S)-tert-butyl 4-bromo-1-(4-nitrophenyl)-3-oxobutan-2-ylcarbamate, 7, (1.62 g, 4.17 mmol) and thiobenzamide (0.63 g, 4.60 mmol) in CH3CN (5 mL) is refluxed for 24 hours. The reaction mixture is cooled to room temperature and diethyl ether (50 mL) is added to the solution. The precipitate which forms is collected by filtration. The solid is dried under vacuum to afford 1.2 g (67% yield) of the desired product. LC/MS ESI+ 326 (M+1).
Preparation of (S)-4-(1-isothiocyanato-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl)-2-phenylthiazole (43): To a solution of (S)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-(2-phenylthiazol-4-yl)ethanamine hydrobromide salt, 42, (726 mg, 1.79 mmol) and CaCO3 (716 mg, 7.16 mmol) in H2O (2 mL) is added CCl4 (3 mL) followed by thiophosgene (0.28 mL, 3.58 mmol). The reaction is stirred at room temperature for 18 hours then diluted with CH2Cl2 and water. The layers are separated and the aqueous layer extracted with CH2Cl2. The combined organic layers are washed with brine, dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated in vacuo to a residue which is purified over silica (CH2Cl2) to afford 480 mg (73%) of the desired product as a yellow solid. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.15 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 2H), 7.97-7.99 (m, 2H), 7.43-7.50 (m, 3H), 7.34 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 2H), 7.15 (d, J=0.9 Hz, 1H), 5.40-5.95 (m, 1H), 3.60 (dd, J=13.8 and 6.0 Hz, 1H), 3.46 (dd, J=13.8 and 6.0 Hz).
Preparation of (S)-methyl 5-[1-(2-phenylthiazol-4-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)-ethylamino]thiazole-4-carboxylate (44): To a suspension of potassium tert-butoxide (89 mg, 0.75 mmol) in THF (3 mL) is added methyl isocyanoacetate (65 μL, 0.68 mmol) followed by (S)-2-phenyl-4-(1-isothiocyanato-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl)thiazole, 43, (250 mg, 0.68 mmol). The reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for 2 hours then poured into sat. NaHCO3. The mixture is extracted with EtOAc (3×25 mL) and the combined organic layers are washed with brine and dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated in vacuo. The crude residue is purified over silica to afford 323 mg (˜100% yield) of the desired product as a slightly yellow solid. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.09-8.13 (m, 2H), 7.95-7 98 (m, 3H), 7.84 (d, J=1.2 Hz, 1H), 7.44-7.50 (m, 3H), 7.28-7.31 (m, 2H), 7.96 (d, J=0.6 Hz, 1H), 4.71-4.78 (m, 1H), 3.92 (s, 3H), 3.60 (dd, J=13.8 and 6.0 Hz, 1H), 3.45 (dd, J=13.8 and 6.0 Hz, 1H).
Preparation of (S)-4-(2-(2-phenylthiazol-4-yl)2-(4-(methoxycarbonyl)thiazole-5-ylamino)ethyl)phenylsulfamic acid (45): (S)-methyl 5-[1-(2-phenylthiazol-4-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)-ethylamino]thiazole-4-carboxylate, 44, (323 mg, 0.68 mmol) and tin (II) chloride (612 mg, 2.72 mmol) are dissolved in EtOH and the solution is brought to reflux. The solvent is removed in vacuo and the resulting residue is dissolved in EtOAc. A saturated solution of NaHCO3 is added and the solution is stirred 1 hour. The organic layer is separated and the aqueous layer extracted twice with EtOAc. The combined organic layers are dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated to a residue which is dissolved in pyridine (10 mL) and treated with SO3-pyridine (130 mg, 0.82 mmol). The reaction is stirred at room temperature for 5 minutes after which a 7% solution of NH4OH is added. The mixture is then concentrated and the resulting residue is purified by reverse phase chromatography to afford 0.071 g of the desired product as the ammonium salt 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 7.97-8.00 (m, 3H), 7.48-7.52 (m, 3H), 7.22 (s, 1H), 7.03-7.13 (m, 4H), 4.74 (t, J=6.6 Hz, 1H), 3.88 (s, 3H), 3.28-3.42 (m, 2H).
Compounds according to the first aspect of Category IX which comprise a substituted or unsubstituted thiazol-2-yl unit for R1 can be prepared by the procedure outlined in Scheme XVIII and described herein below in Example 19. Intermediate 46 can be prepared according to Scheme II and Example 2 by substituting cyclopropane-carbothioic acid amide for thiophen-2-carbothioic acid amide.
Preparation of (S)-1-(1-(2-cyclopropylthiazol-4-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl)-thiourea (47): To a solution of (S)-1-(2-cyclopropylthiazol-4-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethan-amine hydrobromide hydrobromide salt, 32, (4.04 g, 10.9 mmol) and CaCO3 (2.18 g, 21.8 mmol) in CCl4/water (25 mL/20 mL) is added thiophosgene (1.5 g, 13.1 mmol). The reaction is stirred at room temperature for 18 hours then diluted with CH2Cl2 and water. The layers are separated and the aqueous layer extracted with CH2Cl2. The combined organic layers are washed with brine, dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated in vacuo to a residue which is subsequently treated with ammonia (0.5M in 1,4-dioxane, 120 mL) which is purified over silica to afford 2.90 g of the desired product as a red-brown solid. LC/MS ESI-347 (M−1).
Preparation of (S)-4-(3-methoxybenzyl)-N-(1-(2-cyclopropylthiazol-4-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl)thiazol-2-amine (48): (S)-1-(1-(2-Cyclopropylthiazol-4-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl)-thiourea, 47, (350 mg, 1.00 mmol) and 2-bromo-3′-methoxyacetophenone (253 mg, 1.10 mmol) are combined in 3 mL CH3CN and heated to reflux for 24 hours. The mixture is concentrated and chromatographed to afford 0.172 g of the product as a yellow solid. LC/MS ESI+ 479 (M+1).
Preparation of 4-{(S)-2-(2-cyclopropylthiazol-4-yl)-2-[4-(3-methoxyphenyl)-thiazol-2-ylamino]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid (49): (S)-4-(3-methoxybenzyl)-N-(1-(2-cyclopropylthiazol-4-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl)thiazol-2-amine, 48, (0.172 g) is dissolved in 10 mL MeOH. A catalytic amount of Pd/C (10% w/w) is added and the mixture is stirred under a hydrogen atmosphere for 18 hours. The reaction mixture is filtered through a bed of CELITE™ and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The crude product is dissolved in 5 mL pyridine and treated with SO3-pyridine (114 mg). The reaction is stirred at room temperature for 5 minutes after which 10 mL of a 7% solution of NH4OH is added. The mixture is then concentrated and the resulting residue is purified by reverse-phase chromatography to afford 0.033 g of the desired product as the ammonium salt. 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 7.33-7.22 (m, 3H), 7.10-6.97 (m, 5H), 6.84-6.80 (m, 2H), 5.02 (t, 1H, J=6.9 Hz), 3.82 (s, 1H), 3.18 (q, 2H, J=7.1 Hz), 2.36 (q, 1H, J=4.6 Hz), 1.20-1.13 (m, 2H), 1.04-0.99 (m, 2H).
The following are non-limiting examples of compounds encompassed within the first aspect of Category IX.
(S)-4-(2-(4-((2-Methoxy-2-oxoethyl)carbamoyl)thiazole-5-ylamino)2-(2-ethylthiazole-4-yl)ethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 7.91 (s, 1H), 7.08-7.10 (m, 3H), 6.99 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 2H), 4.58 (t, J=6.9 Hz, 1H), 4.11 (d, J=2.7 Hz, 2H), 3.78 (s, 3H), 3.14-3.28 (m, 2H), 3.06 (q, J=7.5 Hz, 2H), 1.41 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 3H).
(S)-4-(2-{5-[1-N-(2-Methoxy-2-oxoethylcarbamoyl)-1-H-indol-3-yl]oxazol-2-ylamino}-2-(2-methylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 7.63 (d, J=7.8 Hz, 1H), 7.37 (s, 1H), 7.18-7.29 (m, 4H), 7.02-7.16 (m, 4H), 6.85 (s, 1H), 5.04-5.09 (m, 1H), 4.85 (s, 3H), 3.27 (dd, J=13.5 and 8.1 Hz, 1H), 3.10 (m, J=13.5 and 8.1 Hz, 1H), 2.69 (s, 3H).
4-((S)-2-(5-(2-Methoxyphenyl)oxazol-2-ylamino)-2-(2-methylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 7.52 (dd, J=7.5 and 1.2 Hz, 1H), 6.95-7.24 (m, 10H), 5.04-5.09 (m, 1H), 3.92 (s, 3H), 3.26 (dd, J=13.8 and 8.4 Hz, 1H), 3.10 (dd, J=13.8 and 8.4 Hz, 1H), 2.72 (s, 3H).
4-((S)-2-(5-((S)-1-(tert-Butoxycarbonyl)-2-phenylethyl)oxazole-2-ylamino)-2-(2-methylthiazole-4-yl)ethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 7.03-7.27 (m, 10H), 6.50 (s, 1H), 4.95-5.00 (m, 1H), 4.76 (t, J=6.9 Hz, 1H), 3.22 (dd, J=14.1 and 6.9 Hz, 1H), 3.00-3.10 (m, 2H), 2.90 (dd, J=14.1 and 6.9 Hz, 1H), 2.72 (s, 3H), 1.37 (s, 9H).
(S)-{4-{2-[5-(4-Methoxycarbonyl)phenyl]oxazol-2-ylamino}-2-(2-methylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 7.99 (d, J=7.5 Hz, 2H), 7.56-7.59 (m, 2H), 7.23-7.24 (m, 1H), 7.08-7.14 (m, 4H), 6.83 (d, J=10.2 Hz, 1H), 5.08 (t, J=6.0 Hz, 1H), 3.91 (s, 3H), 3.25-3.35 (m, 1H), 3.09-3.13 (m, 1H), 2.73 (s, 3H).
(S)-4-(2-(5-(3-Methoxybenzyl)oxazole-2-ylamino)-2-(2-methylthiazole-4-yl)ethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 7.03-7.28 (m, 8H), 6.79-6.83 (m, 1H), 5.70 (s, 1H), 4.99-5.06 (m, 2H), 4.41 (d, J=2.1 Hz, 2H), 3.80 (s, 3H), 3.27-3.37 (m, 1H), 3.03-3.15 (m, 1H), 2.71 (s, 3H).
(S)-4-(2-(2-Methylthiazole-4-yl)-2-(5-phenyloxazole-2-ylamino)ethyl)phenyl-sulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 7.45 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 2H), 7.33 (t, J=7.8 Hz, 2H), 7.18-7.22 (m, 1H), 7.10-7.14 (m, 6H), 7.04 (s, 1H), 5.04-5.09 (m, 1H), 3.26 (dd, J=13.8 and 6.3 Hz, 1H), 3.10 (dd, J=13.8 and 6.3 Hz, 1H), 2.70 (s, 3H).
4-((S)-2-(2-Cyclopropylthiazol-4-yl)-2-(4-(3-methoxyphenyl)thiazol-2-ylamino)-ethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 7.33-7.22 (m, 3H), 7.10-6.97 (m, 5H), 6.84-6.80 (m, 2H), 5.02 (t, 1H, J=6.9 Hz), 3.82 (s, 1H), 3.18 (q, 2H, J=7.1 Hz), 2.36 (q, 1H, J=4.6 Hz), 1.20-1.13 (m, 2H), 1.04-0.99 (m, 2H).
(S)-4-(2-(2-cyclopropylthiazol-4-yl)-2-(4-(4-fluorophenyl)thiazol-2-ylamino)ethyl)-phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 7.79-7.74 (m, 2H), 7.14-7.03 (m, 7H), 7.21 (s, 1H), 6.79 (s, 1H), 5.08 (t, 1H, J=6.6 Hz), 3.29-3.12 (m, 2H), 2.40 (q, 2.40, J=5.1 Hz), 1.23-1.18 (m, 2H), 1.08-1.02 (m, 2H).
4-((S)-2-(2-cyclopropylthiazol-4-yl)-2-(4-(2-methoxyphenyl)thiazol-2-ylamino)-ethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 7.89-7.87 (d, 1H, J=7.6 Hz), 7.28 (t, 1H, J=7.0 Hz), 7.10-6.96 (m, 8H), 5.03 (t, 1H, J=6.9 Hz), 3.90 (s, 1H), 3.19 (q, 2H, J=6.6 Hz), 2.38 (q, 1H, J=4.8 Hz), 1.21-1.14 (m, 2H), 1.06-1.00 (m, 2H).
4-((S)-2-(2-cyclopropylthiazol-4-yl)-2-(4-(2,4-difluorophenyl)thiazol-2-ylamino)-ethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 8.06-8.02 (q, 2H, J=6.9 Hz), 7.12-6.95 (m, 7H), 6.88 (s, 1H), 5.11 (t, 1H, J=6.9 Hz), 3.22-3.15 (m, 2H), 2.38 (q, 1H, J=4.8 Hz), 1.22-1.15 (m, 2H), 1.06-1.02 (m, 2H).
(S)-4-(2-(4-(3-methoxybenzyl)thiazol-2-ylamino)-2-(2-cyclopropylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 7.22-7.17 (m, 3H), 7.09-6.97 (m, 5H), 6.78-6.66 (m, 3H), 3.77 (s, 2H), 3.75 (s, 3H), 3.20-3.07 (m, 2H), 2.35 (q, 1H, J=4.8 Hz), 1.19-1.13 (m, 2H), 1.03-1.00 (m, 2H).
(S)-{5-[1-(2-Ethylthiazol-4-yl)-2-(4-sulfoaminophenyl)ethylamino]-2-methyl-2H-[1,2,4]triazole-3-yl}carbamic acid methyl ester: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 6.97-7.08 (m, 5H), 3.71 (s, 3H), 3.51 (s, 3H), 3.15 (dd, J=13.5 and 6.3 Hz, 1H), 3.02-3.07 (m, 3H), 1.40 (t, J=6.6 Hz, 3H).
The second aspect of Category IX of the present disclosure relates to compounds having the formula:
wherein R1 is a substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl and R4 is substituted or unsubstituted phenyl and substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl as further described below in Table XVIII.
Compounds according to the second aspect of Category IX which comprise a substituted or unsubstituted thiazol-4-yl unit for R1 can be prepared by the procedure outlined in Schemes XIX, XX, and XXI, and described below in Examples 20, 21, and 22.
Preparation of [3-diazo-1-(4-nitrobenzyl)-2-oxo-propyl]-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester (50): To a 0° C. solution of 2-(S)-tert-butoxycarbonylamino-3-(4-nitrophenyl)-propionic acid (1.20 g, 4.0 mmol) in THF (20 mL) is added dropwise triethylamine (0.61 mL, 4.4 mmol) followed by iso-butyl chloroformate (0.57 mL, 4.4 mmol). The reaction mixture is stirred at 0° C. for 20 minutes then filtered. The filtrate is treated with an ether solution of diazomethane (˜16 mmol) at 0° C. The reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for 3 hours and concentrated. The residue is dissolved in EtOAc and washed successively with water and brine, dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The resulting residue is purified over silica (hexane/EtOAc 2:1) to afford 1.1 g (82% yield) of the desired product as a slightly yellow solid. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.16 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 2H), 7.39 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 2H), 5.39 (s, 1H), 5.16 (d, J=6.3 Hz, 1H), 4.49 (s, 1H), 3.25 (dd, J=13.8 and 6.6, 1H), 3.06 (dd, J=13.5 and 6.9 Hz, 1H), 1.41 (s, 9H).
Preparation of [3-bromo-1-(4-nitro-benzyl)-2-oxo-propyl]-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester (51): To a 0° C. solution of [3-diazo-1-(4-nitrobenzyl)-2-oxo-propyl]carbamic acid tert-butyl ester, 50, (0.350 g, 1.04 mmol) in THF (5 mL) is added dropwise 48% aq. HBr (0.14 mL, 1.25 mmol). The reaction mixture is stirred at 0° C. for 1.5 hours and quenched at 0° C. with saturated aqueous Na2CO3. The mixture is extracted with EtOAc (3×25 mL) and the combined organic extracts are washed with brine, dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford 0.400 g of the desired product that is used in the next step without further purification. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.20 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 7.39 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 5.06 (d, J=7.8 Hz, 1H), 4.80 (q, J=6.3 Hz, 1H), 4.04 (s, 2H), 1.42 (s, 9H).
Preparation of (S)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-(2-phenylthiazol-4-yl)ethanamine hydrobromide salt (52): A mixture of [3-bromo-1-(4-nitro-benzyl)-2-oxo-propyl]-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester, 51, (1.62 g, 4.17 mmol) and benzothioamide (0.630 g, 4.59 mmol), in CH3CN (5 mL) is refluxed for 24 hours. The reaction mixture is cooled to room temperature and diethyl ether (50 mL) is added to the solution and the precipitate that forms is collected by filtration. The solid is dried under vacuum to afford 1.059 g (63%) of the desired product. ESI+MS 326 (M+1).
Preparation of (S)-4-[1-isothiocyanato-2-(4-nitrophenyl)-ethyl]-2-phenylthiazole (53): To a solution of (S)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-(2-phenylthiazol-4-yl)ethanamine hydrobromide salt, 52, (2.03 g, 5 mmol) and CaCO3 (1 g, 10 mmol) in CCl4/water (10:7.5 mL) is added thiophosgene (0.46 mL, 6 mmol). The reaction is stirred at room temperature for 18 hours then diluted with CH2Cl2 and water. The layers are separated and the aqueous layer extracted with CH2Cl2. The combined organic layers are washed with brine, dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated in vacuo to a residue that is purified over silica (CH2Cl2) to afford 1.71 g (93% yield) of the desired product. ESI+ MS 368 (M+1).
Preparation of (S)-5-methyl-N-[2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-(2-phenylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl]-1,3,4-thiadiazol-2-amine (54): A solution of (S)-4-[1-isothiocyanato-2-(4-nitrophenyl)-ethyl]-2-phenylthiazole, 53, (332 mg, 0.876 mmol) and acetic hydrazide (65 mg, 0.876 mmol) in EtOH (5 mL) is refluxed for 2 hours. The solvent is removed under reduced pressure, the residue is dissolved in POCl3 (3 mL) and the resulting solution is stirred at room temperature for 18 hours after which the solution is heated to 50° C. for 2 hours. The solvent is removed in vacuo and the residue is dissolved in EtOAc (40 mL) and the resulting solution is treated with 1N NaOH until the pH remains approximately 8. The solution is extracted with EtOAc. The combined aqueous layers are washed with EtOAc, the organic layers combined, washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to afford 0.345 g (93% yield) of the desired product as a yellow solid. 1H NMR (CDCl3) 8.09 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 7.91 (m, 2H), 7.46 (m, 4H), 7.44 (s, 1H), 5.23 (m, 1H), 3.59 (m, 2H), 2.49 (s, 3H). ESI+ MS 424 (M+1).
Preparation of (S)-4-[2-(5-methyl-1,3,4-thiadiazol-2-ylamino)-2-(2-phenylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl]phenylsulfamic acid (55): (S)-5-Methyl-N-[2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-(2-phenylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl]-1,3,4-thiadiazol-2-amine, 54, (0.404 g, 0.954 mmol) is dissolved in MeOH (5 mL). Pd/C (50 mg, 10% w/w) is added and the mixture is stirred under a hydrogen atmosphere until the reaction is judged to be complete. The reaction mixture is filtered through a bed of CELITE™ and the solvent removed under reduced pressure. The crude product is dissolved in pyridine (4 mL) and treated with SO3-pyridine (0.304 g, 1.91 mmol). The reaction is stirred at room temperature for 5 minutes after which a 7% solution of NH4OH (50 mL) is added. The mixture is then concentrated and the resulting residue is purified by reverse phase preparative HPLC to afford 0.052 g (11% yield) of the desired product as the ammonium salt. 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 8.00-7.97 (m, 2H), 7.51-7.47 (m, 3H), 7.23 (s, 1H), 7.11-7.04 (q, 4H, J=9.0 Hz), 5.18 (t, 1H, J=7.2 Hz), 3.34-3.22 (m, 2H), 2.50 (s, 3H). ESI− MS 472 (M−1).
Preparation of (S)-1-[1-(thiophen-2-ylthiazol-4-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl]-thiourea (56): To a solution of (S)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-(thiophen-2-ylthiazol-4-yl)ethanamine hydrobromide salt, 8, (1.23 g, 2.98 mmol) and CaCO3 (0.597 g, 5.96 mmol) in CCl4/water (10 mL/5 mL) is added thiophosgene (0.412 g, 3.58 mmol). The reaction is stirred at room temperature for 18 hours then diluted with CH2Cl2 and water. The layers are separated and the aqueous layer extracted with CH2Cl2. The combined organic layers are washed with brine, dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated in vacuo to a residue which is subsequently treated with ammonia (0.5M in 1,4-dioxane, 29.4 mL, 14.7 mmol) which is purified over silica to afford 0.490 g of the desired product as a red-brown solid. ESI+ MS 399 (M+1).
Preparation of 4-(2-methoxyphenyl)-N-{(S)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}thiazol-2-amine (57): (S)-1-[1-(thiophen-2-ylthiazol-4-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl]-thiourea, 56, (265 mg, 0.679 mmol) is treated with bromo-2′-methoxyacetophenone (171 mg, 0.746 mmol) to afford 0.221 g of the product as a yellow solid. ESI+ MS 521 (M+1).
Preparation on 4-{(S)-2-[4-(2-methoxyphenyl)thiazol-2-ylamino)-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid (58): 4-(2-methoxyphenyl)-N-{(S)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}thiazol-2-amine, 57, (0.229 g) is dissolved in 12 mL MeOH. A catalytic amount of Pd/C (10% w/w) is added and the mixture is stirred under a hydrogen atmosphere for 18 hours. The reaction mixture is filtered through a bed of CELITE™ and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The crude product is dissolved in 6 mL pyridine and treated with SO3-pyridine (140 mg). The reaction is stirred at room temperature for 5 minutes after which 10 mL of a 7% solution of NH4OH is added. The mixture is then concentrated and the resulting residue is purified by reverse-phase chromatography to afford 0.033 g of the desired product as the ammonium salt. 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 7.96-7.93 (m, 1H), 7.60-7.55 (m, 2H), 7.29-7.23 (m, 1H), 7.18-6.95 (m, 9H), 5.15 (t, 1H, J=6.9 Hz), 3.90 (s, 3H), 3.35-3.24 (m, 2H).
Compounds according to the second aspect of Category IX which comprise a substituted or unsubstituted oxazol-2-yl unit for R1 can be prepared by the procedure outlined in Scheme XXI and described herein below in Example 22. Intermediate 39 can be prepared according to Scheme XVII and Example 18.
Preparation of [5-(3-methoxyphenyl)oxazol-2-yl]-[2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-(2-phenylthiazole-4-yl)ethyl]amine (60): A mixture of (S)-4-(isothiocyanato-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl)-2-phenylthiazole, 53, (300 mg, 0.81 mmol), 1-azido-1-(3-methoxyphenyl)ethanone (382 mg, 2.0 mmol) and PPh3 (0.8 g, polymer bound, ˜3 mmol/g) in dioxane (6 mL) is heated at 90° C. for 20 minutes. The reaction solution is cooled to room temperature and the solvent removed in vacuo and the resulting residue is purified over silica to afford 300 mg (74% yield) of the desired product as a yellow solid. 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 8.02 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 7.92-7.99 (m, 2H), 7.42-7.47 (m, 3H), 7.22-7.27 (m, 3H), 6.69-7.03 (m, 4H), 6.75-6.78 (m, 1H), 5.26 (t, J=6.3 Hz, 1H), 3.83 (s, 4H), 3.42-3.45 (m, 2H).
Preparation of 4-{(S)-2-[5-(3-methoxyphenyl)oxazole-2-ylamino]-2-(2-phenylthiazole-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid (61): [5-(3-methoxyphenyl)oxazol-2-yl]-[2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-(2-phenylthiazole-4-yl)ethyl]amine, 60, (300 mg, 0.60 mmol) is dissolved in MeOH (15 mL). A catalytic amount of Pd/C (10% w/w) is added and the mixture is stirred under a hydrogen atmosphere 18 hours. The reaction mixture is filtered through a bed of CELITE™ and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The crude product is dissolved in pyridine (10 mL) and treated with SO3-pyridine (190 mg, 1.2 mmol). The reaction is stirred at room temperature for 5 minutes after which a 7% solution of NH4OH is added. The mixture is then concentrated and the resulting residue is purified by reverse-phase chromatography to afford 0.042 g of the desired product as the ammonium salt. 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 7.99 d, J=7.5 Hz, 2H), 7.46-7.50 (m, 3H), 7.23-7.29 (m, 3H), 7.04-7.12 (m, 6H), 6.78 (dd, J=8.4 and 2.4 Hz, 1H), 5.16 (t, J=6.6 Hz, 1H), 3.81 (s, 3H), 3.29-3.39 (m, 1H), 3.17 (dd, J=13.8 and 8.1 Hz, 1H).
The following are non-limiting examples of the second aspect of Category IX of the present disclosure.
(S)-4-(2-(5-Phenyl-1,3,4-thiadiazol-2-ylamino)-2-(2-phenylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl)-phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 7.97-7.94 (m, 2H), 7.73-7.70 (m, 2H), 7.44-7.39 (m, 6H), 7.25 (s, 1H), 7.12 (s, 4H), 5.29 (t, 1H, J=6.9 Hz), 3.35-3.26 (m, 2H).
4-((S)-2-(5-Propyl-1,3,4-thiadiazol-2-ylamino)-2-(2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl)ethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 7.59-7.54 (m, 2H), 7.17-7.03 (m, 6H), 5.13 (t, 1H, J=7.2 Hz), 3.32-3.13 (m, 2H), 2.81 (t, 2H, J=7.4 Hz), 1.76-1.63 (h, 6H, J=7.4 Hz), 0.97 (t, 3H, J=7.3 Hz).
4-((S)-2-(5-Benzyl-1,3,4-thiadiazol-2-ylamino)-2-(2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl)ethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ (m, 2H), 7.49-7.45 (m, 2H), 7.26-7.16 (m, 5H), 7.05-6.94 (m, 6H), 5.04 (t, 1H, J=7.1 Hz), 4.07 (s, 2H), 3.22-3.04 (m, 2H).
4-((S)-2-(5-(Naphthalen-1-ylmethyl)-1,3,4-thiadiazol-2-ylamino)-2-(2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl)ethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 8.08-8.05 (m, 1H), 7.89-7.80 (m, 2H), 7.55-7.43 (m, 6H), 7.11-7.00 (m, 6H), 5.08 (t, 1H, J=7.1 Hz), 4.63 (s, 2H), 3.26-3.08 (m, 2H).
4-((S)-2-(5-((Methoxycarbonyl)methyl)-1,3,4-thiadiazol-2-ylamino)-2-(2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl)ethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 7.48-7.44 (m, 2H), 7.03-6.92 (m, 6H), 5.02 (t, 1H, J=7.2 Hz), 4.30 (s, 2H), 3.55 (s, 3H), 3.22-3.02 (m, 2H).
4-((S)-2-(5-((2-Methylthiazol-4-yl)methyl)-1,3,4-thiadiazol-2-ylamino)-2-(2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl)ethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 7.60-7.56 (m, 2H), 7.19 (s, 1H), 7.15-7.12 (m, 2H), 7.09-7.03 (q, 4H, J=8.7 Hz), 5.14 (t, 1H, J=7.2 Hz), 4.28 (s, 2H), 3.33-3.14 (m, 2H), 2.67 (s, 3H).
4-{(S)-2-[4-(2,4-Difluorophenyl)thiazol-2-ylamino]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 8.06-8.02 (q, 1H, J=6.8 Hz), 7.59-7.54 (m, 2H), 7.16-7.08 (m, 6H), 7.01-6.88 (m, 4H), 5.20 (t, 1H, J=7.0 Hz), 3.36-3.17 (m, 2H):
(S)-4-{2-[4-(Ethoxycarbonyl)thiazol-2-ylamino]-2-(2-phenylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 8.02-7.99 (m, 2H), 7.54-7.45 (m, 4H), 7.26 (s, 1H), 7.08 (s, 4H), 5.26 (t, 1H, J=6.9 Hz), 4.35-4.28 (q, 2H, J=6.9 Hz), 3.38-3.18 (m, 2H), 1.36 (t, 3H, J=7.2 Hz).
(S)-4-{2-[4-(2-Ethoxy-2-oxoethyl)thiazol-2-ylamino]-2-(2-phenylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 7.96 (m, 2H), 7.50-7.46 (m, 3H), 7.21 (s, 1H), 7.10-7.04 (m, 4H), 6.37 (s, 1H), 5.09 (t, 1H, J=6.9 Hz), 4.17-4.10 (q, 2H, J=7.1 Hz), 3.54 (s, 2H), 3.35-3.14 (m, 2H), 1.22 (t, 3H, J=7.1 Hz).
(S)-4-{2-[4-(4-acetamidophenyl)thiazol-2-ylamino]-2-(2-phenylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 8.11 (m, 2H), 7.82-7.80 (m, 2H), 7.71-7.61 (m, 6H), 7.40 (s, 1H), 7.23 (s, 4H), 5.32 (t, 1H, J=7.0 Hz), 3.51-3.35 (m, 2H), 2.28 (s, 3H).
(S)-4-[2-(4-phenylthiazol-2-ylamino)-2-(2-phenylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl]phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 8.03-7.99 (m, 2H), 7.75-7.72 (d, 2H, J=8.4 Hz), 7.53-7.48 (m, 3H), 7.42 (m, 4H), 7.12 (s, 4H), 6.86 (s, 1H), 5.23 (t, 1H, J=7.2 Hz), 3.40-3.27 (m, 2H).
(S)-4-{2-[4-(4-(methoxycarbonyl)phenyl)thiazol-2-ylamino]-2-(2-phenylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 8.04-8.00 (m, 4H), 7.92-7.89 (d, 2H, J=9.0 Hz), 7.53-7.49 (m, 3H), 7.30 (s, 1H), 7.15 (s, 4H), 7.05 (s, 1H), 5.28 (t, 1H, J=6.9 Hz), 3.93 (s, 3H), 3.35-3.24 (m, 2H).
4-{(S)-2-[4-(Ethoxycarbonyl)thiazol-2-ylamino]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 7.43-7.38 (m, 2H), 7.26 (s, 1H), 7.00-6.94 (m, 3H), 6.89 (s, 4H), 5.02 (t, 1H, J=7.0 Hz), 4.16-4.09 (q, 2H, J=7.1 Hz), 3.14-2.94 (m, 2H), 1.17 (t, 3H, J=7.1 Hz).
(S)-4-[2-(4-(Methoxycarbonyl)thiazol-5-ylamino)-2-(2-phenylthiazole-4-yl)ethyl]phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 7.97-8.00 (m, 3H), 7.48-7.52 (m, 3H), 7.22 (s, 1H), 7.03-7.13 (m, 4H), 4.74 (t, J=6.6 Hz, 1H), 3.88 (s, 3H), 3.28-3.42 (m, 2H).
(S)-4-[2-(5-Phenyloxazol-2-ylamino)-2-(2-phenylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl]-phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 7.94-7.96 (m, 2H), 7.45-7.49 (m, 5H), 7.32 (t, J=7.8 Hz, 2H), 7.12 (s, 1H), 7.19 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 1H), 7.12 (s, 4H), 7.05 (s, 1H), 5.15 (t, J=6.4 Hz, 1H), 3.34 (dd, J=14.1 and 8.4 Hz, 1H), 3.18 (dd, J=14.1 and 8.4 Hz, 1H).
(S)-4-{2-[5-(4-Acetamidophenyl)oxazol-2-ylamino]-2-(2-phenylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 7.92-7.94 (m, 2H), 7.55-7.58 (m, 2H), 7.39-7.50 (m, 5H), 7.26 (s, 1H), 7.12 (s, 4H), 7.02 (s, 1H0), 5.14 (t, J=7.8 Hz, 1H), 3.13-3.38 (m, 2H), 2.11 (s, 3H).
4-((S)-2-(5-(2,4-Difluorophenyl)oxazole-2-ylamino)-2-(2-phenylthiazole-4-yl)ethyl)phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 7.97-7.99 (m, 2H), 7.54-7.62 (m, 1H), 7.45-7.50 (m, 3H), 7.28 (s, 1H), 7.12 (s, 4H), 6.97-7.06 (m, 3H), 5.15-5.20 (m, 1H), 3.28-3.40 (m, 1H), 3.20 (dd, J=13.8 and 8.4 Hz, 1H).
4-{(S)-2-[5-(3-Methoxyphenyl)oxazol-2-ylamino]-2-[(2-thiophen-2-yl)thiazole-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 7.55-7.60 (m, 2H), 7.26 (t, J=8.1 Hz, 1H), 7.21 (s, 1H), 7.04-7.15 (m, 8H), 6.77-6.81 (m, 1H), 5.10 (t, J=6.3 Hz, 1H), 3.81 (s, 3H), 3.29-3.36 (m, 1H), 3.15 (dd, J=14.1 and 8.4 Hz, 1H).
(S)-4-[2-(4,6-Dimethylpyrimidin-2-ylamino)-2-(2-methylthiazole-4-yl)ethyl]phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 7.00-7.10 (m, 5H), 6.44 (s, 1H), 5.50 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 1H), 3.04-3.22 (m, 2H), 2.73 (s, 3H), 2.27 (s, 6H).
(S)-4-[2-(4-Hydroxy-6-methylpyrimidine-2-ylamino)-2-(2-methylthiazole-4-yl)ethyl]phenylsulfamic acid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, MeOH-d4) δ 7.44 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 6.97-7.10 (m, 4H), 5.61 (s, 1H), 5.40-5.49 (m, 1H), 3.10-3.22 (m, 2H), 2.73 (s, 3H), 2.13 (s, 3H).
The first aspect of Category X of the present disclosure relates to compounds having the formula:
wherein R1 is heteroaryl and R4 is further described below in Table XIX.
Compounds according to the first aspect of Category X can be prepared by the procedure outlined in Scheme XXII and described below in Example 23.
Preparation of (S)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-[(thiophen-2-yl)oxazol-4-yl]ethanamine hydrobromide salt (62): A mixture of (S)-tert-butyl 4-bromo-1-(4-nitrophenyl)-3-oxobutan-2-ylcarbamate, 7, (38.7 g, 100 mmol), and thiophen-2-carboxamide (14 g, 110 mmol) (available from Alfa Aesar) in CH3CN (500 mL) is refluxed for 5 hours. The reaction mixture is cooled to room temperature and diethyl ether (200 mL) is added to the solution. The precipitate which forms is collected by filtration. The solid is dried under vacuum to afford the desired product which can be used for the next step without purification.
Preparation of 2-(3-chlorophenyl)-N-{(S)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)oxazol-4-yl]ethyl}acetamide (63): To a solution of (S)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-[(thiophen-2-yl)oxazol-4-yl]ethanamine HBr, 47, (3.15 g, 10 mmol) 3-chlorophenyl-acetic acid (1.70 g, 10 mmol) and 1-hydroxybenzotriazole (HOBt) (0.70 g, 5.0 mmol) in DMF (50 mL) at 0° C., is added 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide (EDCI) (1.90 g, 10 mmol) followed by triethylamine (4.2 mL, 30 mmol). The mixture is stirred at 0° C. for 30 minutes then at room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture is diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic phase is washed with 1 N aqueous HCl, 5% aqueous NaHCO3, water and brine, and dried over Na2SO4. The solvent is removed in vacuo to afford the desired product which is used without further purification.
Preparation of -((S)-2-(2-(3-chlorophenyl)acetamido)-2-(2-(thiophen-2-yl)oxazol-4-yl)ethyl)phenylsulfamic acid (64): 2-(3-chlorophenyl)-N-{(S)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)oxazol-4-yl]ethyl}acetamide, 63, (3 g) is dissolved in MeOH (4 mL). A catalytic amount of Pd/C (10% w/w) is added and the mixture is stirred under a hydrogen atmosphere 18 hours. The reaction mixture is filtered through a bed of CELITE™ and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The crude product is dissolved in pyridine (12 mL) and treated with SO3-pyridine (0.157 g). The reaction is stirred at room temperature for 5 minutes after which a 7% solution of NH4OH is added. The mixture is then concentrated and the resulting residue can be purified by reverse phase chromatography to afford the desired product as the ammonium salt.
The second aspect of Category X of the present disclosure relates to compounds having the formula:
wherein R1 is aryl and R2 and R3 are further described herein below in Table XX.
Compounds according to the second aspect of Category X can be prepared by the procedure outlined in Scheme XXIII and described below in Example 24.
Preparation of (S)-1-(4-ethyloxazol-2-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethanamine (65): A mixture of [1-(S)-carbamoyl-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester, 1, (10 g, 32.3 mmol) and 1-bromo-2-butanone (90%, 4.1 mL, 36 mmol) in CH3CN (500 mL) is refluxed for 18 hours. The reaction mixture is cooled to room temperature and diethyl ether is added to the solution and the precipitate which forms is removed by filtration and is used without further purification.
Preparation of N-[1-(4-ethyloxazol-2-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl]-2-phenyl-acetamide (66): To a solution of (S)-1-(4-ethyloxazol-2-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethanamine, 65, (2.9 g, 11 mmol), phenylacetic acid (1.90 g, 14 mmol) and 1-hydroxybenzotriazole (HOBt) (0.94 g, 7.0 mmol) in DMF (100 mL) at 0° C., is added 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide (EDCI) (2.68 g, 14 mmol) followed by triethylamine (6.0 mL, 42 mmol). The mixture is stirred at 0° C. for 30 minutes then at room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture is diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic phase is washed with 1 N aqueous HCl, 5% aqueous NaHCO3, water and brine, and dried over Na2SO4. The solvent is removed in vacuo to afford the desired product which is used without further purification.
Preparation of {4-[2-(S)-(4-ethyloxazol-2-yl)-2-phenylacetylaminoethyl]-phenyl}sulfamic acid (67): N-[1-(4-ethyloxazol-2-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl]-2-phenyl-acetamide, 66, (0.260 g) is dissolved in MeOH (4 mL). A catalytic amount of Pd/C (10% w/w) is added and the mixture is stirred under a hydrogen atmosphere 18 hours. The reaction mixture is filtered through a bed of CELITE™ and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The crude product is dissolved in pyridine (12 mL) and treated with SO3-pyridine (0.177 g, 1.23). The reaction is stirred at room temperature for 5 minutes after which a 7% solution of NH4OH (10 mL) is added. The mixture is then concentrated and the resulting residue is purified by reverse phase chromatography to afford the desired product as the ammonium salt.
Non-limiting examples of the HPTP-β IC50 μM) activity for illustrative compounds are listed in Table XXI. HPTP-β inhibition can be tested by any method chosen by the formulator, for example, Amarasinge K. K. et al., “Design and Synthesis of Potent, Non-peptidic Inhibitors of HPTPbeta” Bioorg Med Chem. Lett. 2006 Aug. 15; 16(16):4252-6. Epub 2006 Jun. 12. Erratum in: Bioorg Med Chem. Lett. 2008 Aug. 15; 18(16):4745. Evidokimov, Artem G [corrected to Evdokimov, Artem G]: PMID: 16759857; and Klopfenstein S. R. et al. “1,2,3,4-Tetrahydroisoquinolinyl Sulfamic Acids as Phosphatase PTP1B Inhibitors” Bioorg Med Chem. Lett. 2006 Mar. 15; 16(6):1574-8, both of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
Non-limiting examples of compounds of the invention include:
The invention provides the use of pharmaceutically-acceptable salts of any compound described herein. Pharmaceutically-acceptable salts include, for example, acid-addition salts and base-addition salts. The acid that is added to the compound to form an acid-addition salt can be an organic acid or an inorganic acid. A base that is added to the compound to form a base-addition salt can be an organic base or an inorganic base. In some embodiments, a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt is a metal salt. In some embodiments, a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt is an ammonium salt.
Metal salts can arise from the addition of an inorganic base to a compound of the invention. The inorganic base consists of a metal cation paired with a basic counterion, such as, for example, hydroxide, carbonate, bicarbonate, or phosphate. The metal can be an alkali metal, alkaline earth metal, transition metal, or main group metal. In some embodiments, the metal is lithium, sodium, potassium, cesium, cerium, magnesium, manganese, iron, calcium, strontium, cobalt, titanium, aluminum, copper, cadmium, or zinc.
In some embodiments, a metal salt is a lithium salt, a sodium salt, a potassium salt, a cesium salt, a cerium salt, a magnesium salt, a manganese salt, an iron salt, a calcium salt, a strontium salt, a cobalt salt, a titanium salt, an aluminum salt, a copper salt, a cadmium salt, or a zinc salt.
Ammonium salts can arise from the addition of ammonia or an organic amine to a compound of the invention. In some embodiments, the organic amine is triethyl amine, diisopropyl amine, ethanol amine, diethanol amine, triethanol amine, morpholine, N-methylmorpholine, piperidine, N-methylpiperidine, N-ethylpiperidine, dibenzylamine, piperazine, pyridine, pyrrazole, pipyrrazole, imidazole, pyrazine, or pipyrazine.
In some embodiments, an ammonium salt is a triethyl amine salt, a diisopropyl amine salt, an ethanol amine salt, a diethanol amine salt, a triethanol amine salt, a morpholine salt, an N-methylmorpholine salt, a piperidine salt, an N-methylpiperidine salt, an N-ethylpiperidine salt, a dibenzylamine salt, a piperazine salt, a pyridine salt, a pyrrazole salt, a pipyrrazole salt, an imidazole salt, a pyrazine salt, or a pipyrazine salt.
Acid addition salts can arise from the addition of an acid to a compound of the invention. In some embodiments, the acid is organic. In some embodiments, the acid is inorganic. In some embodiments, the acid is hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, hydroiodic acid, nitric acid, nitrous acid, sulfuric acid, sulfurous acid, a phosphoric acid, isonicotinic acid, lactic acid, salicylic acid, tartaric acid, ascorbic acid, gentisinic acid, gluconic acid, glucaronic acid, saccaric acid, formic acid, benzoic acid, glutamic acid, pantothenic acid, acetic acid, propionic acid, butyric acid, fumaric acid, succinic acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, p-toluenesulfonic acid, citric acid, oxalic acid, or maleic acid.
In some embodiments, the salt is a hydrochloride salt, a hydrobromide salt, a hydroiodide salt, a nitrate salt, a nitrite salt, a sulfate salt, a sulfite salt, a phosphate salt, isonicotinate salt, a lactate salt, a salicylate salt, a tartrate salt, an ascorbate salt, a gentisinate salt, a gluconate salt, a glucaronate salt, a saccarate salt, a formate salt, a benzoate salt, a glutamate salt, a pantothenate salt, an acetate salt, a propionate salt, a butyrate salt, a fumarate salt, a succinate salt, a methanesulfonate salt, an ethanesulfonate salt, a benzenesulfonate salt, a p-toluenesulfonate salt, a citrate salt, an oxalate salt, or a maleate salt.
Compounds of the invention can be co-formulated or co-administered with antibodies, for example, anti-VEGF agents. Non-limiting examples of such antibodies include ranibizumab, bevacizumab, and aflibercept.
An antibody can comprise a heavy chain and a light chain. In some embodiments, the heavy chain comprises SEQ ID NO:1:
In some embodiments, the heavy chain is SEQ ID NO:1.
In some embodiments, the light chain comprises SEQ ID NO:2:
In some embodiments, the Igith chain is SEQ ID NO:2.
An antibody used herein can comprise one or both of SEQ ID NOs: 1 and 2. An antibody used herein can consist of one or both of SEQ ID NOs: 1 and 2.
Disclosed are compositions and formulations for administration to a subject having one or more conditions, for example, one of the ocular diseases or ocular conditions as described herein. The compositions can comprise, for example:
The disclosed compositions can comprise from about 0.1 mg/mL to about 100 mg/mL of a compound herein.
The disclosed solubilizing systems can comprise one or more pharmaceutically acceptable agents, which alone or in combination solubilize a compound herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
A non-limiting example of a solubilizing agent includes an organic solvent. Non-limiting examples of organic solvents includes: alcohols, for example, C1-C4 linear alkyl, C3-C4 branched alkyl, for example, ethanol, glycerin, 2-hydroxypropanol, propylene glycol, maltitol, sorbitol, xylitol and the like; substituted or unsubstituted C6 or C10 aryl; substituted or unsubstituted C7 or C14 alkylenearyl, for example, benzyl alcohol.
A further non-limiting example of a solubilizing agent relates to cyclodextrins: β-cyclodextrin, β-cyclodextrin and β-cyclodextrin and derivatives thereof. Non-limiting examples of cyclodextrin derivatives includes methyl β-cyclodextrin, 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin, sulfobutyl ether-β-cyclodextrin sodium salt, and 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin. A cyclodextrin can possess a large cyclic structure with a channel passing through the center of the structure. The interior of the cyclodextrin can be hydrophobic, and interact favorably with hydrophobic molecules. The exterior of the cyclodextrin can be highly hydrophilic owing to the several hydroxyl groups exposed to bulk solvent. Capture of a hydrophobic molecule, such as a compound disclosed herein, in the channel of the cyclodextrin can result in formation of a complex stabilized by non-covalent hydrophobic interactions. The complex can be soluble in water, and carry the captures hydrophobic molecule into the bulk solvent.
Another non-limiting example of a solubilizing agent are the polyvinylpyrrolidones (PVP) having the formula:
wherein the index n is from about 40 to about 200. PVP's can have an average molecular weight from about 5500 to about 28,000 g/mol. One non-limiting example is PVP-10, having an average molecular weight of approximately 10,000 g/mol.
A further non-limiting example of solubilizing agents includes polyalkyleneoxides, and polymers of alcohols or polyols. Polymers can be mixed, or contain a single monomeric repeat subunit. For example, polyethylene glycols having an average molecular weight of from about 200 to about 20,000, for example, PEG 200, PEG 400, PEG 600, PEG 1000, PEG 1450, PEG 1500, PEG 4000, PEG 4600, and PEG 8000. In a further embodiment, the compositions comprise one or more polyethylene glycols chosen from PEG 400, PEG 1000, PEG 1450, PEG 4600 and PEG 8000.
Other polyalkyleneoxides are polypropylene glycols having the formula:
HO[CH(CH3)CH2O]xH
wherein the index x represents the average number of propyleneoxy units in the glycol polymer. As in the case of ethylene glycols, for propylene glycols the index x can be represented by a whole number or a fraction. For example, a polypropylene glycol having an average molecular weight of 8,000 g/mole (PEG 8000) can be equally represented by the formulae:
HO[CH(CH3)CH2O]138H or HO[CH(CH3)CH2O]137.6H
or the polypropylene glycol can be represented by the common, short hand notation: PEG 8000.
Another example of polypropylene glycols can have an average molecular weight from about 1200 g/mol to about 20,000 g/mol, i.e., a polypropylene glycol having an average molecular weight of about 8,000 g/mol, for example, PEG 8000.
Another solubilizing agent is Polysorbate 80 (Tween™ 80) which is an oleate ester of sorbitol and its anhydrides copolymerized with approximately 20 moles of ethylene oxide for each mole of sorbitol and sorbitol anhydrides. Polysorbate 80 is made up of sorbitan mono-9-octadecanoate poly(oxy-1,2-ethandiyl) derivatives.
Solubilizing agents also include poloxamers having the formula:
HO(CH2CH2)y1(CH2CH2CH2O)y2(CH2CH2O)y3OH
which are nonionic block copolymers composed of a polypropyleneoxy unit flanked by two polyethyleneoxy units. The indices y1, y2, and y3 have values such that the poloxamer has an average molecular weight of from about 1000 g/mol to about 20,000 g/mol (PLURONICS™). These compound are commonly named with the word Poloxamer followed by a number to indicate the specific co-polymer, for example Poloxamer 407 having two PEG blocks of about 101 units (y1 and y3 each equal to 101) and a polypropylene block of about 56 units and poloxamer 185 [CAS No. 9003-11-6] wherein the indices y1, y2; and y3 have the average values of 19, 30 and 10 respectively. Various poloxamers are available under the trade name LUTROL™, for example, LUTROL™ F-17. Pluronic F-68 is a commercially available poloxamer. Other non-limiting examples of suitable poloxamers for use are those such as poloxamer 188, Pluronic F-68, and the like.
Still further solubilizing agents relate to polyoxyethylene glycol alkyl ethers having the formula:
RO(CH2CH2O)nH
wherein R is a linear or branched alkyl group having from 6 to 20 carbon atoms and n is an integer of about 2 to about 20.
Examples of these compounds are ethoxylate alcohols such as the NEODOL™ ethoxylated alcohols. NEODOL™ 23-1 is a mixture of R units that are C12 and C13 in length with an average of 1 ethoxy unit. Non-limiting examples of ethoxylated alcohols include NEODOL™ 23-1, NEODOL™ 23-2, NEODOL™ 23-6.5, NEODOL™ 25-3, NEODOL™ 25-5, NEODOL™ 25-7, NEODOL™ 25-9, PLURONIC™ 12R3, and PLURONIC™ 25R2.
Yet another example of a solubilizing agent includes polyoxypropylene glycol alkyl ethers having the formula:
RO(CH2CH(CH3)O)nH
wherein R is a linear or branched alkyl group having from 6 to 20 carbon atoms and n is an integer of about 2 to about 20.
The formulator, however, can use any solubilizing agent or agents in combination to affect the solubility of a compound herein.
One aspect of the disclosure relates to compositions and formulations comprising the herein disclosed compounds or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. Compositions containing the disclosed inhibitors can comprise:
Another aspect of the disclosed compositions relates to Tie-2 activators or HPTP-β inhibitors or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof having the formula:
A non-limiting embodiment of this aspect relates to HPTP-β inhibitors having the formula:
wherein R2 and R4 are chosen from:
An aspect of the disclosed compositions relates to HPTP-β inhibitors or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof having the formula:
In one iteration the substitutions for phenyl are chosen from fluoro, chloro and methoxy.
An aspect of the disclosed compositions relates to HPTP-β inhibitors or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof having the formula:
wherein R is chosen from, for example, benzyl, phenylethyl, (2-methylthiazol-4-yl)methyl, 4-methyl-3,4-dihydro-2H-benzo[b][1,4]oxazin-7-yl, (5-(4-chlorobenzamide)methyl)thiopen-2-yl, and (5-(methoxycarbonyl)methyl)-1,3,4-thiadiazol-2-yl.
In one non-limiting example, compositions of compounds herein are prepared as follows. For example, about 100 mg of a sterile powder of, for example, 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid is diluted in, for example, about 100 mL water to form a first composition. To the composition can be added, for example, 250 mg of hydroxypropyl beta cyclodextrin (HPβCD). Depending upon the formulation, the administrator of the compound can withdraw a sufficient amount such that the subject is injected subcutaneously with an amount that provides from about 5 mg to about 50 mg of the compound. The formulator, however, can prepare a composition having any concentration convenient or desirable. Non-limiting examples according to this embodiment include the following.
This formulation example relates to compositions comprising 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}-phenylsulfamic acid, having the formula:
and
pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
Formulation Example 2 comprises:
The compositions of Formulation Example 2 are formulated to deliver an amount of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid in the free acid form. For example, a composition which comprises 10 mg/mL of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid can have either 10 mg/mL of the free acid or an amount of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt in an amount sufficient to deliver 10 mg/mL of the free acid. As an example, a composition formulated to deliver 10 mg/mL of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenyl-sulfamic acid can comprise either 10 mg/mL of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or alternatively 10.4 mg/mL of the sodium salt, (sodium (4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenyl-propanamido]-2-(2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenyl)sulfamate). Therefore, a composition which delivers from about 0.1 mg/mL to about 60 mg/mL of (4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenyl)sulfamic acid can comprise an amount of pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof to deliver from about 0.1 mg/mL to about 60 mg/mL of the compound.
Therefore, when a composition according to Formulation I comprises an amount of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid per mL, it is understood that this amount is the amount of free acid that is delivered and if a salt form of the compound is used in the composition, the amount of the salt form can therefore reflect the difference in molecular weight between the free acid and the salt form. The following example demonstrates this equivalency.
A composition delivering 10 mg/mL of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid, comprises:
The disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2 according to Formulation Example 2 comprise from about 0.1 mg/mL to about 60 mg/mL of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
In one aspect the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2 comprise from about 0.5 mg/mL to about 60 mg/mL of a compound herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In one embodiment, the composition comprises from about 5 mg/mL to about 40 mg/mL of a compound herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In another embodiment, the composition comprises from about 10 mg/mL to about 40 mg/mL of a compound herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In a further embodiment, the composition comprises from about 10 mg/mL to about 30 mg/mL of a compound herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In a still further embodiment, the composition comprises from about 0.5 mg/mL to about 20 mg/mL of a compound herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In a further embodiment the composition comprises from about 1 mg/mL to about 20 mg/mL weight by volume of a compound herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In a further embodiment, the composition comprises from about 15 mg/mL to about 30 mg/mL weight by volume of a compound herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In another embodiment, the composition comprises from about 10 mg/mL to about 50 mg/mL weight by volume of a compound herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
Particular embodiments of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2, can comprise, for example, 1 mg/mL, 2 mg/mL, 3 mg/mL, 4 mg/mL, 5 mg/mL, 6 mg/mL, 7 mg/mL, 8 mg/mL, 9 mg/mL, 10 mg/mL, 11 mg/mL 12 mg/mL, 13 mg/mL, 14 mg/mL, 15 mg/mL, 16 mg/mL, 17 mg/mL, 18 mg/mL, 19 mg/mL, 20 mg/mL, 21 mg/mL, 22 mg/mL, 23 mg/mL, 24 mg/mL, 25 mg/mL, 26 mg/mL, 27 mg/mL, 28 mg/mL, 29 mg/mL, 30 mg/mL, 31 mg/mL 32 mg/mL, 33 mg/mL, 34 mg/mL, 35 mg/mL, 36 mg/mL, 37 mg/mL, 38 mg/mL, 39 mg/mL, 40 mg/mL, 41 mg/mL 42 mg/mL, 43 mg/mL, 44 mg/mL, 45 mg/mL, 46 mg/mL, 47 mg/mL, 48 mg/mL, 49 mg/mL, 50 mg/mL, 51 mg/mL 52 mg/mL, 53 mg/mL, 54 mg/mL, 55 mg/mL, 56 mg/mL, 57 mg/mL, 58 mg/mL, 59 mg/mL, and 60 mg/mL, about 1 mg/mL, about 2 mg/mL, about 3 mg/mL, about 4 mg/mL, about 5 mg/mL, about 6 mg/mL, about 7 mg/mL, about 8 mg/mL, about 9 mg/mL, about 10 mg/mL, about 11 mg/mL about 12 mg/mL, about 13 mg/mL, about 14 mg/mL, about 15 mg/mL, about 16 mg/mL, about 17 mg/mL, about 18 mg/mL, about 19 mg/mL, about 20 mg/mL, about 21 mg/mL about 22 mg/mL, about 23 mg/mL, about 24 mg/mL, about 25 mg/mL, about 26 mg/mL, about 27 mg/mL, about 28 mg/mL, about 29 mg/mL, about 30 mg/mL, about 31 mg/mL about 32 mg/mL, about 33 mg/mL, about 34 mg/mL, about 35 mg/mL, about 36 mg/mL, about 37 mg/mL, about 38 mg/mL, about 39 mg/mL, about 40 mg/mL, about 41 mg/mL about 42 mg/mL, about 43 mg/mL, about 44 mg/mL, about 45 mg/mL, about 46 mg/mL, about 47 mg/mL, about 48 mg/mL, about 49 mg/mL, about 50 mg/mL, about 51 mg/mL about 52 mg/mL, about 53 mg/mL, about 54 mg/mL, about 55 mg/mL, about 56 mg/mL, about 57 mg/mL, about 58 mg/mL, about 59 mg/mL, and about 60 mg/mL of the compound herein.
A formulation that is disclosed herein can be made more soluble by the addition of an additive or agent. The improvement of solubility of the formulation can increase by about 5%, about 10%, about 15%, about 20%, about 25%, about 30%, about 35%, about 40%, about 45%, about 50%, about 55%, about 60%, about 65%, about 70%, about 75% about 80%, about 85%, about 90%, about 95%, about 100%, about 110%, about 120%, about 130%, about 140%, about 150%, about 160%, about 170%, about 180%, about 190%, about 200%, about 225%, about 250%, about 275%, about 300%, about 325%, about 350%, about 375%, about 400%, about 450%, or about 500%.
A formulation disclosed herein can be stable for about 1 day, about 2 days, about 3 days, about 4 days, about 5 days, about 6 days, about 7 days, about 8 days, about 9 days, about 10 days, about 2 weeks, about 4 weeks, about 6 weeks, about 8 weeks, about 10 weeks, about 12 weeks, about 3 months, about 4 months, about 5 months, about 6 months, about 7 months, about 8 months, about 9 months, about 10 months, about 11 months, or about one year. A formulation disclosed herein can be stable, for example, at about 0° C., about 5° C., about 10° C., about 15° C., about 20° C., about 25° C., about 30° C., about 35° C., about 40° C., about 45° C., about 50° C., about 60° C., about 70° C., or about 80° C.
The disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2 can comprise, for example, from a ratio of about 1 part of a compound herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof to 4 parts solubilizing system (1:4) to about 1 part of the compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof to about 8 parts solubilizing system (1:8).
The disclosed solubilizing systems comprise 2-hydroxypropyl-beta-cyclodextrin (HPβ-CD). 2-Hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin [CAS No. 128446-35-5] is commercially available as Cavitron™. 2-Hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin, also described herein as hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin, 2-hydroxypropyl-beta-cyclodextrin, hydroxypropyl-beta-cyclodextrin or HPβCD, can be represented by either of the following formulae:
The average molecular weight of HPβCD as provided under the name Cavitron™, is approximately 1396 Da wherein the average degree of substitution is from about 0.5 to about 1.3 units of 2-hydroxypropyl per ring glucose unit. For calculation purposes it is convenient for the formulator to use 1400 Da as the molecular weight of HPβCD.
For example, a composition according to Formulation Example 2 comprising from about 0.1 mg/mL to about 60 mg/mL of the compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can comprise from about 0.25 mg/mL to about 500 mg/mL of HPβCD. Stated another way, a composition comprising about 10 mg/mL of a disclosed composition can comprise from 40 mg/mL (1:4) to about 80 mg/mL (1:8) of HPβCD. The formulator can adjust the ratios of compound to HPβCD based upon composition parameters, for example, choice and amount of a tonicity agent, pH, and the like.
The following are non-limiting examples of ratios of compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt and HPβCD: 1:4, 1:4.1, 1:4.2, 1:4.3, 1:4.4; 1:4.5, 1:4.6, 1:4.7, 1:4.8, 1:4.9, 1:5, 1:5.1, 1:5.2, 1:5.3, 1:5.4; 1:5.5, 1:5.6, 1:5.7, 1:5.8, 1:5.9, 1:6, 1:6.1, 1:6.2, 1:6.3, 1:6.4; 1:6.5, 1:6.6, 1:6.7, 1:6.8, 1:6.9, 1:7, 1:7.1, 1:7.2, 1:7.3, 1:7.4; 1:7.5, 1:7.6, 1:7.7, 1:7.8, 1:7.9, and 1:8, or alternatively, about 1:4, about 1:4. about 1, about 1:4.2, about 1:4.3, about 1:4.4; about 1:4.5, about 1:4.6, about 1:4.7, about 1:4.8, about 1:4.9, about 1:5, about 1:5. about 1, about 1:5.2, about 1:5.3, about 1:5.4; about 1:5.5, about 1:5.6, about 1:5.7, about 1:5.8, about 1:5.9, about 1:6, about 1:6.1, about 1:6.2, about 1:6.3, about 1:6.4; about 1:6.5, about 1:6.6, about 1:6.7, about 1:6.8, about 1:6.9, about 1:7, about 1:7.1, about 1:7.2, about 1:7.3, about 1:7.4; about 1:7.5, about 1:7.6, about 1:7.7, about 1:7.8, about 1:7.9, and about 1:8.
As such, the compositions can comprise an amount of HPβCD suitable for achieving the desired properties of the composition, i.e., concentration of a compound, such as 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxy-carbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid, the desired viscosity, and the desired osmolarity. The amount of HPβCD can vary depending upon the amount of the compound that the formulator desires to deliver in a single dose.
The disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2 comprise from about 1.35% to about 90% weight by volume of a carrier system. The amount of carrier system present is based upon several different factors or choices made by the formulator, for example, the final concentration of the compound and the amount of solubilizing agent.
The following is a non-limiting example of a composition comprising 15 mg/mL of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid:
In one aspect, the carrier system comprises:
Non-limiting examples of tonicity agents include dextrose, mannitol and glycerin. The formulator can utilize more than one tonicity agent when formulating the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2. The tonicity agent can comprise from about 0.5% to about 5% weight by volume of the final composition. In non-limiting examples, when preparing the final composition, the tonicity agent may be combined with 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid before mixing with the carrier system. Alternately, when reconstituting the final composition the formulator can use commercially available solutions containing a tonicity agent, for example, 5% Dextrose Injection, USP.
The osmolarity of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2 can be within any range chosen by the formulator. In one aspect the osmolarity is from about 250 to about 350 mOsm/L. In one embodiment of this aspect of the disclosed osmolarity is from about 270 to about 310 mOsm/L.
The pH of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2 can be from about 6 to about 8. If the pH is outside the range desired by the formulator, the pH can be adjusted by using sufficient pharmaceutically-acceptable acids and bases.
One aspect of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2 relates to compositions comprising 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
One embodiment of this aspect of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2 comprises:
A non-limiting iteration of this embodiment of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2 comprises:
One specific example of a composition according to this iteration comprises:
Another embodiment of this aspect of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2 comprises:
A non-limiting iteration of this embodiment of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2 comprises:
One specific example of a composition according to this iteration comprises:
A further embodiment of this aspect of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2 comprises:
A non-limiting iteration of this embodiment of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2 comprises:
One specific example of a composition according to this iteration comprises:
A further embodiment of this aspect of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2 comprises:
A non-limiting iteration of this embodiment of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2 comprises:
One specific example of a composition according to this iteration comprises:
A further embodiment of this aspect of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2 comprises:
A non-limiting iteration of this embodiment of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2 comprises:
One specific example of a composition according to this iteration comprises:
Another embodiment of this aspect of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2 comprises:
A non-limiting iteration of this embodiment of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2 comprises:
One specific example of a composition according to this iteration comprises:
Another embodiment of this aspect of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2 comprises:
A non-limiting iteration of this embodiment of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2 comprises:
One specific example of a composition according to this iteration comprises:
To a 100 mL volumetric flask containing water (85 mL) was charged HPβCD (10 g) and dextrose (1.5 g). The solution was stirred for 1 hour at 20° C. then the volume made up to 100 mL with additional distilled water. The resulting solution comprised 10% HPβCD and 1.5% dextrose.
In a like manner, solutions comprising 15% HPβCD/1.5% dextrose and 17.5% HPβCD/1.5% dextrose were prepared. These stock solutions were used for the following experiments.
In a 25 mL volumetric flask is added the stock solution comprising 10% HPβCD/1.5% dextrose followed by the addition of sodium 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxy-carbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenyl-sulfamate (550 mg). The total volume was made up to 25 mL by the addition of distilled water. The resulting solution had a nominal concentration of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxy-carbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenyl-sulfamic acid of 20 mg/mL after applying a molecular weight correction factor.
Similarly, to a stock solution comprising 10% HPβCD/1.5% dextrose was added 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxy-carbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenyl-sulfamate (687 mg). After dilution to 25 mL the resulting solution had a nominal concentration of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxy-carbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenyl-sulfamic acid of 25 mg/mL after applying a molecular weight correction factor.
Compositions comprising 15% HPβCD/1.5% dextrose and 687 mg and 825 mg of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxy-carbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenyl-sulfamate were also prepared. Likewise, compositions comprising 17.5% HPβCD/1.5% dextrose and 825 mg and 962.5 mg of Compound A-Na were also prepared.
The following Table XXIII describes the test compositions each totaling 25 mL wherein 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxy-carbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenyl-sulfamate is listed as Compound A-Na.
To 3 one-dram vials was transferred approximately 3 mL of each of the 6 solutions above. One vial of each was held at 4° C., 20° C. and 40° C. The vials were evaluated weekly for one month then monthly for three months.
After 3 months none of the vials appeared hazy or had any precipitate or flocculent. The above compositions where then further processed and submitted for in vivo testing.
To 200 mL of Mille-Q water was added 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin (50 g) (Ashland/ISP Cavitron W7HP7) with stirring. Next, dextrose (96%) (1.3 g) (Sigma Aldrich) was added and the solution was stirred until all the solids were dissolved. Sodium (4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-(2-thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenyl)-sulfamate (10.82 g) was added and the solution was stirred until the solids were dissolved. The resulting solution had a pH value of 7.26 and a density of 1.07 g/mL. Final solution filtered through Millipore™ MilliPak 20-0.22 micron PVDF filter. A calibrated peristaltic pump was used to dispense 0.75 mL of the final solution into HYpak 0.75 mL syringes having 27 g staked needles and Hypak FluoroTec stoppers.
To 200 mL of Milli-Q water was added 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin (43.75 g) (Ashland/ISP Cavitron W7HP7) with stirring. Next, Dextrose (96%) (2.61 g) (Sigma Aldrich) was added and the solution was stirred until all the solids were dissolved. Sodium (4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-(2-thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenyl)-sulfamate (10.85 g) was added and the solution was stirred until the solids were dissolved. The resulting solution had a pH value of 7.32 which was adjusted to 7.04 with 1N HCl (0.5 mL). The final solution had a density of 1.064 g/mL. Final solution filtered through Millipore™ MilliPak 20-0.22 micron PVDF filter. A calibrated peristaltic pump was used to dispense 0.75 mL of the final solution into HYpak 0.75 mL syringes having 27 g staked needles and Hypak FluoroTec stoppers.
To 200 mL of Milli-Q water was added 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin (56.25 g) (Ashland/ISP Cavitron W7HP7) with stirring. Next, Dextrose (96%) (1.3 g) (Sigma Aldrich) was added and the solution was stirred until all the solids were dissolved. Sodium (4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-(2-thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenyl)-sulfamate (10.86 g) was added and the solution was stirred until the solids were dissolved. The resulting solution had a pH value of 7.24 and a density of 1.074 g/mL. Final solution filtered through Millipore™ MilliPak 20-0.22 micron PVDF filter. A calibrated peristaltic pump was used to dispense 0.75 mL of the final solution into HYpak 0.75 mL syringes having 27 g staked needles and Hypak FluoroTec stoppers.
In the above examples, the formulator can alternatively heat the solution to about 40° C. to aid in solubilizing the components. In addition, the formulator can filter the solutions at any point in the process to remove any undissolved material.
The following is a non-limiting example of the process for preparing a pharmaceutical composition suitable for subcutaneous delivery of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2 comprising 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxy-carbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenyl-sulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt to humans.
The disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2 can be re-constituted from a dry or solid composition. As such the dry or solid compositions comprise:
The dry compositions are prepared such that upon re-constitution with a carrier system described herein, the resulting aqueous composition delivers from about 0.5 mg/mL to about 60 mg/mL of the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
As in the aqueous compositions described herein, the ratio of the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid to HPβCD is from about 1:4 to about 1:8. The amount of dry material in a container that can be reconstituted can vary depending upon the number of doses of dry material desired. For example, a single 15 mg/mL dose of the compound can be sealed or otherwise placed in a container that has an exact volume such that when the composition is re-constituted, an amount of composition that is reconstituted has 15 mg/mL of a compound.
In another embodiment, the dry compositions comprise:
The use of further solubilizing agents was examined. In a first test of further solubilizing agents, polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP) having the formula:
wherein the index n is from about 40 to about 200 was tested. PVP's have an average molecular weight from about 5500 to about 28,000 g/mol. One non limiting example is PVP-10 having an average molecular weight of approximately 10,000 g/mol available from Sigma-Aldrich.
The follow experiments were undertaken to determine the suitability of formulating a composition comprising PVP and HPβCD as a solubilizing system for sodium 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamate. The following is a non-limiting example.
To a 25 mL volumetric flask containing 20 mL of distilled water is charged hydroxylpropyl-β-cyclodextrin (2.5 g) and polyvinylpyrrolidone, PVP-10, (0.125 g) and the solution stirred at room temperature for 0.5 hours. Additional water was added to bring the final volume to 25 mL. The following compositions were prepared according to this procedure.
To each solution was added sodium (4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl)ethyl}-phenyl)sulfamate (1300 mg) was added to solutions 1, 2 and 3 and stirred for 6 hours at room temperature to provide a nominal concentration of 52 mg/mL. Similarly, the compound (1500 mg) was added to solutions 4 5, and 6 and stirred for 6 hours at room temperature to provide a nominal concentration of 60 mg/mL. Table XXV lists the solution obtained herein below.
All compositions comprising polyvinylpyrrolidones were hazy upon 2 hours of standing or yielded a suspension. Experiments 10, 11 and 12 yielded a gel upon standing. Compositions formulated in the manner of Example 30 having only a PVP (no HPβCD) formed a hazy initial solution that setup as a gel and remained such upon standing for 3 days.
In one aspect of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2, the compositions do not comprise polyvinylpyrrolidone or a derivative thereof. Compositions which gel upon standing cannot be injected parentally, e.g., subcutaneously and, therefore, are incompatible with the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2. This is because the temperature during shipment and storage of the compositions result in physical properties, i.e., formation of a gel that cannot be administered by the artisan.
In a further aspect of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 26, the compositions do not comprise polyvinylpyrrolidone or a derivative thereof in combination with 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin.
The follow experiments were undertaken to determine the suitability of formulating a composition comprising a quaternary ammonium salt, PVP and HPβCD as a solubilizing system for sodium 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamate. The following is a non-limiting example.
Benzalkonium chloride (BAC; alkylbenzyldimethylammonium chloride, alkyl: C8-C18 available from Sigma-Aldrich) (36.3 mg) was added to water (200 mL) in a 250 mL volumetric flask. The mixture was stirred for 10 hours in a 35° C. water bath until the solution was clear. 2-Hydroxy-propyl-β-cyclodextrin (27.5 g) was added and the volume made up to 250 mL with the addition of more water.
To a 25 mL volumetric flask is added the stock solution (22.8 mL followed by polyvinylpyrrolidone (Povidone 437190™ ex Sigma-Aldrich) (0.25 g) and sodium (4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-(2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenyl)-sulfamate (1.14 g). The volume was made up to 25 mL with the addition of more stock solution. The resulting suspension was stirred for 1 hour at 20° C. The solution was filtered through 0.65 micron then 0.45 micron filter paper and 5 mL of the filtrate was transferred to 3 separate vials. One vial was held at each of the following temperatures 4° C., 20° C. and 40° C.
To a 25 mL volumetric flask is added the stock solution (22.8 mL followed by polyvinylpyrrolidone (Povidone 437190™ ex Sigma-Aldrich) (0.375 g) and sodium (4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-(2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenyl)-sulfamate (1.14 g). The volume was made up to 25 mL with the addition of more stock solution. The resulting suspension was stirred for 1 hour at 20° C. The solution was filtered through 0.65 micron then 0.45 micron filter paper, however, the flow rate was extremely slow. 5 mL of the filtrate was transferred to 3 separate vials. One vial was held at each of the following temperatures 4° C., 20° C. and 40° C.
To a 25 mL volumetric flask is added the stock solution (22.8 mL followed by polyvinylpyrrolidone (Povidone 437190™ ex Sigma-Aldrich) (0.5 g) and sodium (4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-(2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenyl)-sulfamate (1.43 g). The volume was made up to 25 mL with the addition of more stock solution. The resulting suspension was stirred for 1 hour at 20° C. Attempt to filter solution through 0.65 micron then 0.45 micron filter paper and 5 mL of the filtrate was unsuccessful. Example 9 was abandoned.
Table XXVI below outlines the compositions of Examples 7-9: sodium 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxy-carbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamate is referred to as Compd A-Na in the table.
Example 7: 4° C. sample gelled and remained so for 8 days.
Example 8: 4° C. sample gelled and remained so for 8 days.
In some embodiments of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2, the compositions do not comprise benzalkonium chloride or other quaternary ammonium salt. In some embodiments of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2, the compositions do comprise benzalkonium chloride or other quaternary ammonium salt.
In a further aspect of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2, in some embodiments, the compositions do comprise benzalkonium chloride or other quaternary ammonium salt in combination with 2-hydroxy-propyl-β-cyclodextrin, and in some embodiments, the compositions do not comprise benzalkonium chloride or other quaternary ammonium salt in combination with 2-hydroxy-propyl-β-cyclodextrin.
In a still further aspect of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2, in some embodiments, the compositions do comprise benzalkonium chloride or other quaternary ammonium salt in combination with polyvinylpyrrolidone or a derivative thereof, and in some embodiments, the compositions do not comprise benzalkonium chloride or other quaternary ammonium salt in combination with polyvinylpyrrolidone or a derivative thereof.
In a yet further aspect of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2, in the somebodiments, the compositions do comprise benzalkonium chloride or other quaternary ammonium salt in combination with polyvinylpyrrolidone or a derivative thereof and 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin, and in some embodiments, the compositions do not comprise benzalkonium chloride or other quaternary ammonium salt in combination with polyvinylpyrrolidone or a derivative thereof and 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin.
Some embodiments do, and some embodiments do not contain polyethylene glycol. Non-limiting examples of polyethylene glycols include those having an average molecular weight of from about 200 to about 20,000, for example, PEG 200, PEG 400, PEG 600, PEG 1000, PEG 1450, PEG 1500, PEG 4000, PEG 4600, and PEG 8000. In a further embodiment, the compositions comprise one or more polyethylene glycols chosen from PEG 400, PEG 1000, PEG 1450, PEG 4600 and PEG 8000. Non-limiting examples include any disclosed herein.
The disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2 optionally comprise from about 0.001% to about 0.5%, or from about 0.001% to about 1% weight by volume pharmaceutically acceptable preservatives. One non-limiting example of a suitable preservative is benzyl alcohol.
In some embodiments, the compositions according to Formula Example 1 consists essentially of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxy-carbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, a solubilizing system and a carrier system.
In some embodiments, the compositions according to Formula Example 1 consists of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxy-carbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, a solubilizing system and a carrier system.
In some embodiments, the compositions according to Formula Example 1 consists essentially of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxy-carbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, a solubilizing system and a carrier system, wherein the solubilizing system consists of HPβCD.
In still other embodiments, the compositions according to Formula Example 1 consists essentially of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenyl-sulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, a solubilizing system and a carrier system wherein the carrier system consists of water and a tonicity agent.
In yet other embodiments, the compositions according to Formula Example 1 consists essentially of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenyl-sulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, a solubilizing system and a carrier system, wherein the solubilizing system consists of HPβCD and wherein the carrier system consists of water and a tonicity agent.
In still other embodiments, the compositions according to Formula Example 1 consists essentially of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenyl-sulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, HPβCD, a tonicity agent, water and optionally a preservative.
In a particular embodiment the compositions according to Formula Example 1 consists of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxy-carbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, HPβCD, a tonicity agent, water and optionally a preservative.
The disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2 can further comprise from about 0.01% to about 1% weight by volume pharmaceutically acceptable preservatives. One non-limiting example of a suitable preservative is benzyl alcohol, for example, 0.9% benzyl alcohol.
A pharmaceutical composition of the invention can be a combination of any pharmaceutical compounds described herein with other chemical components, such as carriers, stabilizers, diluents, dispersing agents, suspending agents, thickening agents, and/or excipients. The pharmaceutical composition facilitates administration of the compound to an organism. Pharmaceutical compositions can be administered in therapeutically-effective amounts as pharmaceutical compositions by various forms and routes including, for example, intravenous, subcutaneous, intramuscular, oral, rectal, aerosol, parenteral, ophthalmic, pulmonary, transdermal, vaginal, otic, nasal, and topical administration.
A pharmaceutical composition can be administered in a local or systemic manner, for example, via injection of the compound directly into an organ, optionally in a depot or sustained release formulation. Pharmaceutical compositions can be provided in the form of a rapid release formulation, in the form of an extended release formulation, or in the form of an intermediate release formulation. A rapid release form can provide an immediate release. An extended release formulation can provide a controlled release or a sustained delayed release.
For oral administration, pharmaceutical compositions can be formulated readily by combining the active compounds with pharmaceutically-acceptable carriers or excipients. Such carriers can be used to formulate tablets, powders, pills, dragees, capsules, liquids, gels, syrups, elixirs, slurries, suspensions and the like, for oral ingestion by a subject.
Pharmaceutical preparations for oral use can be obtained by mixing one or more solid excipient with one or more of the compounds described herein, optionally grinding the resulting mixture, and processing the mixture of granules, after adding suitable auxiliaries, if desired, to obtain tablets or dragee cores. Cores can be provided with suitable coatings. For this purpose, concentrated sugar solutions can be used, which can contain an excipient such as gum arabic, talc, polyvinylpyrrolidone, carbopol gel, polyethylene glycol, and/or titanium dioxide, lacquer solutions, and suitable organic solvents or solvent mixtures. Dyestuffs or pigments can be added to the tablets or dragee coatings, for example, for identification or to characterize different combinations of active compound doses.
Pharmaceutical preparations which can be used orally include push-fit capsules made of gelatin, as well as soft, sealed capsules made of gelatin and a plasticizer, such as glycerol or sorbitol. In some embodiments, the capsule comprises a hard gelatin capsule comprising one or more of pharmaceutical, bovine, and plant gelatins. A gelatin can be alkaline-processed. The push-fit capsules can contain the active ingredients in admixture with filler such as lactose, binders such as starches, and/or lubricants such as talc or magnesium stearate and, stabilizers. In soft capsules, the active compounds can be dissolved or suspended in suitable liquids, such as fatty oils, liquid paraffin, or liquid polyethylene glycols. Stabilizers can be added. All formulations for oral administration are provided in dosages suitable for such administration.
For buccal or sublingual administration, the compositions can be tablets, lozenges, or gels.
Parental injections can be formulated for bolus injection or continuous infusion. The pharmaceutical compositions can be in a form suitable for parenteral injection as a sterile suspension, solution or emulsion in oily or aqueous vehicles, and can contain formulatory agents such as suspending, stabilizing and/or dispersing agents. Pharmaceutical formulations for parenteral administration include aqueous solutions of the active compounds in water-soluble form. Suspensions of the active compounds can be prepared as oily injection suspensions. Suitable lipophilic solvents or vehicles include fatty oils such as sesame oil, or synthetic fatty acid esters, such as ethyl oleate or triglycerides, or liposomes. Aqueous injection suspensions can contain substances which increase the viscosity of the suspension, such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, sorbitol, or dextran. The suspension can also contain suitable stabilizers or agents which increase the solubility of the compounds to allow for the preparation of highly concentrated solutions. Alternatively, the active ingredient can be in powder form for constitution with a suitable vehicle, e.g., sterile pyrogen-free water, before use.
The active compounds can be administered topically and can be formulated into a variety of topically administrable compositions, such as solutions, suspensions, lotions, gels, pastes, medicated sticks, balms, creams, and ointments. Such pharmaceutical compositions can contain solubilizers, stabilizers, tonicity enhancing agents, buffers and preservatives.
Formulations suitable for transdermal administration of the active compounds can employ transdermal delivery devices and transdermal delivery patches, and can be lipophilic emulsions or buffered aqueous solutions, dissolved and/or dispersed in a polymer or an adhesive. Such patches can be constructed for continuous, pulsatile, or on demand delivery of pharmaceutical compounds. Transdermal delivery can be accomplished by means of iontophoretic patches. Additionally, transdermal patches can provide controlled delivery. The rate of absorption can be slowed by using rate-controlling membranes or by trapping the compound within a polymer matrix or gel. Conversely, absorption enhancers can be used to increase absorption. An absorption enhancer or carrier can include absorbable pharmaceutically acceptable solvents to assist passage through the skin. For example, transdermal devices can be in the form of a bandage comprising a backing member, a reservoir containing compounds and carriers, a rate controlling barrier to deliver the compounds to the skin of the subject at a controlled and predetermined rate over a prolonged period of time, and adhesives to secure the device to the skin or the eye.
For administration by inhalation, the active compounds can be in a form as an aerosol, a mist, or a powder. Pharmaceutical compositions are conveniently delivered in the form of an aerosol spray presentation from pressurized packs or a nebuliser, with the use of a suitable propellant, for example, dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide or other suitable gas. In the case of a pressurized aerosol, the dosage unit can be determined by providing a valve to deliver a metered amount. Capsules and cartridges of, for example, gelatin for use in an inhaler or insufflator can be formulated containing a powder mix of the compounds and a suitable powder base such as lactose or starch.
The compounds can also be formulated in rectal compositions such as enemas, rectal gels, rectal foams, rectal aerosols, suppositories, jelly suppositories, or retention enemas, containing conventional suppository bases such as cocoa butter or other glycerides, as well as synthetic polymers such as polyvinylpyrrolidone and PEG. In suppository forms of the compositions, a low-melting wax such as a mixture of fatty acid glycerides or cocoa butter can be used.
In practicing the methods of treatment or use provided herein, therapeutically-effective amounts of the compounds described herein are administered in pharmaceutical compositions to a subject having a disease or condition to be treated. In some embodiments, the subject is a mammal such as a human. A therapeutically-effective amount can vary widely depending on the severity of the disease, the age and relative health of the subject, the potency of the compounds used, and other factors. The compounds can be used singly or in combination with one or more therapeutic agents as components of mixtures.
Pharmaceutical compositions can be formulated using one or more physiologically-acceptable carriers comprising excipients and auxiliaries, which facilitate processing of the active compounds into preparations that can be used pharmaceutically. Formulation can be modified depending upon the route of administration chosen. Pharmaceutical compositions comprising a compounds described herein can be manufactured, for example, by mixing, dissolving, granulating, dragee-making, levigating, emulsifying, encapsulating, entrapping, or compression processes.
The pharmaceutical compositions can include at least one pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, diluent, or excipient and compounds described herein as free-base or pharmaceutically-acceptable salt form. The methods and pharmaceutical compositions described herein include the use crystalline forms (also known as polymorphs), and active metabolites of these compounds having the same type of activity.
Methods for the preparation of compositions comprising the compounds described herein include formulating the compounds with one or more inert, pharmaceutically-acceptable excipients or carriers to form a solid, semi-solid, or liquid composition. Solid compositions include, for example, powders, tablets, dispersible granules, capsules, cachets, and suppositories. Liquid compositions include, for example, solutions in which a compound is dissolved, emulsions comprising a compound, or a solution containing liposomes, micelles, or nanoparticles comprising a compound as disclosed herein. Semi-solid compositions include, for example, gels, suspensions and creams. The compositions can be in liquid solutions or suspensions, solid forms suitable for solution or suspension in a liquid prior to use, or as emulsions. These compositions can also contain minor amounts of nontoxic, auxiliary substances, such as wetting or emulsifying agents, pH buffering agents, and other pharmaceutically-acceptable additives.
Non-limiting examples of dosage forms suitable for use in the invention include feed, food, pellet, lozenge, liquid, elixir, aerosol, inhalant, spray, powder, tablet, pill, capsule, gel, geltab, nanosuspension, nano-particle, microgel, suppository troches, aqueous or oily suspensions, ointment, patch, lotion, dentifrice, emulsion, creams, drops, dispersible powders or granules, emulsion in hard or soft gel capsules, syrups, phytoceuticals, nutraceuticals, and any combination thereof.
Non-limiting examples of pharmaceutically-acceptable excipients suitable for use in the invention include granulating agents, binding agents, lubricating agents, disintegrating agents, sweetening agents, glidants, anti-adherents, anti-static agents, surfactants, anti-oxidants, gums, coating agents, coloring agents, flavouring agents, coating agents, plasticizers, preservatives, suspending agents, emulsifying agents, anti-microbial agents, plant cellulosic material and spheronization agents, and any combination thereof.
A composition of the invention can be, for example, an immediate release form or a controlled release formulation. An immediate release formulation can be formulated to allow the compounds to act rapidly. Non-limiting examples of immediate release formulations include readily dissolvable formulations. A controlled release formulation can be a pharmaceutical formulation that has been adapted such that drug release rates and drug release profiles can be matched to physiological and chronotherapeutic requirements or, alternatively, has been formulated to effect release of a drug at a programmed rate. Non-limiting examples of controlled release formulations include granules, delayed release granules, hydrogels (e.g., of synthetic or natural origin), other gelling agents (e.g., gel-forming dietary fibers), matrix-based formulations (e.g., formulations comprising a polymeric material having at least one active ingredient dispersed through), granules within a matrix, polymeric mixtures, and granular masses.
The disclosed compositions can optionally comprise from about 0.001% to about 0.005% weight by volume pharmaceutically acceptable preservatives. One non-limiting example of a suitable preservative is benzyl alcohol.
In some, a controlled release formulation is a delayed release form. A delayed release form can be formulated to delay a compound's action for an extended period of time. A delayed release form can be formulated to delay the release of an effective dose of one or more compounds, for example, for about 4, about 8, about 12, about 16, or about 24 hours.
A controlled release formulation can be a sustained release form. A sustained release form can be formulated to sustain, for example, the compound's action over an extended period of time. A sustained release form can be formulated to provide an effective dose of any compound described herein (e.g., provide a physiologically-effective blood profile) over about 4, about 8, about 12, about 16 or about 24 hours.
Non-limiting examples of pharmaceutically-acceptable excipients can be found, for example, in Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, Nineteenth Ed (Easton, Pa.: Mack Publishing Company, 1995); Hoover, John E., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pa. 1975; Liberman, H. A. and Lachman, L., Eds., Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Marcel Decker, New York, N.Y., 1980; and Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms and Drug Delivery Systems, Seventh Ed. (Lippincott Williams & Wilkins 1999), each of which is incorporated by reference in its entirety.
The disclosed methods include administration of a HPTP-β inhibitor or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. The carrier can be selected to minimize any degradation of the active ingredient and to minimize any adverse side effects in the subject.
In another aspect, the 4 HPTP-β inhibitor or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be used prophylactically, i.e., as a preventative agent after treatment with an anti-VEGF agent has stopped. The HPTP-β inhibitor or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof herein can be conveniently formulated into pharmaceutical compositions composed of one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. See e.g., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, latest edition, by E.W. Martin Mack Pub. Co., Easton, Pa., which discloses typical carriers and conventional methods of preparing pharmaceutical compositions that can be used in conjunction with the preparation of formulations of the compound described herein and which is incorporated by reference herein. Such pharmaceutical can be standard carriers for administration of compositions to humans and non-humans, including solutions such as sterile water, saline, and buffered solutions at physiological pH. Other compositions can be administered according to standard procedures used by those skilled in the art. For example, pharmaceutical compositions can also include one or more additional active ingredients such as antimicrobial agents, anti-inflammatory agents, anesthetics, and the like.
Non-limiting examples of pharmaceutically-acceptable carriers include, but are not limited to, saline, Ringer's solution and dextrose solution. The pH of the solution can be from about 5 to about 8, and can be from about 7 to about 7.5. Further carriers include sustained release preparations such as semipermeable matrices of solid hydrophobic polymers containing the HPTP-β inhibitor or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof, which matrices are in the form of shaped articles, e.g., films, liposomes, microparticles, or microcapsules.
The disclosed methods relate to administering the HPTP-β inhibitor or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof as part of a pharmaceutical composition. Compositions suitable for topical administration can be used (see, for example, US Patent Application 2005/0059639 included herein by reference in its entirety). In various embodiments, compositions of the invention can comprise a liquid comprising an active agent in solution, in suspension, or both. Liquid compositions can include gels. In one embodiment, the liquid composition is aqueous. Alternatively, the composition can take form of an ointment. In another embodiment, the composition is an in situ gellable aqueous composition. In iteration, the composition is an in situ gellable aqueous solution. Such a composition can comprise a gelling agent in a concentration effective to promote gelling upon contact with the eye or lacrimal fluid in the exterior of the eye. Aqueous compositions of the invention have ophthalmically compatible pH and osmolality. The composition can comprise an ophthalmic depot formulation comprising an active agent for subconjunctival administration. The microparticles comprising active agent can be embedded in a biocompatible pharmaceutically acceptable polymer or a lipid encapsulating agent. The depot formulations may be adapted to release all or substantially all the active material over an extended period of time. The polymer or lipid matrix, if present, may be adapted to degrade sufficiently to be transported from the site of administration after release of all or substantially all the active agent. The depot formulation can be a liquid formulation, comprising a pharmaceutical acceptable polymer and a dissolved or dispersed active agent. Upon injection, the polymer forms a depot at the injections site, e.g. by gelifying or precipitating. The composition can comprise a solid article that can be inserted in a suitable location in the eye, such as between the eye and eyelid or in the conjuctival sac, where the article releases the active agent. Solid articles suitable for implantation in the eye in such fashion generally comprise polymers and can be bioerodible or non-bioerodible.
Pharmaceutical formulations can include additional carriers, as well as thickeners, diluents, buffers, preservatives, surface active agents and the like in addition to the compounds disclosed herein. Pharmaceutical formulations can also include one or more additional active ingredients such as antimicrobial agents, anti-inflammatory agents, anesthetics, and the like.
An excipient can fill a role as simple and direct as being an inert filler, or an excipient as used herein may be part of a pH stabilizing system or coating to insure delivery of the ingredients safely to the stomach. The formulator can also take advantage of the fact the compounds of the present disclosure have improved cellular potency, pharmacokinetic properties, as well as improved oral bioavailability.
The HPTP-β inhibitor or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can also be present in liquids, emulsions, or suspensions for delivery of active therapeutic agents in aerosol form to cavities of the body such as the nose, throat, or bronchial passages. The ratio of HPTP-β inhibitor or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof to the other compounding agents in these preparations can vary as the dosage form requires.
Depending on the intended mode of administration, the pharmaceutical compositions administered as part of the disclosed methods can be in the form of solid, semi-solid or liquid dosage forms, such as, for example, tablets, suppositories, pills, capsules, powders, liquids, suspensions, lotions, creams, gels, or the like, for example, in unit dosage form suitable for single administration of a precise dosage. The compositions can, as noted above, an effective amount of the HPTP-β inhibitor or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and, in addition, can include other medicinal agents, pharmaceutical agents, carriers, adjuvants, diluents, etc.
For solid compositions, conventional nontoxic solid carriers include, for example, pharmaceutical grades of mannitol, lactose, starch, magnesium stearate, sodium saccharin, talc, cellulose, glucose, sucrose, magnesium carbonate, and the like. In one embodiment, a composition comprising the HPTP-β inhibitor or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof in an amount of approximately 5 mg per 0.1 mL liquid is prepared. The liquid phase comprises sterile water and an appropriate amount of a saccharide or polysaccharide.
Pharmaceutical compositions containing compounds described herein can be administered for prophylactic and/or therapeutic treatments. In therapeutic applications, the compositions can be administered to a subject already suffering from a disease or condition, in an amount sufficient to cure or at least partially arrest the symptoms of the disease or condition, or to cure, heal, improve, or ameliorate the condition. Compounds can also be administered to lessen a likelihood of developing, contracting, or worsening a condition. Amounts effective for this use can vary based on the severity and course of the disease or condition, previous therapy, the subject's health status, weight, and response to the drugs, and the judgment of the treating physician.
Multiple therapeutic agents can be administered in any order or simultaneously. If simultaneously, the multiple therapeutic agents can be provided in a single, unified form, or in multiple forms, for example, as multiple separate pills. The compounds can be packed together or separately, in a single package or in a plurality of packages. One or all of the therapeutic agents can be given in multiple doses. If not simultaneous, the timing between the multiple doses may vary to as much as about a month.
Compounds and compositions of the invention can be packaged as a kit. In some embodiments, a kit includes written instructions on the use of the compounds and compositions.
Compounds described herein can be administered before, during, or after the occurrence of a disease or condition, and the timing of administering the composition containing a compound can vary. For example, the compounds can be used as a prophylactic and can be administered continuously to subjects with a propensity to conditions or diseases in order to lessen a likelihood of the occurrence of the disease or condition. The compounds and compositions can be administered to a subject during or as soon as possible after the onset of the symptoms. The administration of the compounds can be initiated within the first 48 hours of the onset of the symptoms, within the first 24 hours of the onset of the symptoms, within the first 6 hours of the onset of the symptoms, or within 3 hours of the onset of the symptoms. The initial administration can be via any route practical, such as by any route described herein using any formulation described herein. A compound can be administered as soon as is practicable after the onset of a disease or condition is detected or suspected, and for a length of time necessary for the treatment of the disease, such as, for example, from about 1 month to about 3 months. The length of treatment can vary for each subject.
Pharmaceutical compositions described herein can be in unit dosage forms suitable for single administration of precise dosages. In unit dosage form, the formulation is divided into unit doses containing appropriate quantities of one or more compounds. The unit dosage can be in the form of a package containing discrete quantities of the formulation. Non-limiting examples are packaged injectables, vials, or ampoules. Aqueous suspension compositions can be packaged in single-dose non-reclosable containers. Multiple-dose reclosable containers can be used, for example, in combination with or without a preservative. Formulations for parenteral injection can be presented in unit dosage form, for example, in ampoules, or in multi-dose containers with a preservative.
A compound described herein can be present in a composition in a range of from about 1 mg to about 2000 mg; from about 5 mg to about 1000 mg, from about 10 mg to about 25 mg to 500 mg, from about 50 mg to about 250 mg, from about 100 mg to about 200 mg, from about 1 mg to about 50 mg, from about 50 mg to about 100 mg, from about 100 mg to about 150 mg, from about 150 mg to about 200 mg, from about 200 mg to about 250 mg, from about 250 mg to about 300 mg, from about 300 mg to about 350 mg, from about 350 mg to about 400 mg, from about 400 mg to about 450 mg, from about 450 mg to about 500 mg, from about 500 mg to about 550 mg, from about 550 mg to about 600 mg, from about 600 mg to about 650 mg, from about 650 mg to about 700 mg, from about 700 mg to about 750 mg, from about 750 mg to about 800 mg, from about 800 mg to about 850 mg, from about 850 mg to about 900 mg, from about 900 mg to about 950 mg, or from about 950 mg to about 1000 mg.
A compound described herein can be present in a composition in an amount of about 1 mg, about 2 mg, about 3 mg, about 4 mg, about 5 mg, about 10 mg, about 15 mg, about 20 mg, about 25 mg, about 30 mg, about 35 mg, about 40 mg, about 45 mg, about 50 mg, about 55 mg, about 60 mg, about 65 mg, about 70 mg, about 75 mg, about 80 mg, about 85 mg, about 90 mg, about 95 mg, about 100 mg, about 125 mg, about 150 mg, about 175 mg, about 200 mg, about 250 mg, about 300 mg, about 350 mg, about 400 mg, about 450 mg, about 500 mg, about 550 mg, about 600 mg, about 650 mg, about 700 mg, about 750 mg, about 800 mg, about 850 mg, about 900 mg, about 950 mg, about 1000 mg, about 1050 mg, about 1100 mg, about 1150 mg, about 1200 mg, about 1250 mg, about 1300 mg, about 1350 mg, about 1400 mg, about 1450 mg, about 1500 mg, about 1550 mg, about 1600 mg, about 1650 mg, about 1700 mg, about 1750 mg, about 1800 mg, about 1850 mg, about 1900 mg, about 1950 mg, or about 2000 mg.
The present disclosure further relates to kits containing compositions according to Formulation Example 2 for use by medical or other trained personnel, as well as for use by trained subjects for delivery of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2 to a subject. In general the disclosed kits comprise:
The compositions according to Formulation Example 2 can comprise the following concentrations of the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid: 1 mg/mL, 2 mg/mL, 3 mg/mL, 4 mg/mL, 5 mg/mL, 6 mg/mL, 7 mg/mL, 8 mg/mL, 9 mg/mL, 10 mg/mL, 11 mg/mL, 12 mg/mL, 13 mg/mL, 14 mg/mL, 15 mg/mL, 16 mg/mL, 17 mg/mL, 18 mg/mL, 19 mg/mL, 20 mg/mL, 21 mg/mL, 22 mg/mL, 23 mg/mL, 24 mg/mL, 25 mg/mL, 26 mg/mL, 27 mg/mL, 28 mg/mL, 29 mg/mL, 30 mg/mL, 31 mg/mL, 32 mg/mL, 33 mg/mL, 34 mg/mL, 35 mg/mL, 36 mg/mL, 37 mg/mL, 38 mg/mL, 39 mg/mL, 40 mg/mL, 41 mg/mL, 42 mg/mL, 43 mg/mL, 44 mg/mL, 45 mg/mL, 46 mg/mL, 47 mg/mL, 48 mg/mL, 49 mg/mL, 50 mg/mL, 51 mg/mL, 52 mg/mL, 53 mg/mL, 54 mg/mL, 55 mg/mL, 56 mg/mL, 57 mg/mL, 58 mg/mL, 59 mg/mL, and 60 mg/mL.
The disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2 can be administered to a subject. Non-limiting examples of routes of administration include parenteral delivery, i.e., intravenous, subcutaneous, and intramuscular. Delivery can be by, for example, syringes, needles, infusion pumps, injectors. Syringes and injectors can be, for example, single-dose, multi-dose, fixed-dose or variable-dose. Examples of injectors include, but are not limited to, pen injectors, auto-injectors, and electronic patch injector systems. One convenient means for delivering the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 2 is by single use disposable auto injectors. One non-limiting example is a single use injector configured like the single injector sold under the Tradename MOLLY™. Non-limiting examples of injectors are described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,442,185; U.S. Pat. No. 8,038,649; U.S. Pat. No. 8,062,255; U.S. Pat. No. 8,075,517; U.S. Pat. No. 8,235,952; U.S. Pat. No. 8,277,412; U.S. Pat. No. 8,529,510; and U.S. Pat. No. 8,551,054.
The kits can comprise suitable components for the administration of a compound of the invention to a subject. In some embodiments a compound of the invention is present in the kit as a unit dosage form. For example, the kit may comprise a delivery device that is capable of holding a single dose volume of 0.75 mL is capable of delivering 15 mg/mL of compound when the concentration of the compound is 20 mg/mL. As such, the formulator can provide delivery devices having a higher concentration of compound and adjust the delivered volume to provide an amount of compound that is less than the amount in the entire solution. In another embodiment the kit comprises a delivery device that contains a sufficient amount of a composition to allow for administration of multiple doses from the delivery device.
In some embodiments, a kit of the invention comprises:
The kits can be modified to fit the dosing regimen prescribed for the subject being treated. The following is a non-limiting example of a kit for use with a patient receiving an intravenously delivered composition comprising the disclosed compounds and an intravireally administered anti-VEGF agent. This particular example provides dosing of the disclosed compounds twice daily for 3 months and for an injection of ranibizumab at week 12.
A. 3 packages, each package containing 4 vials. Each vial comprising a sufficient amount of a HPTP-β inhibitor or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt to provide 2 daily injections of 5 mg of the disclosed compounds for 7 days; and
B. a vial of ranibizumab for injection at the end of week 12 which provides 0.5 mg of ranibizumab.
The artisan, however, can provide kits that comprise any combination of elements. In addition, when the disclosed HPTP-β inhibitors or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt provided orally, a single container with sufficient doses of the disclosed compounds can be supplied with the kit.
Also included with each kit labels providing instructions for use and disposal can be included, as well as instructions for use of the compositions to be delivered. The instructions can be modified from kit to kit to reflect the dosing regime prescribed. The instructions can describe any therapy, compounds, excipients, or method of administration described herein.
The following are additional non-limiting examples of compositions according to Formulation Example 2 that can comprise the disclosed kits.
One example is a kit comprising:
In one non-limiting example, the kit comprises:
In another non-limiting example, the kit comprises:
One example is a kit comprising:
A) an aqueous composition containing:
In one non-limiting example, the kit comprises:
In another non-limiting example, the kit comprises:
In a further aspect the kits comprising a composition according to Formulation Example 2 is a kit, comprising:
In another aspect the kits comprising a composition according to Formulation Example 2 is a pharmaceutical kit, comprising:
A further aspect of the compositions according to Formulation Example 2 relates to kits which comprise a solid composition for reconstitution. The amount of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}-phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof in the container of dry composition can be in any convenient amount. For example, a container comprising 20 mg of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}-phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can have a demarcation line indicating a final volume of 1 mL. The user can then reconstitute the composition by adding sufficient carrier to create a composition comprising 20 mg/mL of the compound. The formulator also has options for use according to the instructions. For example, the instructions can direct the user to withdrawn a sufficient amount according to the prescribed dose. If the prescribed dose is 15 mg/mL the user can withdraw 0.75 mL's of the 20 mg/mL solution for delivery to the subject. Therefore, instructions for re-constitution can afford the user with the proper method of reconstitution, as well as the amount of re-constituted formula to be delivered to a subject.
The following is a non-limiting example of a kit containing a solid composition:
In another iteration the dry compositions for reconstitution can comprise:
A set of instructions can be included in any of the herein described kits. The instructions can relate to the dosing amount, timing of dosing, and reconstitution of the composition when the kit contains a dry composition, methods of disposal of delivery means and unused composition, and the like.
4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(Methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}-phenylsulfamic acid can be prepared by the procedure outlined in Scheme XXIV and describe in Example 25 herein below.
Preparation of (S)-[3-diazo-1-(4-nitrobenzyl)-2-oxo-propyl]-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester (6): To a 0° C. solution of 2-(S)-tert-butoxycarbonylamino-3-(4-nitrophenyl)-propionic acid, 1, (1.20 g, 4.0 mmol) in THF (20 mL) was added dropwise triethylamine (0.61 mL, 4.4 mmol) followed by iso-butyl chloroformate (0.57 mL, 4.4 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 20 minutes and filtered. The filtrate was treated with an ether solution of diazomethane (˜16 mmol) at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 hours then concentrated in vacuo. The resulting residue was dissolved in EtOAc and washed successively with water and brine, dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated. The residue was purified over silica (hexane/EtOAc 2:1) to afford 1.1 g (82% yield) of the desired product as a slightly yellow solid. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.16 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 2H), 7.39 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 2H), 5.39 (s, 1H), 5.16 (d, J=6.3 Hz, 1H), 4.49 (s, 1H), 3.25 (dd, J=13.8 and 6.6, 1H), 3.06 (dd, J=13.5 and 6.9 Hz, 1H), 1.41 (s, 9H).
Preparation of (S)-tert-butyl 4-bromo-1-(4-nitrophenyl)-3-oxobutan-2-ylcarbamate (7): To a 0° C. solution of (S)-[3-diazo-1-(4-nitrobenzyl)-2-oxo-propyl]-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester, 6, (0.350 g, 1.04 mmol) in THF (5 mL) is added dropwise 48% aq. HBr (0.14 mL, 1.25 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 1.5 hours then the reaction was quenched at 0° C. with sat. Na2CO3. The mixture is extracted with EtOAc (3×25 mL) and the combined organic extracts are washed with brine, dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated to obtain 0.400 g of the product which was used in the next step without further purification. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.20 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 7.39 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 5.06 (d, J=7.8 Hz, 1H), 4.80 (q, J=6.3 Hz, 2H), 4.04 (s, 2H), 1.42 (s, 9H).
Preparation of (S)-2-(4-Nitrophenyl)-1-(2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl)ethanamine hydrobromide (65): Thiophene-2-carbothioamide in acetonitrile (4 vol. with respect to 7) was stirred at 15 to 25° C. for 30 to 60 minutes. To remove residual sulfur, the resulting mixture was filtered through Celite® and the reaction flask and filter cake are rinsed with acetonitrile (2×1 vol). The filtrate was then added to the reactor containing and (S)-tert-butyl 4-bromo-1-(4-nitrophenyl)-3-oxobutan-2-ylcarbamate, 7, (0.98 eq) under a nitrogen atmosphere. Additional ACN was added and the resulting bright yellow slurry was heated to 80° C. over 6 hours. The reaction mixture was refluxed for 6 to 16 hours. The reaction mixture was cooled to 65 to 70° C. over 1 hour and stirred for an additional 1 to 4 hours. The reaction mixture was then cooled to 50 to 60° C. over 1 hour. The reaction mixture was aged for an additional 1 to 2 hours at 50 to 60° C. The reaction mixture was then cooled to 20 to 25° C. over 1 hour. The reaction mixture was aged for an additional 4 to 16 hours at 20 to 25° C. The resulting slurry was filtered and the filter cake was washed with ACN. The wet cake was dried under vacuum at 40 to 45° C. to afford the desired product.
Preparation of methyl (S)-1-(S)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-(2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl)ethylamino-1-oxo-3-phenylpropan-2-ylcarbamate (68); A solution of (S)-2-[(methoxy-carbonyl)amino]-3-phenylpropanoic acid (66) (1.07 eq.) was added to a reactor containing (S)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-(2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl)ethanamine (67) (1.0 eq.) under a nitrogen atmosphere. 2-Chloro-4,6-dimethoxy-1,3,5-triazine (1.07 eq) was added to the stirred reaction mixture followed by tetrahydrofuran (THF) (ca. 13 vol. with respect to 67). The temperature was adjusted to 19 to 25° C. and N-methylmorpholine (NMM) (0.4 eq) was added at a rate such that the temperature was maintained between 20 and 30° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at 19 to 25° C. for 50 to 70 minutes. Additional NMM (0.4 eq) was added at a rate such that the temperature was maintained between 20 and 30° C. The resulting reaction mixture was stirred at 19 to 25° C. for 50 to 70 minutes. Additional NMM (0.2 eq) was added at a rate such that the temperature was maintained between 20 and 30° C. The resulting reaction mixture was stirred at 19 to 25° C. for 50 to 70 minutes. Additional NMM (1.2 eq) was added at a rate such that the temperature was maintained between 20 and 30° C. The resulting reaction mixture was stirred at 19 to 25° C. for 90 to 120 minutes. The reaction mixture was further stirred at 19 to 25° C. for 2 to 3 hours. A sample of reaction mixture was tested to determined chemical purity. The reaction mixture was then stirred at 19 to 25° C. for minimum 8 hours. The resulting slurry was filtered and the filter cake washed with THF (2×1 vol,). The wet cake was added back to the reactor and de-ionized water (40 vol.) was added. Tetrahydrofuran (20 vol.) was added to the stirred reaction mixture and stirring was continued for 4 to 16 hours at 19 to 25° C. The solids are collected by filtration. The filter cake was washed with a 2:1 (v/v) water/THF mixture. The wet cake was further dried under vacuum at room temperature or 40-50° C. for minimum 12 hours to afford the desired product.
Preparation of methyl ((S)-1-(((S)-2-(4-aminophenyl)-1-(2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl)ethyl)amino)-1-oxo-3-phenylpropan-2-yl)carbamate (69): To a reactor purged with nitrogen was added methyl (S)-1-(S)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)-1-(2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl)ethylamino-1-oxo-3-phenylpropan-2-ylcarbamate (68), the catalyst, Pd/C (10%) (0.2:1 ratio of catalyst to 68 by weight), and tetrahydrofuran (THF). The reactor was pressurized to 45 psi with nitrogen for minimum 5 minutes then depressurized to approximately 5 psi nitrogen. This procedure was repeated three times before reactor was finally pressurized to 30 to 36 psi with hydrogen. The resulting mixture was stirred for a minimum of 24 hours while maintaining the pressure at 30 to 36 psi with hydrogen. The reactor was then depressurized and purged with nitrogen for testing of reaction completion. The reaction mixture was filtered through a bed of Celite® filter aid to remove the catalyst and the filter cake was washed with THF. The combined filtrate and washes were concentrated under reduced pressure at 30 to 50° C. to approximately 3 volumes. The reaction mixture was cooled to 19 to 25° C. and methyl t-butyl ether (MTBE) (2.5 vol.) was added over 30 minutes. The resulting reaction mixture was stirred at 19 to 25° C. for 60 to 120 minutes during which time the product begins to precipitate. Additional MTBE (9.5 vol.) was added over a period of 60 to 90 minutes. The resulting slurry was aged at 19 to 25° C. for a period of 6 to 16 hours. The solids are collected by filtration and the filter cake was washed with MTBE. The wet cake was then dried under vacuum at room temperature or 40-50° C. to afford the desired product.
Preparation of trimethylammonium (4-((S)-2-((S)-2-((methoxycarbonyl)amino)-3-phenylpropanamido)-2-(2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl)ethyl)phenyl)sulfamate (70): ((S)-1-(((S)-2-(4-aminophenyl)-1-(2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl)ethyl)amino)-1-oxo-3-phenylpropan-2-yl)carbamate (69), trimethylamine sulfur trioxide complex (1.71 eq.) and tetrahydrofuran (THF) (7.1 vol.) were added to a reactor purged with nitrogen. The reaction mixture was stirred and triethylamine (0.106 eq.) was added at 19 to 25° C. The stirred reaction mixture was warmed to 35 to 40° C. and stirred for 4 to 8 hours. The reaction mixture was cooled to 19 to 25° C. and stirring was continued for 1 to 2 hours. The reaction mixture was filtered and the filter cake was washed with THF. The combined filtrate and washes are added to a stirred reactor containing methyl t-butyl ether (MTBE) (10 vol.) over a minimum of 2 hour period. On completion of the addition, the reaction mixture was stirred at 19 to 25° C. for 4 to 16 hours. The solids are collected by filtration and the wet cake was washed with MTBE. The wet cake was dried under vacuum at 20 to 25° C. for 2 hours to afford the desired product.
Preparation of sodium (4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropan-amido]-2-(2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenyl)sulfamate (71): trimethyl-ammonium (4-((S)-2-((S)-2-((methoxycarbonyl)amino)-3-phenylpropanamido)-2-(2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl)ethyl)-phenyl)sulfamate (70) was added to a stirred reactor containing methanol (MeOH) (4.87 vol.) and sodium methoxide (25% solution in MeOH) (0.093 eq.). Sodium methoxide (25% solution in MeOH) (1.08 eq.) was added over 5 minutes while maintaining the temperature at 19 to 25° C. The resulting mixture was stirred at 19-25° C. for 30 to 60 minutes then 2 portions of sodium methoxide (25% solution in MeOH) (0.14 eq. and 0.07 eq.) are added over 30 minutes while maintaining the temperature at 19 to 25° C. The resulting mixture was stirred for 30 to 60 minutes while maintaining the temperature at 19 to 25° C. The reaction mixture was then filtered and the filter cake washed with methanol (MeOH). The filtrates and cake washes are concentrated under reduced pressure at 30 to 40° C. to approximately 8 volumes. The reaction mixture was cooled to 19 to 25° C. and methyl t-butyl ether (10 vol) was then added. The reaction mixture was then stirred for 15 to 20 minutes. The resulting solids are isolated by filtration and the filter cake was washed with MTBE. The wet cake was dried under vacuum at room temperature or 35-40° C. for a minimum of 2 hours to afford the desired product.
Preparation of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid (72): sodium (4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropan-amido]-2-(2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenyl)-sulfamate 71) (97.0 μm, 0.16 mol) was slowly added to distilled water (1.0 L) and acetone (200 mL) in a three-neck 5-L round bottom flask equipped with an overhead mechanical stirrer, a thermometer and an addition funnel at ambient temperature. To the resulting suspension 85% H3PO4 (20.33 g, 1.1 eq.) diluted with water (100 mL) was slowly added through the addition funnel over 15 minutes. No apparent temperature change was observed. A considerable amount of a free-flowing suspension formed in 10-15 minutes after the addition was complete. The suspension was stirred at ambient temperature for 2 hours and filtered. The solid cake was rinsed with 20% acetone in water (2×50 mL). The solid was removed and dried under vacuum to afford 88.05 g (93.8% yield) of the desired product as a light-yellow solid which HPLC analysis indicated had a purity of 99.26%. 1H (CD3OD): δ 7.61-7.56 (m, 2H), 7.25-7.01 (m, 10H), 6.75 (s, 1H), 5.24-5.21 (q, 1H, J=7.2 Hz), 4.38 (t, 1H, J=7.2 Hz), 3.60 (s, 3H), 3.23-3.14 (m, 1H), 3.08-3.00 (m, 2H), 2.87-2.80 (m, 1H).
This formulation example relates to compositions comprising 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenyl-sulfamic acid having the formula:
and
pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
Formulation Example 3 comprises:
The compositions of Formulation Example 3 are formulated to deliver an amount of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid in the free acid form. For example, a composition which comprises 10 mg/mL of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid can have either 10 mg/mL of the free acid or an amount of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt in an amount sufficient to deliver 10 mg/mL of the free acid. As an example, a composition formulated to deliver 10 mg/mL of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid can comprise either 10 mg/mL of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or alternatively 10.4 mg/mL of the sodium salt, (sodium 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamate). Therefore, a composition which delivers from about 10 mg/mL to about 100 mg/mL of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid can comprise an amount of pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof to deliver from about 10 mg/mL to about 100 mg/mL of the compound
Therefore, when a composition according to Formulation Example 3 comprises an amount of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid per mL, it is understood that this amount is the amount of free acid that is delivered and if a salt form of the compound is used in the composition, the amount of the salt form can therefore reflect the difference in molecular weight between the free acid and the salt form. The following example demonstrates this equivalency.
A composition delivering 10 mg/mL of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid, comprises:
The disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 3 according to Formulation Example 3 comprise from about 10 mg/mL to about 100 mg/mL of the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
In one aspect the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 3 comprise from about 20 mg/mL to about 100 mg/mL of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In one embodiment, the composition comprises from about 15 mg/mL to about 60 mg/mL of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In another embodiment, the composition comprises from about 40 mg/mL to about 90 mg/mL of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}-phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In a further embodiment, the composition comprises from about 10 mg/mL to about 30 mg/mL of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxy-carbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In a still further embodiment, the composition comprises from about 40 mg/mL to about 80 mg/mL of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonyl-lamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In a yet further embodiment the composition comprises from about 10 mg/mL to about 20 mg/mL weight by volume of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In a still yet further embodiment, the composition comprises from about 60 mg/mL to about 90 mg/mL weight by volume of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenyl-sulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In still another embodiment, the composition comprises from about 50 mg/mL to about 100 mg/mL weight by volume of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenyl-sulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
Particular embodiments of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 3, comprise 1 mg/mL, 2 mg/mL, 3 mg/mL, 4 mg/mL, 5 mg/mL, 6 mg/mL, 7 mg/mL, 8 mg/mL, 9 mg/mL, 10 mg/mL, 11 mg/mL 12 mg/mL, 13 mg/mL, 14 mg/mL, 15 mg/mL, 16 mg/mL, 17 mg/mL, 18 mg/mL, 19 mg/mL, 20 mg/mL, 21 mg/mL, 22 mg/mL, 23 mg/mL, 24 mg/mL, 25 mg/mL, 26 mg/mL, 27 mg/mL, 28 mg/mL, 29 mg/mL, 30 mg/mL, 31 mg/mL 32 mg/mL, 33 mg/mL, 34 mg/mL, 35 mg/mL, 36 mg/mL, 37 mg/mL, 38 mg/mL, 39 mg/mL, 40 mg/mL, 41 mg/mL 42 mg/mL, 43 mg/mL, 44 mg/mL, 45 mg/mL, 46 mg/mL, 47 mg/mL, 48 mg/mL, 49 mg/mL, 50 mg/mL, 51 mg/mL 52 mg/mL, 53 mg/mL, 54 mg/mL, 55 mg/mL, 56 mg/mL, 57 mg/mL, 58 mg/mL, 59 mg/mL, 60 mg/mL, 61 mg/mL 62 mg/mL, 63 mg/mL, 64 mg/mL, 65 mg/mL, 66 mg/mL, 67 mg/mL, 68 mg/mL, 69 mg/mL, 70 mg/mL, 71 mg/mL 72 mg/mL, 73 mg/mL, 74 mg/mL, 75 mg/mL, 76 mg/mL, 77 mg/mL, 78 mg/mL, 79 mg/mL, 80 mg/mL, 81 mg/mL 82 mg/mL, 83 mg/mL, 84 mg/mL, 85 mg/mL, 86 mg/mL, 87 mg/mL, 88 mg/mL, 89 mg/mL, 90 mg/mL, 91 mg/mL 92 mg/mL, 93 mg/mL, 94 mg/mL, 95 mg/mL, 96 mg/mL, 97 mg/mL, 98 mg/mL, 99 mg/mL, and 100 mg/mL, about 1 mg/mL, about 2 mg/mL, about 3 mg/mL, about 4 mg/mL, about 5 mg/mL, about 6 mg/mL, about 7 mg/mL, about 8 mg/mL, about 9 mg/mL, about 10 mg/mL, about 11 mg/mL about 12 mg/mL, about 13 mg/mL, about 14 mg/mL, about 15 mg/mL, about 16 mg/mL, about 17 mg/mL, about 18 mg/mL, about 19 mg/mL, about 20 mg/mL, about 21 mg/mL about 22 mg/mL, about 23 mg/mL, about 24 mg/mL, about 25 mg/mL, about 26 mg/mL, about 27 mg/mL, about 28 mg/mL, about 29 mg/mL, about 30 mg/mL, about 31 mg/mL, about 32 mg/mL, about 33 mg/mL, about 34 mg/mL, about 35 mg/mL, about 36 mg/mL, about 37 mg/mL, about 38 mg/mL, about 39 mg/mL, about 40 mg/mL, about 41 mg/mL, about 42 mg/mL, about 43 mg/mL, about 44 mg/mL, about 45 mg/mL, about 46 mg/mL, about 47 mg/mL, about 48 mg/mL, about 49 mg/mL, about 50 mg/mL, about 51 mg/mL, about 52 mg/mL, about 53 mg/mL, about 54 mg/mL, about 55 mg/mL, about 56 mg/mL, about 57 mg/mL, about 58 mg/mL, about 59 mg/mL, about 60 mg/mL, about 61 mg/mL, about 62 mg/mL, about 63 mg/mL, about 64 mg/mL, about 65 mg/mL, about 66 mg/mL, about 67 mg/mL, about 68 mg/mL, about 69 mg/mL, about 70 mg/mL, about 71 mg/mL, about 72 mg/mL, about 73 mg/mL, about 74 mg/mL, about 75 mg/mL, about 76 mg/mL, about 77 mg/mL, about 78 mg/mL, about 79 mg/mL, about 80 mg/mL, about 81 mg/mL, about 82 mg/mL, about 83 mg/mL, about 84 mg/mL, about 85 mg/mL, about 86 mg/mL, about 87 mg/mL, about 88 mg/mL, about 89 mg/mL, about 90 mg/mL, about 91 mg/mL, about 92 mg/mL, about 93 mg/mL, about 94 mg/mL, about 95 mg/mL, about 96 mg/mL, about 97 mg/mL, about 98 mg/mL, about 99 mg/mL, and about 100 mg/mL of a compound disclosed herein, for example, 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropan-amido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid.
In one embodiment, a formulation disclosed herein can comprise a ratio of about 20 parts of a compound herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof to about 1 part solubilizing system (about 20:about 1), to about 1 part of the compound herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof to about 20 parts solubilizing system (about 1:about 20). For example, a formulation containing about 100 mg of a compound herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can contain from about 5 mg to about 2000 mg of a solubilizing agent, such as a cyclodextrin. In another embodiment, the ratio can be based on number, or moles, or compound compared to number, or moles, of solubilizing system.
The disclosed solubilizing systems can comprise cyclodextrins: β-cyclodextrin, β-cyclodextrin and β-cyclodextrin and derivatives thereof. Non-limiting examples of cyclodextrin derivatives includes methyl-β-cyclodextrin, 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin, sulfobutyl ether-β-cyclodextrin sodium salt, and 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin.
The following are non-limiting examples of ratios of a compound herein and a solubilizing agent, such as a cyclodextrin. The following examples alternatively describe the ratio of a solubilizing agent, such as a cyclodextrin, and a compound herein. The ratio can be: about 20:about 1; about 19.9:about 1; about 19.8:about 1; about 19.7:about 1; about 19.6:about 1; about 19.5:about 1; about 19.4:about 1; about 19.3:about 1; about 19.2:about 1; about 19.1:about 1; about 19:about 1; about 18.9:about 1; about 18.8:about 1; about 18.7:about 1; about 18.6:about 1; about 18.5:about 1; about 18.4:about 1; about 18.3:about 1; about 18.2:about 1; about 18.1:about 1; about 18:about 1; about 17.9:about 1; about 17.8:about 1; about 17.7:about 1; about 17.6:about 1; about 17.5:about 1; about 17.4:about 1; about 17.3:about 1; about 17.2:about 1; about 17.1:about 1; about 17:about 1; about 16.9:about 1; about 16.8:about 1; about 16.7:about 1; about 16.6:about 1; about 16.5:about 1; about 16.4:about 1; about 16.3:about 1; about 16.2:about 1; about 16.1:about 1; about 16:about 1; about 15.9:about 1; about 15.8:about 1; about 15.7:about 1; about 15.6:about 1; about 15.5:about 1; about 15.4:about 1; about 15.3:about 1; about 15.2:about 1; about 15.1:about 1; about 15:about 1; about 14.9:about 1; about 14.8:about 1; about 14.7:about 1; about 14.6:about 1; about 14.5:about 1; about 14.4:about 1; about 14.3:about 1; about 14.2:about 1; about 14.1:about 1; about 14:about 1; about 13.9:about 1; about 13.8:about 1; about 13.7:about 1; about 13.6:about 1; about 13.5:about 1; about 13.4:about 1; about 13.3:about 1; about 13.2:about 1; about 13.1:about 1; about 13:about 1; about 12.9:about 1; about 12.8:about 1; about 12.7:about 1; about 12.6:about 1; about 12.5:about 1; about 12.4:about 1; about 12.3:about 1; about 12.2:about 1; about 12.1:about 1; about 12:about 1; about 11.9:about 1; about 11.8:about 1; about 11.7:about 1; about 11.6:about 1; about 11.5:about 1; about 11.4:about 1; about 11.3:about 1; about 11.2:about 1; about 11.1:about 1; about 11:about 1; about 10.9:about 1; about 10.8:about 1; about 10.7:about 1; about 10.6:about 1; about 10.5:about 1; about 10.4:about 1; about 10.3:about 1; about 10.2 about 1; about 10.1:about 1; about 10:about 1; about 9.9:about 1; about 9.8:about 1; about 9.7:about 1; about 9.6:about 1; about 9.5:about 1; about 9.4:about 1; about 9.3:about 1; about 9.2:about 1; about 9.1:about 1; about 9:about 1; about 8.9:about 1; about 8.8:about 1; about 8.7:about 1; about 8.6:about 1; about 8.5:about 1; about 8.4:about 1; about 8.3:about 1; about 8.2:about 1; about 8.1:about 1; about 8:about 1; about 7.9:about 1; about 7.8:about 1; about 7.7:about 1; about 7.6:about 1; about 7.5:about 1; about 7.4:about 1; about 7.3:about 1; about 7.2:about 1; about 7.1:about 1; about 7:about 1; about 6.9:about 1; about 6.8:about 1; about 6.7:about 1; about 6.6:about 1; about 6.5:about 1; about 6.4:about 1; about 6.3:about 1; about 6.2:about 1; about 6.1:about 1; about 6:about 1; about 5.9:about 1; about 5.8:about 1; about 5.7:about 1; about 5.6:about 1; about 5.5:about 1; about 5.4:about 1; about 5.3:about 1; about 5.2:about 1; about 5.1:about 1; about 5:about 1; about 4.9:about 1; about 4.8:about 1; about 4.7:about 1; about 4.6:about 1; about 4.5:about 1; about 4.4:about 1; about 4.3:about 1; about 4.2:about 1; about 4.1:about 1; about 4:about 1; about 3.9:about 1; about 3.8:about 1; about 3.7:about 1; about 3.6:about 1; about 3.5:about 1; about 3.4:about 1; about 3.3:about 1; about 3.2:about 1; about 3.1:about 1; about 3:about 1; about 2.9:about 1; about 2.8:about 1; about 2.7:about 1; about 2.6:about 1; about 2.5:about 1; about 2.4:about 1; about 2.3:about 1; about 2.2:about 1; about 2.1:about 1; about 2:about 1; about 1.9:about 1; about 1.8:about 1; about 1.7:about 1; about 1.6:about 1; about 1.5:about 1; about 1.4:about 1; about 1.3:about 1; about 1.2:about 1; about 1.1:about 1; or about 1:about 1.
As such, the compositions can comprise an amount of HPβCD suitable for achieving the desired properties of the composition, i.e., concentration of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonyl-amino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid, the desired viscosity, the desired osmolarity and the like. The amount of HPβCD can vary depending upon the amount of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid the formulator desires to deliver in a single dose.
The disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 3 comprise from about 1.5% to about 90% weight by volume of a carrier system. The amount of carrier system present is based upon several different factors or choices made by the formulator, for example, the final concentration of the compound and the amount of solubilizing agent.
The following is a non-limiting example of a composition comprising 60 mg/mL of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}-phenylsulfamic acid:
In one aspect, the carrier system comprises:
Non-limiting examples of tonicity agents include dextrose, mannitol and glycerin. The formulator can utilize more than one tonicity agent when formulating the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 3. The tonicity agent can comprise from about 0.5% to about 5% weight by volume of the final composition. In non-limiting examples, when preparing the final composition, the tonicity agent may be combined with 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonyl-amino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid before mixing with the carrier system. Alternately, when reconstituting the final composition the formulator can use commercially available solutions containing atonicity agent, for example, 5% Dextrose Injection, USP.
The osmolarity of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 3 can be within any range chosen by the formulator. In one aspect the osmolarity is from about 250 to about 350 mOsm/L. In one embodiment of this aspect of the disclosed osmolarity is from about 270 to about 310 mOsm/L.
The pH of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 3 can be from about 6 to about 8. If the pH is outside the range desired by the formulator, the pH can be adjusted by using sufficient pharmaceutically acceptable acids and bases.
One aspect of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 3 relates to compositions comprising 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
One embodiment of this aspect of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 3 comprises:
b) from about 4.2 mg/mL to about 4.8 mg/mL of 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin; and
A non-limiting iteration of this embodiment of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 3 comprises:
One specific example of a composition according to this iteration comprises:
Another embodiment of this aspect of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 3 comprises:
A non-limiting iteration of this embodiment of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 3 comprises:
One specific example of a composition according to this iteration comprises:
A further embodiment of this aspect of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 3 comprises:
A non-limiting iteration of this embodiment of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 3 comprises:
a) about 90 mg/mL of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid;
One specific example of a composition according to this iteration comprises:
This formulation example relates to compositions comprising 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid having the formula:
and
pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
Formulation Example 4 comprises:
The compositions of Formulation Example 4 are formulated to deliver an amount of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}-phenylsulfamic acid in the free acid form. For example, a composition which comprises 10 mg/mL of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid can have either 10 mg/mL of the free acid or an amount of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt in an amount sufficient to deliver 10 mg/mL of the free acid. As an example, a composition formulated to deliver 10 mg/mL of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxy-carbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid can comprise either 10 mg/mL of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or alternatively 10.4 mg/mL of the sodium salt, (sodium 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamate). Therefore, a composition which delivers from about 0.1 mg/mL to about 90 mg/mL of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid can comprise an amount of pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof to deliver from about 0.1 mg/mL to about 90 mg/mL of the compound
Therefore, when a composition according to Formulation Example 4 comprises an amount of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid per mL, it is understood that this amount is the amount of free acid that is delivered and if a salt form of the compound is used in the composition, the amount of the salt form can therefore reflect the difference in molecular weight between the free acid and the salt form. The following example demonstrates this equivalency.
A composition delivering 10 mg/mL of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid, comprises:
The disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 4 according to Formulation Example 4 comprise from about 10 mg/mL to about 90 mg/mL of the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[4-ethylthiazol-2-yl]ethyl}phenyl-sulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
In one aspect the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 4 comprise from about 20 mg/mL to about 100 mg/mL of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[4-ethylthiazol-2-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In one embodiment, the composition comprises from about 15 mg/mL to about 60 mg/mL of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[4-ethylthiazol-2-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In another embodiment, the composition comprises from about 40 mg/mL to about 90 mg/mL of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}-phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In a further embodiment, the composition comprises from about 10 mg/mL to about 30 mg/mL of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxy-carbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In a still further embodiment, the composition comprises from about 40 mg/mL to about 80 mg/mL of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonyl-lamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In a yet further embodiment the composition comprises from about 10 mg/mL to about 20 mg/mL weight by volume of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[4-ethylthiazol-2-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In a still yet further embodiment, the composition comprises from about 60 mg/mL to about 90 mg/mL weight by volume of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenyl-sulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In still another embodiment, the composition comprises from about 50 mg/mL to about 80 mg/mL weight by volume of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenyl-sulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
Particular embodiments of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 4, comprise 1 mg/mL, 2 mg/mL, 3 mg/mL, 4 mg/mL, 5 mg/mL, 6 mg/mL, 7 mg/mL, 8 mg/mL, 9 mg/mL, 10 mg/mL, 11 mg/mL 12 mg/mL, 13 mg/mL, 14 mg/mL, 15 mg/mL, 16 mg/mL, 17 mg/mL, 18 mg/mL, 19 mg/mL, 20 mg/mL, 21 mg/mL, 22 mg/mL, 23 mg/mL, 24 mg/mL, 25 mg/mL, 26 mg/mL, 27 mg/mL, 28 mg/mL, 29 mg/mL, 30 mg/mL, 31 mg/mL 32 mg/mL, 33 mg/mL, 34 mg/mL, 35 mg/mL, 36 mg/mL, 37 mg/mL, 38 mg/mL, 39 mg/mL, 40 mg/mL, 41 mg/mL 42 mg/mL, 43 mg/mL, 44 mg/mL, 45 mg/mL, 46 mg/mL, 47 mg/mL, 48 mg/mL, 49 mg/mL, 50 mg/mL, 51 mg/mL 52 mg/mL, 53 mg/mL, 54 mg/mL, 55 mg/mL, 56 mg/mL, 57 mg/mL, 58 mg/mL, 59 mg/mL, 60 mg/mL, 61 mg/mL 62 mg/mL, 63 mg/mL, 64 mg/mL, 65 mg/mL, 66 mg/mL, 67 mg/mL, 68 mg/mL, 69 mg/mL, 70 mg/mL, 71 mg/mL 72 mg/mL, 73 mg/mL, 74 mg/mL, 75 mg/mL, 76 mg/mL, 77 mg/mL, 78 mg/mL, 79 mg/mL, 80 mg/mL, 81 mg/mL 82 mg/mL, 83 mg/mL, 84 mg/mL, 85 mg/mL, 86 mg/mL, 87 mg/mL, 88 mg/mL, 89 mg/mL, and 90 mg/mL, about 1 mg/mL, about 2 mg/mL, about 3 mg/mL, about 4 mg/mL, about 5 mg/mL, about 6 mg/mL, about 7 mg/mL, about 8 mg/mL, about 9 mg/mL, about 10 mg/mL, about 11 mg/mL about 12 mg/mL, about 13 mg/mL, about 14 mg/mL, about 15 mg/mL, about 16 mg/mL, about 17 mg/mL, about 18 mg/mL, about 19 mg/mL, about 20 mg/mL, about 21 mg/mL about 22 mg/mL, about 23 mg/mL, about 24 mg/mL, about 25 mg/mL, about 26 mg/mL, about 27 mg/mL, about 28 mg/mL, about 29 mg/mL, about 30 mg/mL, about 31 mg/mL, about 32 mg/mL, about 33 mg/mL, about 34 mg/mL, about 35 mg/mL, about 36 mg/mL, about 37 mg/mL, about 38 mg/mL, about 39 mg/mL, about 40 mg/mL, about 41 mg/mL, about 42 mg/mL, about 43 mg/mL, about 44 mg/mL, about 45 mg/mL, about 46 mg/mL, about 47 mg/mL, about 48 mg/mL, about 49 mg/mL, about 50 mg/mL, about 51 mg/mL, about 52 mg/mL, about 53 mg/mL, about 54 mg/mL, about 55 mg/mL, about 56 mg/mL, about 57 mg/mL, about 58 mg/mL, about 59 mg/mL, about 60 mg/mL, about 61 mg/mL, about 62 mg/mL, about 63 mg/mL, about 64 mg/mL, about 65 mg/mL, about 66 mg/mL, about 67 mg/mL, about 68 mg/mL, about 69 mg/mL, about 70 mg/mL, about 71 mg/mL, about 72 mg/mL, about 73 mg/mL, about 74 mg/mL, about 75 mg/mL, about 76 mg/mL, about 77 mg/mL, about 78 mg/mL, about 79 mg/mL, about 80 mg/mL, about 81 mg/mL, about 82 mg/mL, about 83 mg/mL, about 84 mg/mL, about 85 mg/mL, about 86 mg/mL, about 87 mg/mL, about 88 mg/mL, about 89 mg/mL, and about 90 mg/mL of a compound herein, such as 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropan-amido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid.
In one embodiment, the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 4 can comprise from a ratio of about 20 parts of the compound herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof to about 1 part solubilizing system (about 20:about 1) to about 1 part of the compound herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof to about 20 parts solubilizing system (about 1:about 20). The disclosed solubilizing systems can comprise cyclodextrins, non-limiting examples of which include: β-cyclodextrin, β-cyclodextrin and β-cyclodextrin and derivatives thereof. Non-limiting examples of cyclodextrin derivatives includes methyl-β-cyclodextrin, 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin, sulfobutyl ether-β-cyclodextrin sodium salt, and 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin.
The formulator can adjust the ratios of the compound to HPβCD based upon composition parameters, for example, choice and amount of a tonicity agent and pH. Suitable ratios are described above. As such, the compositions can comprise an amount of solubilizing system suitable for achieving the desired properties of the composition, i.e., concentration of compound, the desired viscosity, and the desired osmolarity. The amount of HPβCD can vary depending upon the amount of compound that the formulator desires to deliver in a single dose.
The disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 4 can comprise from about 1.5% to about 90% weight by volume of a carrier system. The amount of carrier system present is based upon several different factors or choices made by the formulator, for example, the final concentration of the compound and the amount of solubilizing agent.
The following is a non-limiting example of a composition comprising 60 mg/mL of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}-phenylsulfamic acid:
In one aspect, the carrier system comprises:
Non-limiting examples of tonicity agents include dextrose, mannitol and glycerin. The formulator can utilize more than one tonicity agent when formulating the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 4. The tonicity agent can comprise from about 0.5% to about 5% weight by volume of the final composition. In non-limiting examples, when preparing the final composition, the tonicity agent may be combined with 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonyl-amino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid before mixing with the carrier system. Alternately, when reconstituting the final composition the formulator can use commercially available solutions containing a tonicity agent, for example, 5% Dextrose Injection.
The osmolarity of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 4 can be within any range chosen by the formulator. In one aspect the osmolarity is from about 250 to about 350 mOsm/L. In one embodiment of this aspect of the disclosed osmolarity is from about 270 to about 310 mOsm/L.
The pH of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 4 can be from about 6 to about 8. If the pH is outside the range desired by the formulator, the pH can be adjusted by using sufficient pharmaceutically acceptable acids and bases.
One aspect of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 4 relates to compositions comprising 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
One embodiment of this aspect of the disclosed compositions according to
Formulation Example 4 comprises:
A non-limiting iteration of this embodiment of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 4 comprises:
One specific example of a composition according to this iteration comprises:
Another embodiment of this aspect of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 4 comprises:
A non-limiting iteration of this embodiment of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 4 comprises:
One specific example of a composition according to this iteration comprises:
A further embodiment of this aspect of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 4 comprises:
A non-limiting iteration of this embodiment of the disclosed compositions according to Formulation Example 4 comprises:
One specific example of a composition according to this iteration comprises:
4-{(S)-2-(4-Ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid can be prepared by the procedure outlined in Scheme XXV and described in Example 34 herein below.
Preparation of Methyl (S)-1-(S)-1-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethylamino)-1-oxo-3-phenylpropan-2-ylcarbamate (73): To a solution of 1-(S)-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethyl amine (3) (307 g, 82%, 1.1 mol), (S)-(2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropionic acid (333 g, 89%, 1.33 mol, 1.2 eq) and 1-hydroxybenzotriazole (HOBt) (180 g, 1.33 mol, 1.2 eq) in DMF (5 L) at 0° C., was added 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl-3-ethylcarbodiimide (EDCI) (255 g, 1.33 mol, 1.2 eq) followed by diisopropylamine (285 g, 2.2 mol, 2 eq). The mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 30 minutes then at room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was diluted with water (20 L) and extracted with EtOAc (30 L×3). The combined organic phase was washed with 1 N aqueous HCl, 5% aqueous NaHCO3, brine and dried over Na2SO4. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the crude product was washed with a small amount of EtOAc to afford 245 g of the desired product with 94% HPLC purity. Yield: 56%. LC/MS (M+1): 483; 1H NMR (300 MHz, CD3OD): δ 8.14-8.11 (d, 2H, J=8.4 Hz), 7.50-7.47 (d, 2H, J=8.4 Hz), 7.20-7.17 (m, 5H), 7.03 (s, 1H), 5.52-5.47 (m, 1H), 4.35-4.30 (t, 1H, J=7.8 Hz), 3.67-3.54 (m, 4H), 3.25-3.17 (m, 1H), 3.02-2.95 (m, 1H), 2.81-2.74 (m, 3H), 1.31-1.26 (t, 3H, J=7.5 Hz).
Preparation of Methyl (S)-1-(S)-2-(4-aminophenyl)-1-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethylamino)-1-oxo-3-phenylpropan-2-ylcarbamate (74): Methyl (S)-1-((S)-1-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(4-nitrophenyl)ethylamino)-1-oxo-3-phenylpropan-2-ylcarbamate (73) (220 g, 0.45 mol) was dissolved in 4.5 L of ethanol. FeCl3 (15.0 g, 0.09 mol, 0.2 equiv.) and activated carbon (96.8 g) were added to the above solution. The resulting mixture was then refluxed while hydrated hydrazine (440 mL, 7.04 mol) was added dropwise during 1 h. The mixture was refluxed for another 2 h and then cooled down to rt. The activated carbon was filtered. Filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure, diluted with 1 L water and extracted with ethyl acetate, washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4. The combined organic layer was concentrated and washed with ethyl ether to afford 10 as off-white solid (163 g, yield: 78.6%). LC/MS (M+1): 453; 1H NMR (300 MHz, CD3OD) δ: 7.21-6.98 (m, 10H), 5.40-5.38 (t, 1H, J=7.5 Hz), 4.38-4.33 (t, 1H, J=7.5 Hz), 3.70 (s, 3H), 3.24-3.22 (m, 1H), 3.11-3.01 (m, 2H), 2.81-2.72 (m, 3H), 1.32-1.26 (t, 3H, J=7.5 Hz). HPLC: 96.5%.
Preparation of 4-((S)-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido)ethyl)phenylsulfamic acid (75): Methyl (S)-1-((S)-2-(4-aminophenyl)-1-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethylamino)-1-oxo-3-phenylpropan-2-ylcarbamate (74) (123 g, 0.272 mol) and N-methylmorpholine (50 g, 0.495 mol) were dissolved in 1.1 L of THF. Me3NSO3 complex (58 g, 0.417 mol) was added in one portion. The resulting mixture was warmed up to 50° C. for 3 hours and then concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography (DCM/MeOH=20/1 to DCM/MeOH=10/1) to give the desired product 11 (150 g, yield: 104%), which contained a small amount of Me3N and MeOSO3H. LC/MS (M−1): 531; 1H NMR (300 MHz, CD3OD) δ: 7.21-6.99 (m, 10H), 5.39-5.34 (t, 1H, J=6.0 Hz), 4.39-4.34 (t, 1H, J=8.1 Hz), 3.61 (s, 3H), 3.25-3.23 (m, 1H), 3.10-3.00 (m, 2H), 2.81-2.74 (m, 3H), 1.31-1.26 (t, 3H, J=7.2 Hz); HPLC: 98.1%.
Preparation of sodium 4-{(S)-2-(4-Ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonyl-amino)-3-phenyl-propanamido]ethyl}phenylsulfamate (76): To a solution of 4-((S)-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)-2-((S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido)ethyl)-phenylsulfamic acid (75) (150 g, 0.272 mmol) in methanol (1.2 L) was added 50% NaOH (11.3 g, 0.272 mol, 1.0 equiv.) at room temperature. The resulting mixture was stirred at rt for 30 min and then concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude product, which contained a small amount of Me3N and MeOSO3Na. To a stirred slurry of the crude product (75 g) in H2O (150 mL) was added aq. NaOH (2 g, 0.05 mol; in 50 mL H2O) in dropwise at room temperature. The slurry was continued to stir for 20 min, filtered and washed with water (10 mL) and ethyl ether (50 mL). Then the filter cake was dried under reduced pressure at 50° C. to give 62 g (83%) of the desired compound. LC/MS (M−1): 531; H-NMR (300 MHz, CD3OD) δ: 7.21-6.98 (m, 10H), 5.40-5.36 (t, 1H, J=6.9 Hz), 4.38-4.34 (t, 1H, J=7.5 Hz), 3.61 (s, 3H), 3.24-3.23 (m, 1H), 3.11-3.01 (m, 2H), 2.81-2.74 (m, 3H), 1.31-1.26 (t, 3H, J=7.5 Hz); HPLC: 98.5%.
Disclosed are methods for the treatment of diseases or conditions of the eye, especially diabetic macular edema, age-related macular degeneration (wet form), choroidal neovascularization, diabetic retinopathy, ocular ischemia, uveitis, retinal vein occlusion (central or branch), ocular trauma, surgery induced edema, surgery induced neovascularization, cystoid macular edema, ocular ischemia, uveitis, and the like. These diseases or conditions are characterized by changes in the ocular vasculature whether progressive or non-progressive, whether a result of an acute disease or condition, or a chronic disease or condition. These diseases can be characterized by an increased level of plasma Vascular Endothelial Growth Factor.
In some embodiments, the disclosed methods relate to the administration of the HPTP-β inhibitor or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, as well as compositions comprising the HPTP-β inhibitor or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
In some embodiments, the methods of the disclosure are drawn towards co-administration of a HPTP-β inhibitor or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof which stabilizes the vasculature against leakage and one or more anti-VEGF agents.
In some embodiments, the methods of the disclosure are drawn towards co-administration of a HPTP-β inhibitor or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof which stabilizes the vasculature against neovascularization and one or more anti-VEGF agents.
In some embodiments, the inhibitor stabilizes the vasculature against leakage and neovascularization.
In one embodiment of the disclosed methods, a human subject with at least one visually impaired eye is treated with from about 0.1 mg to about 100 mg of the HPTP-β inhibitor or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof via subcutaneous or intravitreal injection. Improvement of clinical symptoms can be monitored by one or more methods known to the art, for example, indirect ophthalmoscopy, fundus photography, fluorescein angiopathy, electroretinography, external eye examination, slit lamp biomicroscopy, applanation tonometry, pachymetry, optical coherence tomography and autorefaction. As described herein, the dosing can occur at any frequency determined by the administrator. After cessation of the anti-VEGF agent treatment, subsequent doses can be administered weekly or monthly, e.g., with a frequency of 2-8 weeks or 1-12 months apart depending upon the response.
One aspect of the disclosed methods relates to diseases that are a direct or indirect result of diabetes, inter alia, diabetic macular edema and diabetic retinopathy. The ocular vasculature of the diabetic becomes unstable over time leading to conditions such as non-proliferative retinopathy, macular edema, and proliferative retinopathy. As fluid leaks into the center of the macula, the part of the eye where sharp, straight-ahead vision occurs, the buildup of fluid and the associated protein begin to deposit on or under the macula. This results in swelling that causes the subject's central vision to gradually become distorted. This condition is referred to as “macular edema.” Another condition that may occur is non-proliferative retinopathy in which vascular changes, such as microaneurysms, outside the macular region of the eye may be observed.
These conditions may or may not progress to diabetic proliferative retinopathy which is characterized by increased neovascularization. These new blood vessels are fragile and are susceptible to bleeding. The result is scaring of the retina, as well as occlusion or total blockage of the light pathway through the eye due to the over formation of new blood vessels. Typically subjects having diabetic macular edema are suffering from the non-proliferative stage of diabetic retinopathy; however, it is not uncommon for subjects to only begin manifesting macular edema at the onset of the proliferative stage.
Diabetic retinopathy is the most common cause of vision loss in working-aged Americans (Klein R et al., “The Wisconsin Epidemiologic Study of Diabetic Retinopathy. II. Prevalence and risk of diabetic retinopathy when age at diagnosis is less than 30 years,” Arch. Ophthalmol. 1984, 102:520-526). Severe vision loss occurs due to tractional retinal detachments that complicate retinal neovascularization (NV), but the most common cause of moderate vision loss is diabetic macular edema (DME). The pathogenesis of diabetic macular edema is not completely understood, but hypoxia is a contributing factor (Nguyen Q D et al., “Supplemental inspired oxygen improves diabetic macular edema; a pilot study,” Invest. Ophthalmol. Vis. Sci. 2003, 45:617-624). Vascular endothelial growth factor (Vegf) is a hypoxia-regulated gene and VEGF levels are increased in hypoxic or ischemic retina. Injection of VEGF into mouse eyes causes breakdown of the inner blood-retinal barrier (See, Derevjanik N L et al. Quantitative assessment of the integrity of the blood-retinal barrier in mice, Invest. Ophthalmol. Vis. Sci. 2002, 43:2462-2467) and sustained release of VEGF in the eyes of monkeys causes macular edema (Ozaki H et al., “Intravitreal sustained release of VEGF causes retinal neovascularization in rabbits and breakdown of the blood-retinal barrier in rabbits and primates,” Exp Eye Res 1997, 64:505-517). This combination of observations in patients and animal models led to the hypothesis that VEGF plays an important role in the pathogenesis of diabetic macular edema. This hypothesis has been confirmed by several clinical trials that have shown that VEGF antagonists reduce foveal thickening and improve vision in patients with diabetic macular edema (Nguyen Q D et al., “Vascular endothelial growth factor is a critical stimulus for diabetic macular edema,” Am. J. Ophthalmol. 2006, 142:961-969; and Nguyen Q D et al. “Primary End Point (Six Months) Results of the Ranibizumab for Edema of the mAcula in Diabetes (READ-2) Study,” Ophthalmology 2009, 116:2175-2181).
The effects of VEGF on vascular endothelial cells are modulated by Tie2 receptors, which are selectively expressed on vascular endothelial cells and are required for embryonic vascular development (Dumont D J et al., “Dominant-negative and targeted null mutations in the endothelial receptor tyrosine kinase, tek, reveal a critical role in vasculogenesis of the embryo,” Genes Dev. 1994, 8:1897-1909). Angiopoietin 1 (Ang1) binds Tie2 with high affinity and initiates phosphorylation and downstream signaling (Davis S et al., “Isolation of angiopoietin-1, a ligand for the TIE2 receptor, by secretion-trap expression cloning,” Cell 1996, 87:1161-1169). Mice deficient in Ang1 die around E12.5 with vascular defects similar to, but less severe than those seen in Tie2-deficient mice. Angiopoietin 2 (Ang2) binds Tie2 with high affinity, but does not stimulate phosphorylation in cultured endothelial cells. It acts as a competitive inhibitor of Ang1 and transgenic mice overexpressing Ang2 have a phenotype similar to Ang1-deficient mice. Several lines of evidence indicate that Ang2 is a developmentally- and hypoxia-regulated permissive factor for VEGF-induced neovascularization in the retina (Hackett S F et al., “Angiopoietin 2 expression in the retina: upregulation during physiologic and pathologic neovascularization,” J. Cell. Physiol. 2000, 184:275-284). Double transgenic Tet/opsin/ang2 and Tet/opsin/ang1 mice with inducible expression of Ang2 or Ang1, respectively, have also helped to elucidate the role of Tie2 in the retina (Nambu H et al., “Angiopoietin 1 inhibits ocular neovascularization and breakdown of the blood-retinal barrier,” Gene Ther. 2004, 11:865-873). In mice with ischemic retinopathy, increased expression of Ang2 when VEGF is high (P12-17) increases retinal neovascularization, but increased expression at P20 when VEGF levels have come down, hastens regression of retinal neovascularization and findings were similar in other models of ocular neovascularization. In contrast, increased expression of Ang1 suppressed neovascularization and reduced vascular leakage in several models. Therefore, Ang2 reduces stabilizing signals from the matrix making endothelial cells dependent upon VEGF and other soluble stimulators; when VEGF is high, neovascularization is stimulated and when VEGF is low, neovascularization regresses. In contrast, Ang1 increases stabilizing signals from the matrix and makes the vasculature unresponsive to soluble stimulators like VEGF.
Angiopoietin 2 binds Tie2, but does not stimulate phosphorylation and therefore acts as an antagonist under most circumstances. In the eye, angiopoietin 2 is upregulated at sites of neovascularization and acts as a permissive factor for VEGF. Increased expression of VEGF in the retina does not stimulate sprouting of neovascularization from the superficial or intermediate capillary beds of the retina or the choriocapillaris, but does stimulate sprouting from the deep capillary bed where there is constitutive expression of angiopoietin 2 (Hackett S F et al., “Angiopoietin-2 plays an important role in retinal angiogenesis,” J. Cell. Physiol. 2002, 192:182-187). Co-expression of VEGF and angiopoietin 2 at the surface of the retina causes sprouting of neovascularization from the superficial retinal capillaries (Oshima Y et al., “Angiopoietin-2 enhances retinal vessel sensitivity to vascular endothelial growth factor,” J. Cell. Physiol. 2004, 199:412-417). In double transgenic mice with inducible expression of angiopoietin 2 in the retina, expression of angiopoietin 2 when VEGF levels were high markedly enhanced neovascularization and expression of angiopoietin 2 when VEGF levels were low caused regression of neovascularization. In double transgenic mice with inducible expression of angiopoietin 1, the induced expression of angiopoietin 1 in the retina strongly suppressed VEGF-induced vascular leakage or neovascularization (Nambu H et al., “Angiopoietin 1 inhibits ocular neovascularization and breakdown of the blood-retinal barrier,” Gene Ther. 2004, 11:865-873). In fact, in mice with high expression of VEGF in the retina which develop severe NV and retinal detachment, angiopoietin 1 is able to prevent the VEGF-induced detachments.
Regulation of Tie2 also occurs through an endothelial-specific phosphatase, vascular endothelial protein tyrosine phophatase (VE-PTP) in mice (Fachinger G et al., “Functional interaction of vascular endothelial-protein-tyrosine phosphatase with the angiopoietin receptor Tie-2,” Oncogene 1999, 18:5948-5943) and its human orthologue human protein tyrosine phosphatase-β (HPTP-β) (Krueger N X et al., “Structural diversity and evolution of human receptor-like protein tyrosine phosphatases,” EMBO J. 1990, 9:3241-3252). Mice, deficient in VE-PTP die at E10 with severe defects in vascular remodeling and maturation of developing vasculature. Silencing of HPTP-β in cultured human endothelial cells, enhances Ang1-induced phosphorylation of Tie2 and survival-promoting activity while hypoxia increases expression of HPTP-β and reduces Ang1-induced phosphorylation of Tie2 (Yacyshyn O K et al., “Thyrosine phosphatase beta regulates angiopoietin-Tie2 signaling in human endothelial cells,” Angiogenesis 2009, 12:25-33).
Macular degeneration is a condition characterized by a gradual loss or impairment of eyesight due to cell and tissue degeneration of the yellow macular region in the center of the retina. Macular degeneration is often characterized as one of two types, non-exudative (dry form) or exudative (wet form). Although both types are bilateral and progressive, each type may reflect different pathological processes. The wet form of age-related macular degeneration (AMD) is the most common form of choroidal neovascularization and a leading cause of blindness in the elderly. AMD affects millions of Americans over the age of 60, and is the leading cause of new blindness among the elderly.
Choroidal neovascular membrane (CNVM) is a problem that is related to a wide variety of retinal diseases, but is most commonly linked to age-related macular degeneration. With CNVM, abnormal blood vessels stemming from the choroid (the blood vessel-rich tissue layer just beneath the retina) grow up through the retinal layers. These new vessels are very fragile and break easily, causing blood and fluid to pool within the layers of the retina.
Diabetes (diabetes mellitus) is a metabolic disease caused by the inability of the pancreas to produce insulin or to use the insulin that is produced. The most common types of diabetes are type 1 diabetes (often referred to as Juvenile Onset Diabetes Mellitus) and type 2 diabetes (often referred to as Adult Onset Diabetes Mellitus). Type 1 diabetes results from the body's failure to produce insulin due to loss of insulin producing cells, and presently requires the person to inject insulin. Type 2 diabetes generally results from insulin resistance, a condition in which cells fail to use insulin properly.
Diabetes can be correlated to a large number of other conditions, including conditions or diseases of the eye including diabetic retinopathy (DR) and diabetic macular edema (DME) which are leading causes of vision loss and blindness in most developed countries. The increasing number of individuals with diabetes worldwide suggests that DR and DME continues to be major contributors to vision loss and associated functional impairment for years to come.
Diabetic retinopathy is a complication of diabetes that results from damage to the blood vessels of the light-sensitive tissue at the back of the eye (retina). At first, diabetic retinopathy may cause no symptoms or only mild vision problems. Eventually, however, diabetic retinopathy can result in blindness. Diabetic retinopathy can develop in anyone who has type 1 diabetes or type 2 diabetes.
At its earliest stage, non-proliferative retinopathy, microaneurysms occur in the retina's tiny blood vessels. As the disease progresses, more of these blood vessels become damaged or blocked and these areas of the retina send signals into the regional tissue to grow new blood vessels for nourishment. This stage is called proliferative retinopathy. The new blood vessels grow along the retina and along the surface of the clear, vitreous gel that fills the inside of the eye. By themselves, these blood vessels do not cause symptoms or vision loss. However, they have thin, fragile walls and without timely treatment, these new blood vessels can leak blood (whole blood or some constituents thereof) which can result in severe vision loss and even blindness. Also, fluid can leak into the center of the macula, the part of the eye where sharp, straight-ahead vision occurs. The fluid and the associated protein begin to deposit on or under the macula swell the patient's central vision becomes distorted. This condition is called macular edema. It can occur at any stage of diabetic retinopathy, although it is more likely to occur as the disease progresses. About half of the people with proliferative retinopathy also have macular edema.
Uveitis is a condition in which the uvea becomes inflamed. The eye is shaped much like a tennis ball, hollow on the inside with three different layers of tissue surrounding a central cavity. The outermost is the sclera (white coat of the eye) and the innermost is the retina. The middle layer between the sclera and the retina is called the uvea. The uvea contains many of the blood vessels that nourish the eye. Complications of uveitis include glaucoma, cataracts or new blood vessel formation (neovascularization).
Ocular trauma is any sort of physical or chemical injury to the eye. Ocular trauma can affect anyone and major symptoms include redness or pain in the affected eye. Neither symptom may occur if tiny projectiles are the cause of the trauma.
Surgery-induced edema is the development of swelling in the eye tissues following surgery on the retina or other part of the eye. Cystoid macular edema (CME) is an example of this phenomenon. CME can occur not only in people who have had cataract surgery, but also those with diabetes, retinitis pigmentosa, AMD, or conditions that cause chronic inflammation in the eye. The major symptoms of CME are blurred or decreased central vision.
Ocular ischemic syndrome (OIS) encompasses the signs and symptoms that result from chronic vascular insufficiency. It is caused by ocular hypoperfusion due to occlusion or stenosis of the common or internal carotid arteries. OIS generally affects those between the ages of 50-80 and they may also have systemic diseases such as hypertension or diabetes. The major symptoms of OIS are orbital pain, vision loss, changes of the visual field, asymmetric cataract, and sluggish reaction to light, among a variety of other symptoms.
Retinal vein occlusion (RVO) is the most common retinal vascular disease after diabetic retinopathy. Depending on the area of retinal venous drainage effectively occluded, it is broadly classified as either central retinal vein occlusion (CRVO), hemispheric retinal vein occlusion (HRVO), or branch retinal vein occlusion (BRVO). It has been observed that each of these has two subtypes. Presentation of RVO in general is with variable painless visual loss with any combination of fundal findings consisting of retinal vascular tortuosity, retinal hemorrhages (blot and flame shaped), cotton wool spots, optic disc swelling and macular edema. In a CRVO, retinal hemorrhages can be found in all four quadrants of the fundus, whilst these are restricted to either the superior or inferior fundal hemisphere in a HRVO. In a BRVO, hemorrhages are largely localized to the area drained by the occluded branch retinal vein. Vision loss occurs secondary to macular edema or ischemia.
Angiogenesis, the process of creating new blood vessels from pre-existing vessels, is essential to a wide range of physiological and pathological events including embryological development, menstruation, wound healing, and tumor growth. Most, if not all, tumors require angiogenesis to grow and proliferate. VEGF has been shown to a major factor in angiogenesis where it can increase vessel permeability and capillary number. Due to the essential function of angiogenesis in tumor development, much effort has been put forth to develop therapies that target regulators of angiogenesis, including VEGF.
Vascular endothelial growth factor (VEGF) is a protein that is primarily found in endothelial cells and has functions in vasculogenesis, angiogenesis, and permeabilization of blood vessels. The expression of VEGF is induced by hypoxia, activated oncogenes, and cytokines. It has been found that VEGF activation not only leads to angiogenesis in normal human cells and tissues, but also angiogenesis in tumors, allowing for tumor progression and growth. Inhibition of VEGF inhibits tumor growth leading to tumor regression. A variety of retinopathies are associated with increased levels of VEGF; ischemia in the eye leads to an induction of VEGF production due to lack of oxygen. This increase in VEGF can cause hyperproliferation of blood vessels in the retina, eventually leading to blindness. The disclosed HPTP-β inhibitors act to stabilize ocular vasculature and, in some embodiments, a compound of the invention serves to counter act the stimulation caused by VEGF and other inflammatory agents that can be present in the diseased retina. In some embodiments, administration of HPTP-β inhibitors to a subject can be used to maintain the level of disease reversal after administration of anti-VEGF drugs to the subject have been withdrawn.
Diabetic retinopathy, if left untreated, can lead ultimately to blindness. Indeed, diabetic retinopathy is the leading cause of blindness in working-age populations.
Therefore, the disclosed methods relate to preventing, treating, controlling, abating, and/or otherwise minimizing ocular neovascularization in a subject having diabetes or a subject diagnosed with diabetes. In addition, subjects having or subjects diagnosed with diabetes can be alerted to or can be made aware of the risks of developing diabetes-related blindness, therefore the present methods can be used to prevent or delay the onset of non-proliferative retinopathy in subjects known to be at risk. Likewise, the present methods can be used for treating subjects having or being diagnosed with non-proliferative diabetic retinopathy to prevent progression of the condition.
The disclosed methods relate to preventing or controlling ocular neovascularization or treating a disease or condition that is related to the onset of ocular neovascularization by administering to a subject the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid s and one or more anti-VEGF agents as disclosed herein.
Unlike previous ocular treatments which comprise administration of an anti-VEGF agent, inter alia, ranibizumab (Lucentis™), bevacizumab (Avastin™) and aflibercept (Eylea™), wherein these vascular leak inhibitors are injected directly into the eye itself, the HPTP-β inhibitor or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be administered systemically or into the eye. The HPTP-β inhibitor or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be used to increase or enhance the effect of anti-VEGF agents, thereby improving the rate and magnitude of the response and reducing the number of treatments.
In one aspect, the HPTP-β inhibitor or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof are administered in combination with one or more pharmaceutical compounds or compositions useful for treating ocular diseases. In one embodiment, the present disclosure relates to a method for treating an ocular disease, comprising administering:
In one aspect of the disclosure the methods comprise administering:
In another aspect the methods comprise administering:
A non-limiting embodiment of this aspect relates to methods comprising administering:
The compounds can be administered in any order convenient to the user or to the subject receiving treatment. In one non-limiting example of the disclosed methods, a compound herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is administered first followed by administration of ranibizumab. In another iteration of this embodiment ranibizumab is administered first followed by administration of the compound herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. The time period between dosing/administration of the first component of treatment can be any time period convenient to the formulator or subject receiving treatment. For example, the compound herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be administered minutes, hours, days or weeks prior to the administration of ranibizumab or more than one dosage of the compound herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be given to establish a therapeutic amount in the subject being treated.
In another iteration, a compound herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof and ranibizumab can be given in alternating administrations. For example, the compound herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be administered then after a time desired by the administrator ranibizumab is administered.
In a further iteration, the compound herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof are administered daily in one or more doses and the ramibizumab is administered according to a separate schedule. For example, in addition to daily dosing of the compound herein, ranibizumab can be administered once a month, once every 2 months, once every 3 months, once every 4 months, once every 6 months, etc.
In another non-limiting example of the disclosed methods, a compound herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is administered first followed by administration of ranibizumab. In another iteration of this embodiment, ranibizumab is administered first followed by administration of the compound herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. The time period between dosing/administration of the first component of treatment can be any time period convenient to the formulator or subject receiving treatment. For example, the compound herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be administered minutes, hours, days or weeks prior to the administration of ranibizumab or more than one dosage of the compound herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be given to establish a therapeutic amount in the subject being treated.
In another iteration, the compound herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof and ranibizumab can be given in alternating administrations. For example, the compound herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be administered then after a time desired by the administrator ranibizumab is administered.
In a further iteration, the compound herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof are administered daily in one or more doses and the ramibizumab is administered according to a separate schedule. For example, in addition to daily dosing of the compound herein, ranibizumab can be administered once a month, once every 2 months, once every 3 months, once every 4 months, once every 6 months, etc.
In a further non-limiting example of the disclosed methods, a compound herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is administered first followed by administration of ranibizumab. In another iteration of this embodiment ranibizumab is administered first followed by administration of the compound herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. The time period between dosing/administration of the first component of treatment can be any time period convenient to the formulator or subject receiving treatment. For example, the compound herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be administered minutes, hours, days or weeks prior to the administration of ranibizumab or more than one dosage of the compound herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be given to establish a therapeutic amount in the subject being treated.
In another iteration, the compound herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof and ranibizumab can be given in alternating administrations. For example, the compound herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be administered then after a time desired by the administrator ranibizumab is administered.
In a further iteration, the compound herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof are administered daily in one or more doses and the ramibizumab is administered according to a separate schedule. For example, in addition to daily dosing of the compound herein, ranibizumab can be administered once a month, once every 2 months, once every 3 months, once every 4 months, once every 6 months, etc.
The dosage for ranibizumab can be in any amount necessary. In one embodiment, ranibizumab is administered in an amount from about 0.05 mg to about 1.5 mg. In a further embodiment, ranibizumab is administered in an amount from about 0.1 mg to about 1.5 mg. In another embodiment, ranibizumab is administered in an amount from about 0.05 mg to about 1 mg. In a still further embodiment, ranibizumab is administered in an amount from about 0.1 mg to about 1 mg. In one non-limiting example, ranibizumab is administered in an amount of approximately 0.5 mg. The amount of an antibody, such as ranibizumab, administered per treatment can be in any amount, for example, about 0.05 mg, about 0.06 mg, about 0.07 mg, about 0.08 mg, about 0.09 mg, about 0.1 mg, about 0.11 mg, about 0.12 mg, about 0.13 mg, about 0.14 mg, about 0.15 mg, about 0.16 mg, about 0.17, mg, about 0.18 mg, about 0.19 mg, about 0.2 mg, about 0.21 mg, about 0.22 mg, about 0.23 mg, about 0.24 mg, about 0.25 mg, about 0.26 mg, about 0.27, mg, about 0.28 mg, about 0.29 mg, about 0.3 mg, about 0.31 mg, about 0.32 mg, about 0.33 mg, about 0.34 mg, about 0.35 mg, about 0.36 mg, about 0.37, mg, about 0.38 mg, about 0.39 mg, about 0.4 mg, about 0.41 mg, about 0.42 mg, about 0.43 mg, about 0.44 mg, about 0.45 mg, about 0.46 mg, about 0.47, mg, about 0.48 mg, about 0.49 mg, about 0.5 mg, about 0.51 mg, about 0.52 mg, about 0.53 mg, about 0.54 mg, about 0.55 mg, about 0.56 mg, about 0.57, mg, about 0.58 mg, about 0.59 mg, about 0.6 mg, about 0.61 mg, about 0.62 mg, about 0.63 mg, about 0.64 mg, about 0.65 mg, about 0.66 mg, about 0.67, mg, about 0.68 mg, about 0.69 mg, about 0.7 mg, about 0.71 mg, about 0.72 mg, about 0.73 mg, about 0.74 mg, about 0.75 mg, about 0.76 mg, about 0.77, mg, about 0.78 mg, about 0.79 mg, about 0.8 mg, about 0.81 mg, about 0.82 mg, about 0.83 mg, about 0.84 mg, about 0.85 mg, about 0.86 mg, about 0.87, mg, about 0.88 mg, about 0.89 mg, about 0.9 mg, about 0.91 mg, about 0.92 mg, about 0.93 mg, about 0.94 mg, about 0.95 mg, about 0.96 mg, about 0.97, mg, about 0.98 mg, about 0.99 mg, about 1 mg, about 1.5 mg, about 2 mg, about 2.5 mg, about 3 mg, about 3.5 mg, about 4 mg, about 4.5 mg, about 5 mg, about 6 mg, about 7 mg, about 8 mg, about 9 mg, or about 10 mg.
If the antibody is not administered simultaneously with the other compound herein, then the time between administration of the compound and the antibody can range, for example, from about 1 minute, about 2 minutes, about 3 minutes, about 4 minutes, about 5 minutes, about 10 minutes, about 15 minutes, about 20 minutes, about 25 minutes, about 30 minutes, about 40 minutes, about 50 minutes, about 60 minutes, about 2 hours, about 3 hours, about 4 hours, about 5 hours, about 10 hours, about 20 hours, about 1 day, about 2 days, about 3 days, about 4 days, about 5 days, about 6 days, about 1 week, about 2 weeks, about 3 weeks, to about 4 weeks.
In another embodiment, the present disclosure relates to a method for treating an ocular disease, comprising administering:
In one aspect of the disclosure the methods comprise administering:
In another aspect the methods comprise administering:
A non-limiting embodiment of this aspect relates to methods comprising administering:
The compounds can be administered in any order convenient to the user or to the subject receiving treatment. In one non-limiting example of the disclosed methods 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is administered first followed by administration of bevacizumab. In another iteration of this embodiment bevacizumab is administered first followed by administration of the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. The time period between dosing/administration of the first component of treatment can be any time period convenient to the formulator or subject receiving treatment. For example, the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be administered minutes, hours, days or weeks prior to the administration of bevacizumab or more than one dosage of the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be given to establish a therapeutic amount in the subject being treated.
In another iteration, the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof and bevacizumab can be given in alternating administrations. For example, the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be administered then after a time desired by the administrator bevacizumab is administered.
In a further iteration, the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof are administered daily in one or more doses and the ramibizumab is administered according to a separate schedule. For example, in addition to daily dosing of the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid s, bevacizumab can be administered once a month, once every 2 months, once every 3 months, once every 4 months, once every 6 months, etc.
In another non-limiting example of the disclosed methods 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is administered first followed by administration of bevacizumab. In another iteration of this embodiment bevacizumab is administered first followed by administration of the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. The time period between dosing/administration of the first component of treatment can be any time period convenient to the formulator or subject receiving treatment. For example, the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be administered minutes, hours, days or weeks prior to the administration of bevacizumab or more than one dosage of the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be given to establish a therapeutic amount in the subject being treated.
In another iteration, the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof and bevacizumab can be given in alternating administrations. For example, the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be administered then after a time desired by the administrator bevacizumab is administered.
In a further iteration, the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof are administered daily in one or more doses and the ramibizumab is administered according to a separate schedule. For example, in addition to daily dosing of the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid s, bevacizumab can be administered once a month, once every 2 months, once every 3 months, once every 4 months, once every 6 months, etc.
In a further non-limiting example of the disclosed methods 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is administered first followed by administration of bevacizumab. In another iteration of this embodiment bevacizumab is administered first followed by administration of the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. The time period between dosing/administration of the first component of treatment can be any time period convenient to the formulator or subject receiving treatment. For example, the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be administered minutes, hours, days or weeks prior to the administration of bevacizumab or more than one dosage of the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be given to establish a therapeutic amount in the subject being treated.
In another iteration, the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof and bevacizumab can be given in alternating administrations. For example, the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be administered then after a time desired by the administrator bevacizumab is administered.
In a further iteration, the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof are administered daily in one or more doses and the ramibizumab is administered according to a separate schedule. For example, in addition to daily dosing of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, bevacizumab can be administered once a month, once every 2 months, once every 3 months, once every 4 months, once every 6 months, etc.
The dosage for bevacizumab can be in any amount necessary. In one embodiment, bevacizumab is administered in an amount from about 0.1 mg to about 5 mg. In a further embodiment, bevacizumab is administered in an amount from about 0.1 mg to about 3 mg. In another embodiment, bevacizumab is administered in an amount from about 0.5 mg to about 3 mg. In a still further embodiment, bevacizumab is administered in an amount from about 0.5 mg to about 2 mg. In one non-limiting example, bevacizumab is administered in an amount of 1.2 mg. The amount of bevacizumab administered per treatment can be in any amount, for example, about 0.5 mg, about 0.51 mg, about 0.52 mg, about 0.53 mg, about 0.54 mg, about 0.55 mg, about 0.56 mg, about 0.57, mg, about 0.58 mg, about 0.59 mg, about 0.6 mg, about 0.61 mg, about 0.62 mg, about 0.63 mg, about 0.64 mg, about 0.65 mg, about 0.66 mg, about 0.67, mg, about 0.68 mg, about 0.69 mg, about 0.7 mg, about 0.71 mg, about 0.72 mg, about 0.73 mg, about 0.74 mg, about 0.75 mg, about 0.76 mg, about 0.77, mg, about 0.78 mg, about 0.79 mg, about 0.8 mg, about 0.81 mg, about 0.82 mg, about 0.83 mg, about 0.84 mg, about 0.85 mg, about 0.86 mg, about 0.87, mg, about 0.88 mg, about 0.89 mg, about 0.9 mg, about 0.91 mg, about 0.92 mg, about 0.93 mg, about 0.94 mg, about 0.95 mg, about 0.96 mg, about 0.97, mg, about 0.98 mg, about 0.99 mg, about 1 mg, about 1.01 mg, about 1.02 mg, about 1.03 mg, about 1.04 mg, about 1.05 mg, about 1.06 mg, about 1.07, mg, about 1.08 mg, about 1.09 mg, 1.1 mg, about 1.11 mg, about 1.12 mg, about 1.13 mg, about 1.14 mg, about 1.15 mg, about 1.16 mg, about 1.17, mg, about 1.18 mg, about 1.19 mg, about 1.2 mg, about 1.21 mg, about 1.22 mg, about 1.23 mg, about 1.24 mg, about 1.25 mg, about 1.26 mg, about 1.27, mg, about 1.28 mg, about 1.29 mg, about 1.3 mg, about 1.31 mg, about 1.32 mg, about 1.33 mg, about 1.34 mg, about 1.35 mg, about 1.36 mg, about 1.37, mg, about 1.38 mg, about 1.39 mg, about 1.4 mg, about 1.41 mg, about 1.42 mg, about 1.43 mg, about 1.44 mg, about 1.45 mg, about 1.46 mg, about 1.47, mg, about 1.48 mg, about 1.49 mg, about 1.5 mg, about 1.51 mg, about 1.52 mg, about 1.53 mg, about 1.54 mg, about 1.55 mg, about 1.56 mg, about 1.57, mg, about 1.58 mg, about 1.59 mg, or about 1.6 mg.
In another embodiment, the present disclosure relates to a method for treating an ocular disease, comprising administering:
In one aspect of the disclosure the methods comprise administering:
In another aspect the methods comprise administering:
A non-limiting embodiment of this aspect relates to methods comprising administering:
The compounds can be administered in any order convenient to the user or to the subject receiving treatment. In one non-limiting example of the disclosed methods 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is administered first followed by administration of aflibercept. In another iteration of this embodiment aflibercept is administered first followed by administration of the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. The time period between dosing/administration of the first component of treatment can be any time period convenient to the formulator or subject receiving treatment. For example, the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be administered minutes, hours, days or weeks prior to the administration of aflibercept or more than one dosage of the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be given to establish a therapeutic amount in the subject being treated.
In another iteration, the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof and aflibercept can be given in alternating administrations. For example, the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be administered then after a time desired by the administrator aflibercept is administered.
In a further iteration, the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof are administered daily in one or more doses and the ramibizumab is administered according to a separate schedule. For example, in addition to daily dosing of the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid s, aflibercept can be administered once a month, once every 2 months, once every 3 months, once every 4 months, once every 6 months, etc.
In another non-limiting example of the disclosed methods 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is administered first followed by administration of aflibercept. In another iteration of this embodiment aflibercept is administered first followed by administration of the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. The time period between dosing/administration of the first component of treatment can be any time period convenient to the formulator or subject receiving treatment. For example, the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be administered minutes, hours, days or weeks prior to the administration of aflibercept or more than one dosage of the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be given to establish a therapeutic amount in the subject being treated.
In another iteration, the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof and aflibercept can be given in alternating administrations. For example, the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be administered then after a time desired by the administrator aflibercept is administered.
In a further iteration, the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof are administered daily in one or more doses and the ramibizumab is administered according to a separate schedule. For example, in addition to daily dosing of the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid s, aflibercept can be administered once a month, once every 2 months, once every 3 months, once every 4 months, once every 6 months, etc.
In a further non-limiting example of the disclosed methods 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is administered first followed by administration of aflibercept. In another iteration of this embodiment aflibercept is administered first followed by administration of the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. The time period between dosing/administration of the first component of treatment can be any time period convenient to the formulator or subject receiving treatment. For example, the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be administered minutes, hours, days or weeks prior to the administration of aflibercept or more than one dosage of the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be given to establish a therapeutic amount in the subject being treated.
In another iteration, the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof and aflibercept can be given in alternating administrations. For example, the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be administered then after a time desired by the administrator aflibercept is administered.
In a further iteration, the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof are administered daily in one or more doses and the ramibizumab is administered according to a separate schedule. For example, in addition to daily dosing of the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(4-ethylthiazol-2-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid s, aflibercept can be administered once a month, once every 2 months, once every 3 months, once every 4 months, once every 6 months, etc.
The dosage for aflibercept can be in any amount necessary. In one embodiment, aflibercept is administered in an amount from about 0.05 mg to about 5 mg. In a further embodiment, aflibercept is administered in an amount from about 0.1 mg to about 3 mg. In another embodiment, aflibercept is administered in an amount from about 0.5 mg to about 2.5 mg. In a still further embodiment, aflibercept is administered in an amount from about 0.5 mg to about 2 mg. The amount of aflibercept administered per treatment can be in any amount, for example, about 0.5 mg, about 0.51 mg, about 0.52 mg, about 0.53 mg, about 0.54 mg, about 0.55 mg, about 0.56 mg, about 0.57, mg, about 0.58 mg, about 0.59 mg, about 0.6 mg, about 0.61 mg, about 0.62 mg, about 0.63 mg, about 0.64 mg, about 0.65 mg, about 0.66 mg, about 0.67, mg, about 0.68 mg, about 0.69 mg, about 0.7 mg, about 0.71 mg, about 0.72 mg, about 0.73 mg, about 0.74 mg, about 0.75 mg, about 0.76 mg, about 0.77, mg, about 0.78 mg, about 0.79 mg, about 0.8 mg, about 0.81 mg, about 0.82 mg, about 0.83 mg, about 0.84 mg, about 0.85 mg, about 0.86 mg, about 0.87, mg, about 0.88 mg, about 0.89 mg, about 0.9 mg, about 0.91 mg, about 0.92 mg, about 0.93 mg, about 0.94 mg, about 0.95 mg, about 0.96 mg, about 0.97, mg, about 0.98 mg, about 0.99 mg, about 1 mg, about 1.01 mg, about 1.02 mg, about 1.03 mg, about 1.04 mg, about 1.05 mg, about 1.06 mg, about 1.07, mg, about 1.08 mg, about 1.09 mg, 1.1 mg, about 1.11 mg, about 1.12 mg, about 1.13 mg, about 1.14 mg, about 1.15 mg, about 1.16 mg, about 1.17, mg, about 1.18 mg, about 1.19 mg, about 1.2 mg, about 1.21 mg, about 1.22 mg, about 1.23 mg, about 1.24 mg, about 1.25 mg, about 1.26 mg, about 1.27, mg, about 1.28 mg, about 1.29 mg, about 1.3 mg, about 1.31 mg, about 1.32 mg, about 1.33 mg, about 1.34 mg, about 1.35 mg, about 1.36 mg, about 1.37, mg, about 1.38 mg, about 1.39 mg, about 1.4 mg, about 1.41 mg, about 1.42 mg, about 1.43 mg, about 1.44 mg, about 1.45 mg, about 1.46 mg, about 1.47, mg, about 1.48 mg, about 1.49 mg, about 1.5 mg, about 1.51 mg, about 1.52 mg, about 1.53 mg, about 1.54 mg, about 1.55 mg, about 1.56 mg, about 1.57, mg, about 1.58 mg, about 1.59 mg, about 1.6 mg, about 1.61 mg, about 1.62 mg, about 1.63 mg, about 1.64 mg, about 1.65 mg, about 1.66 mg, about 1.67, mg, about 1.68 mg, about 1.69 mg, about 1.7 mg, about 1.71 mg, about 1.72 mg, about 1.73 mg, about 1.74 mg, about 1.75 mg, about 1.76 mg, about 1.77, mg, about 1.78 mg, about 1.79 mg, about 1.8 mg, about 1.81 mg, about 1.82 mg, about 1.83 mg, about 1.84 mg, about 1.85 mg, about 1.86 mg, about 1.87, mg, about 1.88 mg, about 1.89 mg, about 1.9 mg, about 1.91 mg, about 1.92 mg, about 1.93 mg, about 1.94 mg, about 1.95 mg, about 1.96 mg, about 1.97, mg, about 1.98 mg, about 1.99 mg, or about 2 mg.
The HPTP-β inhibitors or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be administered in any amount necessary or convenient. For example, the compound can be administered in an amount from about 0.1 mg to about 100 mg per dose as described herein above in the disclosure relating to the compositions.
The HPTP-β inhibitors or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be administered at any interval desired. For example, the compound can be administered once a week, 2 times a week, 3 times a week, 4 times a week, 6 times a week, 6 times a week, 7 times a week, 8 times a week, 9 times a week or 10 times a week. The interval between daily dosing can be any hourly interval, for example, every hour, every 2 hours, every 3 hours, every 4 hours, every 5 hours, every 6 hours, every 7 hours, every 8 hours, every 9 hours, every 10 hours, every 11 hours, and every 12 hours. The administration of the compound can have irregular dosing schedules to accommodate either the person administering the compound or the subject receiving the compound. As such, the compound can be administered once a day, twice a day, three times a day, and the like.
In addition, the amount administered can be of the same amount in each dose or the dosage can vary. For example, a first amount dosed in the morning and a second amount administered in the evening. The dosage for administration can be varied depending upon the schedule of the anti-VEGF administration.
The HPTP-β inhibitors or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be administered in combination with any anti-VEGF agent in any combination, for example, at the beginning of the treatment, at any time during the treatment or at any time after treatment with the anti-VEGF agent has concluded. In addition, the dosage of the HPTP-β inhibitors or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be adjusted during treatment. Also, the amount of anti-VEGF agent can be adjusted during treatment.
Further non-limiting examples of anti-VEGF agents includes dexamethasone, fluocinolone and triamcinolone. In addition, the disclosed methods can include implants which deliver an anti-VEGF agent. For example, HPTP-β inhibitors or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be co-administered either before, during or after an implant is provided to a subject suffering from a disease or condition described herein. For example, Ozurdex™ is an intraviteal implant which provides a supply of dexamethasone to a subject, Retisert™ and Iluvien™ are intraviteal implants which provides a supply of fluocinolone.
In one aspect, anti-VEGF treatments if typically given monthly, can have the frequency of treatment extended, for example, to once every 3 months, once every 6 months or yearly wherein the HPTP-β inhibitor or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is administered at any frequency between treatments.
Also disclosed herein are methods for decreasing the Central Foveal Thickness (CFT) in a patient having a disease or condition as disclosed herein. The method comprises administering to an eye:
A further aspect relates to a method comprising administering to the eye:
In one aspect the decrease in Central Foveal Thickness is from about 50 μm to about 1000 μm. In one embodiment, the decrease in Central Foveal Thickness is from about 50 μm to about 750 μm. In another embodiment, the decrease in Central Foveal Thickness is from about 200 μm to about 1000 μm. In a further embodiment, the decrease in Central Foveal Thickness is from about 150 μm to about 500 μm. In a still further embodiment, the decrease in Central Foveal Thickness is from about 50 μm to about 500 μm. In a yet another embodiment, the decrease in Central Foveal Thickness is from about 250 μm to about 650 μm. In a yet still further embodiment, the decrease in Central Foveal Thickness is from about 200 μm to about 500 μm. In another still further embodiment, the decrease in Central Foveal Thickness is from about 400 μm to about 700 μm.
Further disclosed herein are methods for increasing the visual acuity of a subject having a disease or condition as disclosed herein.
Visual acuity (VA) is acuteness or clearness of vision, which is dependent on the sharpness of the retinal focus within the eye and the sensitivity of the interpretative faculty of the brain. Visual acuity is a measure of the spatial resolution of the visual processing system. VA is tested by requiring the person whose vision is being tested to identify characters typically numbers or letters on a chart from a set distance. Chart characters are represented as black symbols against a white background. The distance between the person's eyes and the testing chart is set at a sufficient distance to approximate infinity in the way the lens attempts to focus. Twenty feet, or six meters, is essentially infinity from an optical perspective. In the present disclosure, an improvement in visual acuity was assessed by an increase in the number of letters read from the chart.
Visual Acuity Testing.
One non-limiting test for measuring Visual Acuity is the use of the ESV-3000 ETDRS testing device (see, U.S. Pat. No. 5,078,486) self-calibrated test lighting. The ESV-3000 device incorporates highly advanced LED light source technology. The auto-calibration circuitry constantly monitors the LED light source and calibrates the test luminance to 85 cd/m2 or 3 cd/m2.
Although designed for clinical trials where large-format ETDRS testing (up to 20/200) is performed at 4 meters, the device can be used in a non-research setting, i.e., hospital or clinic where ocular disease monitoring is conducted. To properly evaluate ETDRS, the test should be conducted under standardized lighting conditions, for, example, photopic test level of 85 cd/m2. This light level has been recommended by the National Academy of Sciences and by the American National Standards Institute for ETDRS and contrast sensitivity vision testing. Scoring of visual acuity can be accomplished in any manner chosen by the monitor. After providing a baseline evaluation, the increase or decrease in the number of letters that can be identified by the test subject provides a measure of sight increase or decrease during treatment.
In one aspect, disclosed herein is a method for increasing visual acuity in a subject having a disease or condition of the eye as disclosed herein. This method comprises administering to a patient having a disease or condition of the eye:
A further embodiment of this aspect relates to a method for increasing visual acuity in a subject, comprising administering to a patient having a disease or condition of the eye:
In some embodiments, the disclosure provides a method for increasing visual acuity, the method comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a compound disclosed herein.
In one embodiment, the method provides a method for increasing the number of letters recognizable by a treated eye form about 1 to about 30 letters. In another embodiment, the number of letters recognizable is increased from about 5 to about 25 letters. In a further embodiment, the number of letters recognizable is increased from about 5 to about 20 letters. In another further embodiment, the number of letters recognizable is increased from about 5 to about 15 letters. In a still further embodiment, the number of letters recognizable is increased from about 5 to about 10 letters. In a yet another embodiment, the number of letters recognizable is increased from about 10 to about 25 letters. In a yet still further embodiment, the number of letters recognizable is increased from about 15 to about 25 letters. In yet still another embodiment, the number of letters recognizable is increased from about 20 to about 25 letters. The increase in visual acuity can be about 1 letter, about 5 letters, about 10 letters, about 15 letters, about 20 letters, or about 25 letters.
Described herein below is a study of four human subjects with visual acuity loss due to diabetic macular edema (central retinal thickness [CRT] of more than 325 microns and best corrected visual acuity less than 70 letters) that were treated with subcutaneous injections of 5 mg of the 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonyl-amino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid twice a day for 28 days. Improvement of visual acuity in these subjects was observed for a period of two months (days 28 through 84). At any time during the course of the study, investigators could administer additional therapy consisting of intravitreal injection of an anti-VEGF agent, for example, ranibizumab, bevacizumab and/or aflibercept, if considered by the investigator to be medically necessary. Retinal thickness as measured by ocular coherence tomography and best corrected visual acuity as measured by a standard vision test (ETDRS) were assessed at regular intervals during the 28 day active treatment phase and through the 2 month post-treatment observation phase, (Screening, Day 1 [baseline], Day 7, Day 14, Day 21, Day 28, Day 42, Day 56 and Day 84). The main efficacy outcomes for the study were change in CRT and visual acuity over time with treatment.
The room temperature aqueous solubility (mg/mL) of the a compound (4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid) in water, HPβCD, Poloxamer 407, and sulfobutylether-β-cyclodextrin, is provided in TABLE XXVII. Solubility in saline for the test compound is reduced presumably due to the common ion effect. All the solubilizing agents tested provided good improvements in aqueous solubility of the test compound.
The solubility (mg/mL) of the test compound in mixtures of HPβCD and PEG400 is illustrated in TABLE XXVIII. Use of either HPβCD or PEG400 individually provided an increase in solubility. However, addition of PEG400 to a mixture of the test compound and HPβCD caused an erosion of solubility, with solubility being inversely proportional to the amount of PEG400.
TABLE XXIX contains aqueous solution formulations of the test compound above with the denoted solvents that have been prepared and shown to be chemically stable through 1 month at 50° C., and physically stable at 5° C., at ambient temperature, and at 50° C. The formulations are more stable at pH values above pH 4. The target pH range for the formulations is pH 7+/−0.5 pH units.
aEvaluated for short-term physical stability at 5° C. and ambient temperature.
bPhysically and chemically stable through one week at room temperature and one week at 50° C.
TABLE XXX shows the solubility (mg/mL) of two compounds with varying concentrations of HPβCD. TABLE XXX shows that 25% HPβCD almost doubles the solubility of the test compounds when compared to their solubility in pure water.
A phase 1B/2A open-label, Multiple-ascending dose cohort study to assess the pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics effect of 28-day repeat subcutaneous dose of 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid (drug) in subjects with diffuse diabetic macular edema (DME).
The aim of this study was to evaluate tolerability, safety, efficacy and pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics in patients with DME involving the center of the fovea with central subfield mean thickness ≧325 μm measured by spectral domain-optical coherence tomography (SD-OCT).
Twenty-four patients were administered ascending doses of test compound twice daily (BID) for 28 days in 4 separate cohorts at 5, 15, 22.5 or 30 mg BID, respectively.
Drug was supplied as a lyophilized powder in a vial for reconstitution. Each vial contained 100 mg drug and 250 mg HPβCD. Vials were reconstituted with sterile 5% dextrose for cohort 1 (5 mg BID) and with sterile diluent containing 5% HPβCD/1% dextrose for cohorts 2, 3, and 4 (15 mg, 22.5 mg and 30 mg BID).
For cohorts 1 (5 mg BID) and 2 (15 mg BID) the volume administered for each dose was 0.5 ml (10 and 30 mg/ml, respectively) and for cohorts 3 and 4 the volume was 0.75 ml (30 and 40 mg/ml, respectively).
Blood samples for pharmacokinetic profiling were taken pre-dose (0), 15 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, 3 hours and 4 hours after administration of the first dose on day 14.
Plasma drug concentration was determined with a validated LC/MS-MS method. The pharmacokinetic (PK) parameters were determined using a standard non-compartmental method, and Cmax, AUClast (with last being from time 0 to the last quantifiable point), AUCinf, were analyzed statistically using log-transformed data. The dose proportionality 90% confidence intervals were calculated from the mean.
The PK/PD parameter data and statistical analyses are provided in Tables XXXI to XXXV (Day 14).
In some embodiments, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition in unit dose form for subcutaneously delivery of a composition comprising an HPTP-β inhibitor and 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin wherein the mean Cmax of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of a Cmax of 80 ng/ml, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human.
In some embodiments, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition in unit dose form for subcutaneously delivery of a composition comprising an HPTP-β inhibitor and 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin wherein the mean AUClast of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of an AUClast of 100 ng·hr/ml, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human.
In some embodiments, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition in unit dose form for subcutaneously delivery of a composition comprising an HPTP-β inhibitor and 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin wherein the mean AUClast of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of an AUCinf of 100 ng·hr/ml, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human.
In some embodiments, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition in unit dose form for subcutaneously delivery of a composition comprising an HPTP-β inhibitor and 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin wherein the mean t1/2 of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of at t1/2 of 1 hour, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human.
In some embodiments, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition in unit dose form for subcutaneously delivery of a composition comprising an HPTP-β inhibitor and 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin wherein the mean Cmax of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of a Cmax of 80 ng/ml, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human; and wherein the mean AUClast of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of an AUClast of 100 ng·hr/ml, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human.
In some embodiments, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition in unit dose form for subcutaneously delivery of a composition comprising an HPTP-β inhibitor and 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin wherein the mean Cmax of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of a Cmax of 80 ng/ml, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human; and wherein the mean AUClast of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of an AUCinf of 100 ng·hr/ml, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human.
In some embodiments, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition in unit dose form for subcutaneously delivery of a composition comprising an HPTP-β inhibitor and 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin wherein the mean Cmax of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of a Cmax of 80 ng/ml, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human; and wherein the mean t1/2 of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of a t1/2 of 1 hour, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human.
In some embodiments, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition in unit dose form for subcutaneously delivery of a composition comprising an HPTP-β inhibitor and 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin wherein the mean Cmax of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of a Cmax of 150 ng/ml, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human.
In some embodiments, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition in unit dose form for subcutaneously delivery of a composition comprising an HPTP-β inhibitor and 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin wherein the mean AUClast of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of an AUClast of 217 ng·hr/ml, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human.
In some embodiments, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition in unit dose form for subcutaneously delivery of a composition comprising an HPTP-β inhibitor and 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin wherein the mean AUClast of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of an AUCinf of 255 ng·hr/ml, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human.
In some embodiments, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition in unit dose form for subcutaneously delivery of a composition comprising an HPTP-β inhibitor and 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin wherein the mean Cmax of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of a Cmax of 150 ng/ml, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human; and wherein the mean AUClast of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of an AUClast of 217 ng·hr/ml, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human.
In some embodiments, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition in unit dose form for subcutaneously delivery of a composition comprising an HPTP-β inhibitor and 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin wherein the mean Cmax of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of a Cmax of 150 ng/ml, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human; and wherein the mean AUClast of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of an AUCinf of 255 ng·hr/ml, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human.
In some embodiments, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition in unit dose form for subcutaneously delivery of a composition comprising an HPTP-β inhibitor and 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin wherein the mean Cmax of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of a Cmax of 150 ng/ml, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human; and wherein the mean t1/2 of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of at t1/2 of 1 hour, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human.
In some embodiments, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition in unit dose form for subcutaneously delivery of a composition comprising an HPTP-β inhibitor and 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin wherein the mean Cmax of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of a Cmax of 240 ng/ml, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human.
In some embodiments, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition in unit dose form for subcutaneously delivery of a composition comprising an HPTP-β inhibitor and 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin wherein the mean AUClast of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of an AUClast of 440 ng·hr/ml, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human.
In some embodiments, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition in unit dose form for subcutaneously delivery of a composition comprising an HPTP-β inhibitor and 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin wherein the mean AUClast of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of an AUCinf of 500 ng·hr/ml, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human.
In some embodiments, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition in unit dose form for subcutaneously delivery of a composition comprising an HPTP-β inhibitor and 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin wherein the mean Cmax of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of a Cmax of 240 ng/ml, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human; and wherein the mean AUClast of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of an AUClast of 440 ng·hr/ml, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human.
In some embodiments, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition in unit dose form for subcutaneously delivery of a composition comprising an HPTP-β inhibitor and 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin wherein the mean Cmax of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of a Cmax of 240 ng/ml, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human; and wherein the mean AUClast of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of an AUCinf of 500 ng·hr/ml, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human.
In some embodiments, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition in unit dose form for subcutaneously delivery of a composition comprising an HPTP-β inhibitor and 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin wherein the mean Cmax of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of a Cmax of 240 ng/ml, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human; and wherein the mean t1/2 of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of at t1/2 of 1 hour, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human.
In some embodiments, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition in unit dose form for subcutaneously delivery of a composition comprising an HPTP-β inhibitor and 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin wherein the mean Cmax of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of a Cmax of 300 ng/ml, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human.
In some embodiments, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition in unit dose form for subcutaneously delivery of a composition comprising an HPTP-β inhibitor and 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin wherein the mean AUClast of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of an AUClast of 640 ng·hr/ml, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human.
In some embodiments, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition in unit dose form for subcutaneously delivery of a composition comprising an HPTP-β inhibitor and 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin wherein the mean AUClast of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of an AUCinf of 830 ng·hr/ml, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human.
In some embodiments, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition in unit dose form for subcutaneously delivery of a composition comprising an HPTP-β inhibitor and 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin wherein the mean Cmax of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of a Cmax of 300 ng/ml, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human; and wherein the mean AUClast of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of an AUClast of 640 ng·hr/ml, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human.
In some embodiments, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition in unit dose form for subcutaneously delivery of a composition comprising an HPTP-β inhibitor and 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin wherein the mean Cmax of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of a Cmax of 300 ng/ml, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human; and wherein the mean AUClast of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of an AUCinf of 830 ng·hr/ml, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human.
In some embodiments, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition in unit dose form for subcutaneously delivery of a composition comprising an HPTP-β inhibitor and 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin wherein the mean Cmax of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of a Cmax of 300 ng/ml, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human; and wherein the mean t1/2 of the HPTP-β inhibitor is within 70% to 130% of at t1/2 of 1 hour, after administration of a single dose of the HPTP-β inhibitor to a human.
In some embodiments, the HPTP-β inhibitor is 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[2-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-4-yl]ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid.
In some embodiments, the HPTP-β inhibitor is (4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-[4-ethylthiazol-2-yl]ethyl}phenyl)sulfamic acid.
In some embodiments, the HPTP-β inhibitor is 4-{(S)-2-[(S)-2-(methoxycarbonylamino)-3-phenylpropanamido]-2-(2-ethylthiazol-4-yl)ethyl}phenylsulfamic acid.
In some embodiments, the HPTP-β inhibitor is (4-((S)-2-((S)-2-((methoxycarbonyl)amino)-3-phenylpropanamido)-2-(4-(thiophen-2-yl)thiazol-2-yl)ethyl)phenyl)sulfamic acid.
A dose can be modulated to achieve a desired pharmacokinetic or pharmacodynamics profile, such as a desired or effective blood profile, as described herein.
Pharmacokinetic and pharmacodynamic data can be obtained by various experimental techniques. Appropriate pharmacokinetic and pharmacodynamic profile components describing a particular composition can vary due to variations in drug metabolism in human subjects. Pharmacokinetic and pharmacodynamic profiles can be based on the determination of the mean parameters of a group of subjects. The group of subjects includes any reasonable number of subjects suitable for determining a representative mean, for example, 5 subjects, 10 subjects, 15 subjects, 20 subjects, 25 subjects, 30 subjects, 35 subjects, or more. The mean is determined, for example, by calculating the average of all subject's measurements for each parameter measured. A dose can be modulated to achieve a desired pharmacokinetic or pharmacodynamics profile, such as a desired or effective blood profile, as described herein.
The pharmacodynamic parameters can be any parameters suitable for describing compositions of the invention. For example, the pharmacodynamic profile can be obtained at a time after dosing of, for example, about zero minutes, about 1 minute, about 2 minutes, about 3 minutes, about 4 minutes, about 5 minutes, about 6 minutes, about 7 minutes, about 8 minutes, about 9 minutes, about 10 minutes, about 11 minutes, about 12 minutes, about 13 minutes, about 14 minutes, about 15 minutes, about 16 minutes, about 17 minutes, about 18 minutes, about 19 minutes, about 20 minutes, about 21 minutes, about 22 minutes, about 23 minutes, about 24 minutes, about 25 minutes, about 26 minutes, about 27 minutes, about 28 minutes, about 29 minutes, about 30 minutes, about 31 minutes, about 32 minutes, about 33 minutes, about 34 minutes, about 35 minutes, about 36 minutes, about 37 minutes, about 38 minutes, about 39 minutes, about 40 minutes, about 41 minutes, about 42 minutes, about 43 minutes, about 44 minutes, about 45 minutes, about 46 minutes, about 47 minutes, about 48 minutes, about 49 minutes, about 50 minutes, about 51 minutes, about 52 minutes, about 53 minutes, about 54 minutes, about 55 minutes, about 56 minutes, about 57 minutes, about 58 minutes, about 59 minutes, about 60 minutes, about zero hours, about 0.5 hours, about 1 hour, about 1.5 hours, about 2 hours, about 2.5 hours, about 3 hours, about 3.5 hours, about 4 hours, about 4.5 hours, about 5 hours, about 5.5 hours, about 6 hours, about 6.5 hours, about 7 hours, about 7.5 hours, about 8 hours, about 8.5 hours, about 9 hours, about 9.5 hours, about 10 hours, about 10.5 hours, about 11 hours, about 11.5 hours, about 12 hours, about 12.5 hours, about 13 hours, about 13.5 hours, about 14 hours, about 14.5 hours, about 15 hours, about 15.5 hours, about 16 hours, about 16.5 hours, about 17 hours, about 17.5 hours, about 18 hours, about 18.5 hours, about 19 hours, about 19.5 hours, about 20 hours, about 20.5 hours, about 21 hours, about 21.5 hours, about 22 hours, about 22.5 hours, about 23 hours, about 23.5 hours, or about 24 hours.
The pharmacokinetic parameters can be any parameters suitable for describing a compound. The Cmax can be, for example, not less than about 1 ng/mL; not less than about 5 ng/mL; not less than about 10 ng/mL; not less than about 15 ng/mL; not less than about 20 ng/mL; not less than about 25 ng/mL; not less than about 50 ng/mL; not less than about 75 ng/mL; not less than about 100 ng/mL; not less than about 200 ng/mL; not less than about 300 ng/mL; not less than about 400 ng/mL; not less than about 500 ng/mL; not less than about 600 ng/mL; not less than about 700 ng/mL; not less than about 800 ng/mL; not less than about 900 ng/mL; not less than about 1000 ng/mL; not less than about 1250 ng/mL; not less than about 1500 ng/mL; not less than about 1750 ng/mL; not less than about 2000 ng/mL; or any other Cmax appropriate for describing a pharmacokinetic profile of a compound described herein. The Cmax can be, for example, about 1 ng/mL to about 5,000 ng/mL; about 1 ng/mL to about 4,500 ng/mL; about 1 ng/mL to about 4,000 ng/mL; about 1 ng/mL to about 3,500 ng/mL; about 1 ng/mL to about 3,000 ng/mL; about 1 ng/mL to about 2,500 ng/mL; about 1 ng/mL to about 2,000 ng/mL; about 1 ng/mL to about 1,500 ng/mL; about 1 ng/mL to about 1,000 ng/mL; about 1 ng/mL to about 900 ng/mL; about 1 ng/mL to about 800 ng/mL; about 1 ng/mL to about 700 ng/mL; about 1 ng/mL to about 600 ng/mL; about 1 ng/mL to about 500 ng/mL; about 1 ng/mL to about 450 ng/mL; about 1 ng/mL to about 400 ng/mL; about 1 ng/mL to about 350 ng/mL; about 1 ng/mL to about 300 ng/mL; about 1 ng/mL to about 250 ng/mL; about 1 ng/mL to about 200 ng/mL; about 1 ng/mL to about 150 ng/mL; about 1 ng/mL to about 125 ng/mL; about 1 ng/mL to about 100 ng/mL; about 1 ng/mL to about 90 ng/mL; about 1 ng/mL to about 80 ng/mL; about 1 ng/mL to about 70 ng/mL; about 1 ng/mL to about 60 ng/mL; about 1 ng/mL to about 50 ng/mL; about 1 ng/mL to about 40 ng/mL; about 1 ng/mL to about 30 ng/mL; about 1 ng/mL to about 20 ng/mL; about 1 ng/mL to about 10 ng/mL; about 1 ng/mL to about 5 ng/mL; about 10 ng/mL to about 4,000 ng/mL; about 10 ng/mL to about 3,000 ng/mL; about 10 ng/mL to about 2,000 ng/mL; about 10 ng/mL to about 1,500 ng/mL; about 10 ng/mL to about 1,000 ng/mL; about 10 ng/mL to about 900 ng/mL; about 10 ng/mL to about 800 ng/mL; about 10 ng/mL to about 700 ng/mL; about 10 ng/mL to about 600 ng/mL; about 10 ng/mL to about 500 ng/mL; about 10 ng/mL to about 400 ng/mL; about 10 ng/mL to about 300 ng/mL; about 10 ng/mL to about 200 ng/mL; about 10 ng/mL to about 100 ng/mL; about 10 ng/mL to about 50 ng/mL; about 25 ng/mL to about 500 ng/mL; about 25 ng/mL to about 100 ng/mL; about 50 ng/mL to about 500 ng/mL; about 50 ng/mL to about 100 ng/mL; about 100 ng/mL to about 500 ng/mL; about 100 ng/mL to about 400 ng/mL; about 100 ng/mL to about 300 ng/mL; or about 100 ng/mL to about 200 ng/mL.
The Tmax of a compound described herein can be, for example, not greater than about 0.5 hours, not greater than about 1 hours, not greater than about 1.5 hours, not greater than about 2 hours, not greater than about 2.5 hours, not greater than about 3 hours, not greater than about 3.5 hours, not greater than about 4 hours, not greater than about 4.5 hours, not greater than about 5 hours, or any other Tmax appropriate for describing a pharmacokinetic profile of a compound described herein. The Tmax can be, for example, about 0.1 hours to about 24 hours; about 0.1 hours to about 0.5 hours; about 0.5 hours to about 1 hour; about 1 hour to about 1.5 hours; about 1.5 hours to about 2 hour; about 2 hours to about 2.5 hours; about 2.5 hours to about 3 hours; about 3 hours to about 3.5 hours; about 3.5 hours to about 4 hours; about 4 hours to about 4.5 hours; about 4.5 hours to about 5 hours; about 5 hours to about 5.5 hours; about 5.5 hours to about 6 hours; about 6 hours to about 6.5 hours; about 6.5 hours to about 7 hours; about 7 hours to about 7.5 hours; about 7.5 hours to about 8 hours; about 8 hours to about 8.5 hours; about 8.5 hours to about 9 hours; about 9 hours to about 9.5 hours; about 9.5 hours to about 10 hours; about 10 hours to about 10.5 hours; about 10.5 hours to about 11 hours; about 11 hours to about 11.5 hours; about 11.5 hours to about 12 hours; about 12 hours to about 12.5 hours; about 12.5 hours to about 13 hours; about 13 hours to about 13.5 hours; about 13.5 hours to about 14 hours; about 14 hours to about 14.5 hours; about 14.5 hours to about 15 hours; about 15 hours to about 15.5 hours; about 15.5 hours to about 16 hours; about 16 hours to about 16.5 hours; about 16.5 hours to about 17 hours; about 17 hours to about 17.5 hours; about 17.5 hours to about 18 hours; about 18 hours to about 18.5 hours; about 18.5 hours to about 19 hours; about 19 hours to about 19.5 hours; about 19.5 hours to about 20 hours; about 20 hours to about 20.5 hours; about 20.5 hours to about 21 hours; about 21 hours to about 21.5 hours; about 21.5 hours to about 22 hours; about 22 hours to about 22.5 hours; about 22.5 hours to about 23 hours; about 23 hours to about 23.5 hours; or about 23.5 hours to about 24 hours.
The AUC(0-inf) or AUC(last) of a compound described herein can be, for example, not less than about 1 ng·hr/mL, not less than about 5 ng·hr/mL, not less than about 10 ng·hr/mL, not less than about 20 ng·hr/mL, not less than about 30 ng·hr/mL, not less than about 40 ng·hr/mL, not less than about 50 ng·hr/mL, not less than about 100 ng·hr/mL, not less than about 150 ng·hr/mL, not less than about 200 ng·hr/mL, not less than about 250 ng·hr/mL, not less than about 300 ng·hr/mL, not less than about 350 ng·hr/mL, not less than about 400 ng·hr/mL, not less than about 450 ng·hr/mL, not less than about 500 ng·hr/mL, not less than about 600 ng·hr/mL, not less than about 700 ng·hr/mL, not less than about 800 ng·hr/mL, not less than about 900 ng·hr/mL, not less than about 1000 ng·hr/mL, not less than about 1250 ng·hr/mL, not less than about 1500 ng·hr/mL, not less than about 1750 ng·hr/mL, not less than about 2000 ng·hr/mL, not less than about 2500 ng·hr/mL, not less than about 3000 ng·hr/mL, not less than about 3500 ng·hr/mL, not less than about 4000 ng·hr/mL, not less than about 5000 ng·hr/mL, not less than about 6000 ng·hr/mL, not less than about 7000 ng·hr/mL, not less than about 8000 ng·hr/mL, not less than about 9000 ng·hr/mL, not less than about 10,000 ng·hr/mL, or any other AUC(0-inf) appropriate for describing a pharmacokinetic profile of a compound described herein. The AUC(0-inf) of a compound can be, for example, about 1 ng·hr/mL to about 10,000 ng·hr/mL; about 1 ng·hr/mL to about 10 ng·hr/mL; about 10 ng·hr/mL to about 25 ng·hr/mL; about 25 ng·hr/mL to about 50 ng·hr/mL; about 50 ng·hr/mL to about 100 ng·hr/mL; about 100 ng·hr/mL to about 200 ng·hr/mL; about 200 ng·hr/mL to about 300 ng·hr/mL; about 300 ng·hr/mL to about 400 ng·hr/mL; about 400 ng·hr/mL to about 500 ng·hr/mL; about 500 ng·hr/mL to about 600 ng·hr/mL; about 600 ng·hr/mL to about 700 ng·hr/mL; about 700 ng·hr/mL to about 800 ng·hr/mL; about 800 ng·hr/mL to about 900 ng·hr/mL; about 900 ng·hr/mL to about 1,000 ng·hr/mL; about 1,000 ng·hr/mL to about 1,250 ng·hr/mL; about 1,250 ng·hr/mL to about 1,500 ng·hr/mL; about 1,500 ng·hr/mL to about 1,750 ng·hr/mL; about 1,750 ng·hr/mL to about 2,000 ng·hr/mL; about 2,000 ng·hr/mL to about 2,500 ng·hr/mL; about 2,500 ng·hr/mL to about 3,000 ng·hr/mL; about 3,000 ng·hr/mL to about 3,500 ng·hr/mL; about 3,500 ng·hr/mL to about 4,000 ng·hr/mL; about 4,000 ng·hr/mL to about 4,500 ng·hr/mL; about 4,500 ng·hr/mL to about 5,000 ng·hr/mL; about 5,000 ng·hr/mL to about 5,500 ng·hr/mL; about 5,500 ng·hr/mL to about 6,000 ng·hr/mL; about 6,000 ng·hr/mL to about 6,500 ng·hr/mL; about 6,500 ng·hr/mL to about 7,000 ng·hr/mL; about 7,000 ng·hr/mL to about 7,500 ng·hr/mL; about 7,500 ng·hr/mL to about 8,000 ng·hr/mL; about 8,000 ng·hr/mL to about 8,500 ng·hr/mL; about 8,500 ng·hr/mL to about 9,000 ng·hr/mL; about 9,000 ng·hr/mL to about 9,500 ng·hr/mL; or about 9,500 ng·hr/mL to about 10,000 ng·hr/mL.
The plasma concentration of a compound described herein can be, for example, not less than about 1 ng/mL, not less than about 5 ng/mL, not less than about 10 ng/mL, not less than about 15 ng/mL, not less than about 20 ng/mL, not less than about 25 ng/mL, not less than about 50 ng/mL, not less than about 75 ng/mL, not less than about 100 ng/mL, not less than about 150 ng/mL, not less than about 200 ng/mL, not less than about 300 ng/mL, not less than about 400 ng/mL, not less than about 500 ng/mL, not less than about 600 ng/mL, not less than about 700 ng/mL, not less than about 800 ng/mL, not less than about 900 ng/mL, not less than about 1000 ng/mL, not less than about 1200 ng/mL, or any other plasma concentration of a compound described herein. The plasma concentration can be, for example, about 1 ng/mL to about 2,000 ng/mL; about 1 ng/mL to about 5 ng/mL; about 5 ng/mL to about 10 ng/mL; about 10 ng/mL to about 25 ng/mL; about 25 ng/mL to about 50 ng/mL; about 50 ng/mL to about 75 ng/mL; about 75 ng/mL to about 100 ng/mL; about 100 ng/mL to about 150 ng/mL; about 150 ng/mL to about 200 ng/mL; about 200 ng/mL to about 250 ng/mL; about 250 ng/mL to about 300 ng/mL; about 300 ng/mL to about 350 ng/mL; about 350 ng/mL to about 400 ng/mL; about 400 ng/mL to about 450 ng/mL; about 450 ng/mL to about 500 ng/mL; about 500 ng/mL to about 600 ng/mL; about 600 ng/mL to about 700 ng/mL; about 700 ng/mL to about 800 ng/mL; about 800 ng/mL to about 900 ng/mL; about 900 ng/mL to about 1,000 ng/mL; about 1,000 ng/mL to about 1,100 ng/mL; about 1,100 ng/mL to about 1,200 ng/mL; about 1,200 ng/mL to about 1,300 ng/mL; about 1,300 ng/mL to about 1,400 ng/mL; about 1,400 ng/mL to about 1,500 ng/mL; about 1,500 ng/mL to about 1,600 ng/mL; about 1,600 ng/mL to about 1,700 ng/mL; about 1,700 ng/mL to about 1,800 ng/mL; about 1,800 ng/mL to about 1,900 ng/mL; or about 1,900 ng/mL to about 2,000 ng/mL.
The pharmacodynamic parameters can be any parameters suitable for describing compositions of the disclosure. For example, the pharmacodynamic profile can exhibit decreases in viability phenotype for the tumor cells or tumor size reduction in tumor cell lines or xenograft studies, for example, about 24 hours, about 48 hours, about 72 hours, or 1 week.
Non-limiting examples of pharmacodynamic and pharmacokinetic parameters that can be calculated for a compound that is administered with the methods of the invention include: a) the amount of drug administered, which can be represented as a dose D; b) the dosing interval, which can be represented as τ; c) the apparent volume in which a drug is distributed, which can be represented as a volume of distribution Vd, where Vd=D/C0; d) the amount of drug in a given volume of plasma, which can be represented as concentration C0 or Css, where C0 or Css=D/Vd and can be represented as a mean plasma concentration over a plurality of samples; e) the half-life of a drug t1/2, where t1/2=ln(2)/ke; f) the rate at which a drug is removed from the body ke, where ke=ln(2)/t1/2=CL/Vd; g) the rate of infusion required to balance the equation Kin, where Kin=Css·CL; h) the integral of the concentration-time curve after administration of a single dose, which can be represented as AUC0-∞, wherein ∫0∞ C dt, or in steady-state, which can be represented as AUCτ, ss, wherein ∫tt+π C dt; i) the volume of plasma cleared of the drug per unit time, which can be represented as CL (clearance), wherein CL=Vd·ke=D/AUC; j) the systemically available fraction of a drug, which can be represented as f, where
the peak plasma concentration of a drug after administration Cmax; 1) the time taken by a drug to reach Cmax, tmax; m) the lowest concentration that a drug reaches before the next dose is administered Cmin; and n) the peak trough fluctuation within one dosing interval at steady state, which can be represented as
The following are illustrative embodiments.
A method of treating a condition in a subject in need thereof, the method comprising administering to the subject a therapeutically-effective amount of a compound that activates Tie-2, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof, and an agent that increases solubility of the compound that activates Tie-2, or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof as compared to solubility in absence of the agent.
The method of embodiment A1, wherein the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof binds HPTP-beta.
The method of embodiment A1, wherein the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof inhibits HPTP-beta.
The method of embodiment A1, wherein the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof is a phosphate mimetic.
The method of embodiment A1, wherein the compound that activates Tie-2 comprises an amino acid backbone.
The method of embodiment A1, wherein the compound that activates Tie-2 comprises a sulfamic acid.
The method of embodiment A1, wherein the agent that improves the aqueous solubility of the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof comprises a polymer.
The method of embodiment A1, wherein the agent that improves the aqueous solubility of the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof comprises a poly-ethylene glycol moiety.
The method of embodiment A1, wherein the agent that improves the aqueous solubility of the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof comprises a cyclodextrin moiety.
The method of embodiment A1, wherein the agent that improves the aqueous solubility of the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof comprises a 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin moiety.
The method of embodiment A1, wherein the agent that improves the aqueous solubility of the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof comprises a sulfobutylether-β-cyclodextrin moiety.
The method of embodiment A1, wherein the compound that activates Tie-2, or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof, and the agent that improves the aqueous solubility of the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof are held in a complex by non-covalent interactions.
The method of embodiment A1, wherein the agent that improves the aqueous solubility of the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof comprises a surfactant moiety.
The method of embodiment A1, wherein the agent that increases solubility of the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof increases aqueous solubility by at least 10% at each of 5° C., ambient temperature, and 50° C.
The method of embodiment A1, wherein the agent that increases solubility of the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof increases aqueous solubility by at least 25%.
The method of embodiment A1, wherein the agent that increases solubility of the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof increases aqueous solubility by at least 50%.
The method of embodiment A1, wherein the therapeutically-effective amount is from about 0.1 mg to about 100 mg.
The method of embodiment A1, wherein the therapeutically-effective amount is from about 0.5 mg to about 30 mg.
The method of embodiment A1, wherein the compound that activates Tie-2, or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof, and the agent that improves the aqueous solubility of the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof are coadministered in a unit dosage form.
The method of embodiment A19, wherein the unit dosage form is administered subcutaneously.
The method of embodiment A19, wherein the unit dosage form is administered to an eye.
The method of embodiment A1, wherein the condition is an ocular condition.
The method of embodiment A1, wherein the condition is diabetic macular edema.
The method of embodiment A1, wherein the condition is diabetic retinopathy.
The method of embodiment A1, wherein the condition is macular degeneration.
The method of embodiment A1, wherein the condition is vascular leak.
The method of embodiment A1, wherein the condition is a cancer.
The method of embodiment A1, wherein the subject is a human.
The method of embodiment A1, wherein the subject's visual acuity improves by at least 5 letters.
The method of embodiment A1, wherein the compound that activates Tie-2 is a compound of the formula:
wherein aryl1 is an aryl group which is substituted or unsubstituted, aryl2 is an aryl group which is substituted or unsubstituted, X is alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, an ether linkage, an amine linkage, an amide linkage, an ester linkage, a thioether linkage, a carbamate linkage, a carbonate linkage, a urethane linkage, a sulfone linkage, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted, or a chemical bond, and Y is H, aryl, heteroaryl, NH(aryl), NH(heteroaryl), NHSO2Rg, or NHCORg, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted, or
wherein L2 is alkylene, alkenylene, or alkynylene, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted, or together with the nitrogen atom to which L is bound forms an amide linkage, a carbamate linkage, a urethane linkage, or a sulfonamide linkage, or a chemical bond, or together with any of Ra, Rb, Rc, and Rd forms a ring that is substituted or unsubstituted. Ra is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted, or together with any of L2, Rb, Rc, and Rd forms a ring that is substituted or unsubstituted. Rb is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted, or together with any of L2, Ra, Rc, and Rd forms a ring that is substituted or unsubstituted. Rc is H or alkyl which is substituted or unsubstituted, or together with any of L2, Ra, Rb, and Rd forms a ring that is substituted or unsubstituted. Rd is H or alkyl which is substituted or unsubstituted, or together with any of L2, Ra, Rb, and Rc forms a ring that is substituted or unsubstituted, and Rg is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt, tautomer, or zwitterion thereof.
The method of embodiment A30, wherein aryl1 is substituted or unsubstituted phenyl, aryl2 is substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, and X is alkylene.
The method of embodiment A31, wherein aryl1 is substituted phenyl, aryl2 is substituted heteroaryl, and X is methylene.
The method of embodiment A32, wherein the compound that activates Tie-2 is a compound of the formula:
wherein aryl1 is para-substituted phenyl, aryl2 is substituted heteroaryl, X is methylene. L2 is alkylene, alkenylene, or alkynylene, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted, or together with the nitrogen atom to which L is bound forms an amide linkage, a carbamate linkage, a urethane linkage, or a sulfonamide linkage, or a chemical bond. Ra is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted. Rb is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted. Rc is H or alkyl which is substituted or unsubstituted, and Rd is H or alkyl which is substituted or unsubstituted.
The method of embodiment A33, wherein aryl1 is para-substituted phenyl, aryl2 is a substituted thiazole moiety. X is methylene, L2 together with the nitrogen atom to which L is bound forms a carbamate linkage, Ra is alkyl, which is substituted or unsubstituted, Rb is arylalkyl, which is substituted or unsubstituted, Rc is H, and Rd is H.
The method of embodiment A34, wherein Aryl2 is:
wherein Re is H, OH, F, Cl, Br, I, CN, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, an alkoxy group, an ether group, a carboxylic acid group, a carboxaldehyde group, an ester group, an amine group, an amide group, a carbonate group, a carbamate group, a urethane group, a thioether group, a thioester group, a thioacid group, aryl, arylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted, and Rf is H, OH, F, Cl, Br, I, CN, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, an alkoxy group, an ether group, a carboxylic acid group, a carboxaldehyde group, an ester group, an amine group, an amide group, a carbonate group, a carbamate group, a urethane group, a thioether group, a thioester group, a thioacid group, aryl, arylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted.
The method of embodiment A35, wherein Re is H, OH, F, Cl, Br, I, alkyl, an alkoxy group, aryl, arylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted, and Rf is H, OH, F, Cl, Br, I, alkyl, an alkoxy group, aryl, arylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted.
The method of embodiment A35, wherein Re is H, OH, F, Cl, Br, I, alkyl, or an alkoxy group, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted and Rf is alkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted.
The method of embodiment A35, wherein aryl1 is 4-phenylsulfamic acid, Ra is alkyl, which is substituted or unsubstituted, Rb is arylalkyl, which is substituted or unsubstituted, Re is H; and Rf is heteroaryl.
The method of embodiment A30, wherein the compound is:
The method of embodiment A30, wherein the compound is:
The method of embodiment A35, wherein aryl1 is 4-phenylsulfamic acid, Ra is alkyl, which is substituted or unsubstituted, Rb is arylalkyl, which is substituted or unsubstituted, Re is H; and Rf is alkyl.
The method of embodiment A30, wherein the compound is:
The method of embodiment A32, wherein the compound is:
The method of embodiment A34, wherein Aryl2 is:
wherein Re is H, OH, F, Cl, Br, I, CN, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, an alkoxy group, an ether group, a carboxylic acid group, a carboxaldehyde group, an ester group, an amine group, an amide group, a carbonate group, a carbamate group, a urethane group, a thioether group, a thioester group, a thioacid group, aryl, arylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted, Rf is H, OH, F, Cl, Br, I, CN, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, an alkoxy group, an ether group, a carboxylic acid group, a carboxaldehyde group, an ester group, an amine group, an amide group, a carbonate group, a carbamate group, a urethane group, a thioether group, a thioester group, a thioacid group, aryl, arylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted.
The method of embodiment A44, wherein Re is H, OH, F, Cl, Br, I, alkyl, an alkoxy group, aryl, arylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted and Rf is H, OH, F, Cl, Br, I, alkyl, an alkoxy group, aryl, arylalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroarylalkyl, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted.
The method of embodiment A44, wherein Re is H, OH, F, Cl, Br, I, alkyl, or an alkoxy group, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted and Rf is alkyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl, any of which is substituted or unsubstituted.
The method of embodiment A44, wherein aryl1 is 4-phenylsulfamic acid, Ra is alkyl, which is substituted or unsubstituted, Rb is arylalkyl, which is substituted or unsubstituted, Re is H; and Rf is heteroaryl.
The method of embodiment A30, wherein the compound is:
The method of embodiment A30, wherein the compound is:
The method of embodiment A40, wherein the agent that improves the aqueous solubility of the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof comprises a 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin moiety.
The method of embodiment A50, wherein the condition is diabetic macular edema.
The method of embodiment A51, wherein a plasma concentration in the subject of the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof is no greater than 500 ng/mL at about 0.25 hours after the administration.
The method of embodiment A51, wherein a plasma concentration in the subject of the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof is about 50 ng/mL to about 350 ng/mL at about 0.25 hours after the administration; about 30 ng/mL to about 350 ng/mL at about 1 hour after the administration; about 10 ng/mL to about 200 ng/mL at about 2 hours after the administration; and about 0 ng/mL to about 50 ng/mL at about 4 hours after the administration.
The method of embodiment A51, wherein a plasma concentration in the subject of the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof is for administration of a dose of about 5 mg, about 50 ng/mL to about 100 ng/mL at about 0.25 hours after the administration; about 30 ng/mL to about 80 ng/mL at about 1 hour after the administration; about 10 ng/mL to about 50 ng/mL at about 2 hours after the administration; and about 0 ng/mL to about 30 ng/mL at about 4 hours after the administration; for administration of a dose of about 15 mg, about 120 ng/mL to about 180 ng/mL at about 0.25 hours after the administration; about 70 ng/mL to about 130 ng/mL at about 1 hour after the administration; about 20 ng/mL to about 70 ng/mL at about 2 hours after the administration; and about 0 ng/mL to about 40 ng/mL at about 4 hours after the administration; for administration of a dose of about 22.5 mg, about 190 ng/mL to about 250 ng/mL at about 0.25 hours after the administration; about 170 ng/mL to about 240 ng/mL at about 1 hour after the administration; about 70 ng/mL to about 120 ng/mL at about 2 hours after the administration; and about 10 ng/mL to about 60 ng/mL at about 4 hours after the administration; and for administration of a dose of about 30 mg, about 250 ng/mL to about 330 ng/mL at about 0.25 hours after the administration; about 270 ng/mL to about 330 ng/mL at about 1 hour after the administration; about 130 ng/mL to about 180 ng/mL at about 2 hours after the administration; and about 25 ng/mL to about 75 ng/mL at about 4 hours after the administration.
A method of treating a condition in a subject in need thereof, the method comprising administering to the subject a therapeutically-effective amount of a compound that activates Tie-2, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof, wherein the administration provides a plasma concentration in the subject of the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof of about 25 ng/mL to about 500 ng/mL.
The method of embodiment B1, wherein the plasma concentration in the subject of the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof is no greater than 350 ng/mL at about 0.25 hours after the administration.
The method of embodiment B2, wherein the plasma concentration in the subject of the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof is greater than 50 ng/mL.
The method of embodiment B1, wherein the plasma concentration in the subject of the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof is about 50 ng/mL to about 350 ng/mL at about 0.25 hours after the administration; about 30 ng/mL to about 350 ng/mL at about 1 hour after the administration; about 10 ng/mL to about 200 ng/mL at about 2 hours after the administration; and about 0 ng/mL to about 50 ng/mL at about 4 hours after the administration.
The method of embodiment B1, wherein the plasma concentration in the subject of the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof is for administration of a dose of about 5 mg, about 50 ng/mL to about 100 ng/mL at about 0.25 hours after the administration; about 30 ng/mL to about 80 ng/mL at about 1 hour after the administration; about 10 ng/mL to about 50 ng/mL at about 2 hours after the administration; and about 0 ng/mL to about 30 ng/mL at about 4 hours after the administration; for administration of a dose of about 15 mg, about 120 ng/mL to about 180 ng/mL at about 0.25 hours after the administration; about 70 ng/mL to about 130 ng/mL at about 1 hour after the administration; about 20 ng/mL to about 70 ng/mL at about 2 hours after the administration; and about 0 ng/mL to about 40 ng/mL at about 4 hours after the administration; for administration of a dose of about 22.5 mg, about 190 ng/mL to about 250 ng/mL at about 0.25 hours after the administration; about 170 ng/mL to about 240 ng/mL at about 1 hour after the administration; about 70 ng/mL to about 120 ng/mL at about 2 hours after the administration; and about 10 ng/mL to about 60 ng/mL at about 4 hours after the administration; and for administration of a dose of about 30 mg, about 250 ng/mL to about 330 ng/mL at about 0.25 hours after the administration; about 270 ng/mL to about 330 ng/mL at about 1 hour after the administration; about 130 ng/mL to about 180 ng/mL at about 2 hours after the administration; and about 25 ng/mL to about 75 ng/mL at about 4 hours after the administration.
The method of embodiment B1, wherein the compound that activates Tie-2, or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof, is administered in a unit dosage form, wherein the unit dosage form further comprises a pharmaceutically-acceptable excipient.
The method of embodiment B6, wherein the pharmaceutically-acceptable excipient comprises a poly-ethylene glycol moiety.
The method of embodiment B6, wherein the pharmaceutically-acceptable excipient comprises a cyclodextrin moiety.
The method of embodiment B6, wherein the pharmaceutically-acceptable excipient comprises a 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin moiety.
The method of embodiment B6, wherein the pharmaceutically-acceptable excipient comprises a sulfobutylether-β-cyclodextrin moiety.
The method of embodiment B6, wherein the compound that activates Tie-2, or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof, and the pharmaceutically-acceptable excipient are held in a complex by non-covalent interactions.
The method of embodiment B6, wherein the pharmaceutically-acceptable excipient comprises a surfactant moiety.
The method of embodiment B1, wherein the therapeutically-effective amount is from about 0.1 mg to about 100 mg.
The method of embodiment B1, wherein the therapeutically-effective amount is from about 0.5 mg to about 30 mg.
The method of embodiment B1, wherein the administration is subcutaneous.
The method of embodiment B1, wherein the administration is to an eye.
The method of embodiment B1, wherein the condition is an ocular condition.
The method of embodiment B1, wherein the condition is diabetic macular edema.
The method of embodiment B1, wherein the condition is diabetic retinopathy.
The method of embodiment B1, wherein the condition is macular degeneration.
The method of embodiment B1, wherein the condition is vascular leak.
The method of embodiment B1, wherein the condition is a cancer.
The method of embodiment B1, wherein the subject is a human.
The method of embodiment B1, wherein the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof binds HPTP-beta.
The method of embodiment B1, wherein the compound that activates
Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof inhibits HPTP-beta.
The method of embodiment B I, wherein the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof is a phosphate mimetic.
The method of embodiment B1, wherein the compound that activates Tie-2 comprises an amino acid backbone.
The method of embodiment B1, wherein the compound that activates Tie-2 comprises a sulfamic acid.
The method of embodiment B1, wherein the subject's visual acuity improves by at least 5 letters.
The method of embodiment B9, wherein the compound that activates Tie-2 is:
or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt or zwitterion thereof.
The method of embodiment B30, wherein a plasma concentration in the subject of the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof is no greater than 350 ng/mL at about 0.25 hours after the administration.
The method of embodiment B30, wherein the plasma concentration in the subject of the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof is about 50 ng/mL to about 350 ng/mL at about 0.25 hours after the administration; about 30 ng/mL to about 350 ng/mL at about 1 hour after the administration; about 10 ng/mL to about 200 ng/mL at about 2 hours after the administration; and about 0 ng/mL to about 50 ng/mL at about 4 hours after the administration.
The method of embodiment B30, wherein the plasma concentration in the subject of the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof is for administration of a dose of about 5 mg, about 50 ng/mL to about 100 ng/mL at about 0.25 hours after the administration; about 30 ng/mL to about 80 ng/mL at about 1 hour after the administration; about 10 ng/mL to about 50 ng/mL at about 2 hours after the administration; and about 0 ng/mL to about 30 ng/mL at about 4 hours after the administration; for administration of a dose of about 15 mg, about 120 ng/mL to about 180 ng/mL at about 0.25 hours after the administration; about 70 ng/mL to about 130 ng/mL at about 1 hour after the administration; about 20 ng/mL to about 70 ng/mL at about 2 hours after the administration; and about 0 ng/mL to about 40 ng/mL at about 4 hours after the administration; for administration of a dose of about 22.5 mg, about 190 ng/mL to about 250 ng/mL at about 0.25 hours after the administration; about 170 ng/mL to about 240 ng/mL at about 1 hour after the administration; about 70 ng/mL to about 120 ng/mL at about 2 hours after the administration; and about 10 ng/mL to about 60 ng/mL at about 4 hours after the administration; and for administration of a dose of about 30 mg, about 250 ng/mL to about 330 ng/mL at about 0.25 hours after the administration; about 270 ng/mL to about 330 ng/mL at about 1 hour after the administration; about 130 ng/mL to about 180 ng/mL at about 2 hours after the administration; and about 25 ng/mL to about 75 ng/mL at about 4 hours after the administration.
The method of any above embodiment wherein the compound that activates Tie-2 is any compound described herein.
A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound that activates Tie-2, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof and an agent that increases solubility of the compound that activates Tie-2, or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof compared to solubility in absence of the agent.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment C1, wherein the agent that increases solubility of the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof comprises a polymer.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment C1, wherein the agent that increases solubility of the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof comprises a poly-ethylene glycol moiety.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment C1, wherein the agent that increases solubility of the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof comprises a cyclodextrin moiety.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment C1, wherein the agent that increases solubility of the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof comprises a 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin moiety.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment C1, wherein the agent that increases solubility of the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof comprises a sulfobutylether-β-cyclodextrin moiety.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment C1, wherein the agent that increases solubility of the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof comprises a surfactant moiety.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment C1, wherein the agent that increases solubility of the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof increases aqueous solubility by at least 10% at each of 5° C., ambient temperature, and 50° C.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment C1, wherein the agent that increases solubility of the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof improves solubility by at least 25%.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment C1, wherein the agent that increases solubility of the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof improves solubility by at least 50%.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment C1, wherein the agent that increases solubility of the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof is a cyclodextrin, and the pharmaceutical composition has a solubility of the compound that activates Tie-2, or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof, that is greater than that of an alternative formulation, wherein the alternative formulation comprises the compound that activates Tie-2, or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof; the cyclodextrin; and a polyethylene glycol moiety.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment C1, wherein the compound that activates Tie-2, or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof, is present in an amount from about 0.1 mg to about 100 mg.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment C1, wherein the compound that activates Tie-2, or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof, is present in an amount from about 0.5 mg to about 30 mg.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment C1, wherein the pharmaceutical composition is stable at about 5° C. for at least 30 days.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment C1, wherein the pharmaceutical composition is stable at about 50° C. for at least 30 days.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment C1, wherein the compound that activates Tie-2, or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof, and the agent that increases solubility of the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof are in a unit dosage form.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment C16, wherein the unit dosage for further comprises a pharmaceutically-acceptable carrier.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment C16, wherein the unit dosage form is formulated for subcutaneous administration.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment C16, wherein the unit dosage form is formulated for administration to an eye.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment C1, wherein the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof binds HPTP-beta.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment C1, wherein the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof inhibits HPTP-beta.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment C1, wherein the compound that activates Tie-2 or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof is a phosphate mimetic.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment C1, wherein the compound that activates Tie-2 comprises an amino acid backbone.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment C1, wherein the compound that activates Tie-2 comprises a sulfamic acid.
The pharmaceutical composition of any above embodiment wherein the compound that activates Tie-2 is any compound described herein.
A pharmaceutical composition comprising a Tie-2 activator or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof, and an antibody.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment D1, wherein the Tie-2 activator or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof binds HPTP-beta.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment D1, wherein the Tie-2 activator or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof inhibits HPTP-beta.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment D1, wherein the Tie-2 activator or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof is a phosphate mimetic.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment D1, wherein the Tie-2 activator comprises an amino acid backbone.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment D1, wherein the Tie-2 activator comprises a sulfamic acid.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment D1, wherein the antibody binds HPTP-beta.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment D1, wherein the antibody is an anti-VEGF agent.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment D1, wherein the antibody is ranibizumab.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment D1, wherein the antibody is bevacizumab.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment D1, wherein the antibody is aflibercept.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment D1, wherein the antibody comprises SEQ ID NO: 1.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment DI, wherein the antibody comprises SEQ ID NO: 2.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment D1, wherein the antibody comprises SEQ ID NO: 1 and SEQ ID NO: 2.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment D1, wherein the Tie-2 activator or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof and the antibody are in a unit dosage form, wherein the unit dosage form further comprises a pharmaceutically-acceptable excipient.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment D15, wherein the pharmaceutically-acceptable excipient comprises a poly-ethylene glycol moiety.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment D15, wherein the pharmaceutically-acceptable excipient comprises a cyclodextrin moiety.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment D15, wherein the pharmaceutically-acceptable excipient comprises a 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin moiety.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment D15, wherein the pharmaceutically-acceptable excipient comprises a sulfobutylether-β-cyclodextrin moiety.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment D15, wherein the Tie-2 activator, or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof, and the pharmaceutically-acceptable excipient are held in a complex by non-covalent interactions.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment D15, wherein the pharmaceutically-acceptable excipient comprises a surfactant moiety.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment D15, wherein the unit dosage form is formulated for subcutaneous administration.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment D15, wherein the unit dosage form is formulated for administration to an eye.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment D1, wherein the Tie-2 activator is present in an amount from about 0.1 mg to about 100 mg.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment D1, wherein the Tie-2 activator is present in an amount from about 0.5 mg to about 30 mg.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment D1, wherein the antibody is present in an amount from about 0.01 mg to about 5 mg.
The pharmaceutical composition of embodiment D1, wherein the antibody is present in an amount from about 0.1 mg to about 5 mg.
The pharmaceutical composition of any above embodiment wherein the compound that activates Tie-2 is any compound described herein.
A kit comprising a Tie-2 activator or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof, an antibody, and written instructions on use of the kit in treatment of a condition.
The kit of embodiment D1, wherein the condition is an ocular condition.
The kit of embodiment D1, wherein the condition is an ocular condition.
The kit of embodiment D1, wherein the condition is diabetic macular edema.
The kit of embodiment D1, wherein the condition is diabetic retinopathy.
The kit of embodiment D1, wherein the condition is macular degeneration.
The kit of embodiment D1, wherein the condition is vascular leak.
The kit of embodiment D1, wherein the condition is a cancer.
The kit of embodiment D1, wherein the instructions describe administration by subcutaneous injection.
The kit of embodiment D1, wherein the instructions describe administration to an eye.
The kit of any above embodiment wherein the Tie-2 activator is any compound described herein.
A method of treating a condition, the method comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically-effective amount of a Tie-2 activator or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof and a therapeutically-effective amount of an antibody.
The method of embodiment E1, wherein the Tie-2 activator or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof binds HPTP-beta.
The method of embodiment E1, wherein the Tie-2 activator or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof inhibits HPTP-beta.
The method of embodiment E1, wherein the Tie-2 activator or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof is a phosphate mimetic.
The method of embodiment E1, wherein the Tie-2 activator comprises an amino acid backbone.
The method of embodiment E1, wherein the Tie-2 activator comprises a sulfamic acid.
The method of embodiment E1, wherein the antibody binds HPTP-beta.
The method of embodiment E1, wherein the antibody is an anti-VEGF agent.
The method of embodiment E1, wherein the antibody is ranibizumab.
The method of embodiment E1, wherein the antibody is bevacizumab.
The method of embodiment E1, wherein the antibody is aflibercept.
The method of embodiment E1, wherein the antibody comprises SEQ ID NO: 1.
The method of embodiment E1, wherein the antibody comprises SEQ ID NO: 2.
The method of embodiment E1, wherein the antibody comprises SEQ ID NO: 1 and SEQ ID NO: 2.
The method of embodiment E1, wherein the Tie-2 activator or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof and the antibody are in a unit dosage form, wherein the unit dosage form further comprises a pharmaceutically-acceptable excipient.
The method of embodiment E15, wherein the pharmaceutically-acceptable excipient comprises a poly-ethylene glycol moiety.
The method of embodiment E15, wherein the pharmaceutically-acceptable excipient comprises a cyclodextrin moiety.
The method of embodiment E15, wherein the pharmaceutically-acceptable excipient comprises a 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin moiety.
The method of embodiment E15, wherein the pharmaceutically-acceptable excipient comprises a sulfobutylether-β-cyclodextrin moiety.
The method of embodiment E15, wherein the Tie-2 activator, or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof, and the pharmaceutically-acceptable excipient are held in a complex by non-covalent interactions.
The method of embodiment E15, wherein the pharmaceutically-acceptable excipient comprises a surfactant moiety.
The method of embodiment E1, wherein the therapeutically-effective amount of the Tie-2 activator or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof is from about 0.1 mg to about 100 mg.
The method of embodiment E1, wherein the therapeutically-effective amount of the Tie-2 activator or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof is from about 0.5 mg to about 30 mg.
The method of embodiment E1, wherein the therapeutically-effective amount of the antibody is from about 0.01 mg to about 5 mg.
The method of embodiment E1, wherein the therapeutically-effective amount of the antibody is from about 0.1 mg to about 5 mg.
The method of embodiment E1, wherein the administration of the Tie-2 activator or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof is subcutaneous administration.
The method of embodiment E1, wherein the administration of the antibody is subcutaneous administration.
The method of embodiment E1, wherein the administration of the Tie-2 activator or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof is to an eye.
The method of embodiment E1, wherein the administration of the antibody is to an eye.
The method of embodiment E1, wherein the Tie-2 activator or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof and the antibody are administered simultaneously.
The method of embodiment E1, wherein the Tie-2 activator or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof and the antibody are administered sequentially.
The method of embodiment E31, wherein the sequential administration is administration of the Tie-2 activator or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof and the antibody on the same day.
The method of embodiment E31, wherein the sequential administration is administration of the Tie-2 activator or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof and the antibody within one month.
The method of embodiment E1, wherein the condition is an ocular condition.
The method of embodiment E1, wherein the condition is diabetic macular edema.
The method of embodiment E1, wherein the condition is diabetic retinopathy.
The method of embodiment E1, wherein the condition is macular degeneration.
The method of embodiment E1, wherein the condition is vascular leak.
The method of embodiment E1, wherein the condition is a cancer.
The method of embodiment E1, wherein the subject is a human.
The method of embodiment E1, wherein the subject's visual acuity improves by at least 5 letters.
The method of any above embodiment wherein the Tie-2 activator is any compound described herein.
A complex comprising a Tie-2 activator, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof, and a molecule comprising a channel, wherein the compound that activates Tie-2, or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof is held in the channel of the molecule by non-covalent interactions.
The complex of embodiment F1, wherein the Tie-2 activator or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof binds HPTP-beta.
The complex of embodiment F1, wherein the Tie-2 activator or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof inhibits HPTP-beta.
The complex of embodiment F1, wherein the Tie-2 activator or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof is a phosphate mimetic.
The complex of embodiment F1, wherein the Tie-2 activator comprises an amino acid backbone.
The complex of embodiment F1, wherein the Tie-2 activator comprises a sulfamic acid.
The complex of embodiment F1, wherein the molecule comprising the channel comprises a cyclodextrin moiety.
The complex of embodiment F1, wherein the molecule comprising the channel comprises a 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin moiety.
The complex of embodiment F1, wherein the molecule comprising the channel comprises a sulfobutylether-β-cyclodextrin moiety.
The complex of embodiment F1, wherein the complex is more soluble in water than is the Tie-2 activator in the absence of the molecule comprising the channel.
The complex of any above embodiment wherein the Tie-2 activator is any compound described herein.
A method of treating a condition, the method comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically-effective amount of complex comprising a Tie-2 activator, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof and a molecule comprising a channel, wherein the Tie-2 activator or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof is held in the channel of the molecule by non-covalent interactions.
The method of embodiment G1, wherein the Tie-2 activator or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof binds HPTP-beta.
The method of embodiment G1, wherein the Tie-2 activator or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof inhibits HPTP-beta.
The method of embodiment G1, wherein the Tie-2 activator or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof is a phosphate mimetic.
The method of embodiment G1, wherein the Tie-2 activator comprises an amino acid backbone.
The method of embodiment G1, wherein the Tie-2 activator comprises a sulfamic acid.
The method of embodiment G1, wherein the molecule comprising the channel comprises a cyclodextrin moiety.
The method of embodiment G1, wherein the molecule comprising the channel comprises a 2-hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin moiety.
The method of embodiment G1, wherein the molecule comprising the channel comprises a sulfobutylether-β-cyclodextrin moiety.
The method of embodiment G1, wherein the complex is more soluble in water than is the Tie-2 activator in the absence of the molecule comprising the channel.
The method of embodiment G1, wherein the administration of the complex is subcutaneous administration.
The method of embodiment G1, wherein the administration of the complex is to an eye.
The method of embodiment G1, wherein the complex is in a unit dosage form.
The method of embodiment G1, wherein the therapeutically-effective amount of the complex is from about 0.1 mg to about 300 mg.
The method of embodiment G1, wherein the therapeutically-effective amount of the Tie-2 activator or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof is from about 0.5 mg to about 100 mg.
The method of embodiment G1, wherein the condition is an ocular condition.
The method of embodiment G1, wherein the condition is diabetic macular edema.
The method of embodiment G1, wherein the condition is diabetic retinopathy.
The method of embodiment G1, wherein the condition is macular degeneration.
The method of embodiment G1, wherein the condition is vascular leak.
The method of embodiment G1, wherein the condition is a cancer.
The method of embodiment G1, further comprising administering to the subject a therapeutically-effective amount of an additional therapeutic agent.
The method of embodiment G22, wherein the additional therapeutic agent is an antibody.
The method of embodiment G22, wherein the additional therapeutic agent binds HPTP-beta.
The method of embodiment G22, wherein the additional therapeutic agent is an anti-VEGF agent.
The method of embodiment G22, wherein the additional therapeutic agent is ranibizumab.
The method of embodiment G22, wherein the additional therapeutic agent is bevacizumab.
The method of embodiment G22, wherein the additional therapeutic agent is aflibercept.
The method of embodiment G22, wherein the additional therapeutic agent comprises SEQ ID NO: 1.
The method of embodiment G22, wherein the additional therapeutic agent comprises SEQ ID NO: 2.
The method of embodiment G22, wherein the additional therapeutic agent comprises SEQ ID NO: 1 and SEQ ID NO: 2.
The method of embodiment G22, wherein the therapeutically-effective amount of the additional therapeutic agent is from about 0.01 mg to about 5 mg.
The method of embodiment G22, wherein the therapeutically-effective amount of the additional therapeutic agent is from about 0.1 mg to about 5 mg.
The method of embodiment G22, wherein the administration of the additional therapeutic agent is subcutaneous administration.
The method of embodiment G22, wherein the administration of the additional therapeutic agent is to an eye.
The method of embodiment G22, wherein the complex and the additional therapeutic agent are administered simultaneously.
The method of embodiment G22, wherein the complex and the additional therapeutic agent are administered sequentially.
The method of embodiment G37, wherein the sequential administration is administration of the Tie-2 activator or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof and the antibody on the same day.
The method of embodiment G37, wherein the sequential administration is administration of the Tie-2 activator or the pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof and the antibody within one month.
The method of embodiment G1, wherein the subject is a human.
The method of embodiment G1, wherein the subject's visual acuity improves by at least 5 letters.
The method of any above embodiment wherein the Tie-2 activator is any compound described herein.
This application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/792,868, filed Mar. 15, 2013, U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/792,679, filed Mar. 15, 2013, U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/882,056, filed Sep. 25, 2013, U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/882,048, filed Sep. 25, 2013 and U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/934,570, filed Jan. 31, 2014, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
| Number | Date | Country | |
|---|---|---|---|
| 61792868 | Mar 2013 | US | |
| 61792679 | Mar 2013 | US | |
| 61882056 | Sep 2013 | US | |
| 61882048 | Sep 2013 | US | |
| 61934570 | Jan 2014 | US |
